DEC_Field_Service_Technical_Manual_1972 DEC Field Service Technical Manual 1972

User Manual: DEC_Field_Service_Technical_Manual_1972

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 493

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

CPL

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit
Title

18 Bit

36Bit

Processor Applicability

J 11 ~s I I I I I

ADOI

Tech Tip
Number ADOI-TT-l

ADOI MULTIPLEXER F.E.T. Leakage

All
Q'

Option or Designator

Author

R. Adams

Approval

J. Blundell Date 12/07/72

Rev

Cross Reference

The F.E.T. multiplexers that switch the analogue inputs to the
AD01 will float in an undetermined state when power is not
supplied to them.
This will result in cross-talk between the inputs and possibly
even damage to the F.E.T.'s or the customers equipment in
extreme cases.
There is no possibility of a field change to influence the F.E.T.
characteristics, (extensive re-design would be necessary), so
warn the customers who might be affected directly to keep the
AD01 power on when the system is in use.

Title
All

ADOI Source Impedance Problems
Processor Applicability

8~ 11/51

I I I I I

Author

A. Thompson

Approval G.

Chaisson

Rev
Date

/Tech Tip ADOI-TT-2
Number
Cross Reference
0

12/08/72

When using an ADOI A/D converter with more than one channel, the
customer will experience bad readings when switching between
channels if his source impedance is too high. Only the first
readings on the newly selected channel will be in error.
This problem is inherent in A/D converters using the ADOI
technique of multiplexing and sampling.
It is caused by impedance
and capacitance in the cables, wires and components slowing down
the system charge time if the source impedance is too high. The
error may be as high as 4 or 5 counts on the first conversion and
varies with configuration, customer cable length, source impedance,
etc.
There are two ways to circumvent this characteristic.
1.

Keep source impedance down around 1,000 ohms (lKJ4).

If a high source impedance is a customer necessity, have his
program select the new channel and/or gain and take two or
more conversions, using only the last conversion. The last
conversion will be accurate.

IPAGE

II PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

December 1972
-----'

momoomo
Title
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

ADOIA
36Bit

0
lTech Tip ADOlA-TT-l

ADOIA POWER SUPPLY PROBLEMS
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Option or Designator

Number

Author

G. Chaisson

Approval

Cummins

Rev
Date

Cross Reference

07/31/72

Problem:

ADOlA A/D converters that have AH04 and AHOS
(Sample/Hold and Sign bit bipolar) options
installed have been exhibiting a power supply
problem. The problem is seen when more than
three (3) A124 modules (12 channels) are installed.
The symptoms are that the positive 15 volt drops
to 8 - 10 volts. This drop in the +15 volt line
also causes the +5 to drop and the -15 likewise.

Cause:

The cause of this problem is the use of the
Deltron PiN 12-03185-3 Power Supply, which during
power up, becomes overloaded and due to its inherent
characteristics cannot recover from the overload
condition.

Correction:

An ECO A708-0003 adds a 47 ufd cap. 20V 10% and a
97.f4 ~w resistor from collector of 02 a DEC 2219
transistor to GND, AC.
+15V, AE

02
DEC
2219

GND p AC
Correction:

This problem is also corrected with the installation
of a Power Mate power supply PiN 12-03185-3.

NOTE:

This is not a problem on ADOl-D used with PDP-II's.

\PAGE

II PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title

Processor Applicability

A"
8's

ITeCh Tip
Number

~Bak~c~~b~~ATION - CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

I I I I I I 1

Author

Adams/Goelz

Approval

Cummins

Rev

AD01A-TT-2
Cross Reference

Date 07/31/72

The following are corrections to the AD01-A Calibration Procedures
A-SP-ADOl-A-06:
Section 4.2.1
Should read:

Section 4.2.7
Should read;

connect the E.D.C. to the A40S input pin
A1352 'and A13S2 (ground).

remove A220 module then restart program at 202;
adjust the offset coarse pot (Figure 4.2) so that
the AC switches from 1776-1777 or as close to
this state as possible.

Section 6.2
Add:
Remove A220 module.
Section 7
Line 2 should read:

Title

(slot A14). ,Connect the EDC between pins
Al4P2 and A13F2 (ground).

Line 13 should read:

If gross errors are experienced in the
last test, remove the Al24 from B14.

Line 16 should read:

If this test passes but the preceding
does not, the problem is probably in the
Al24 (BI4).

AD01A -

CAUT~ON

ITech Tip
Number

NOTES

Processor Applicability

A"8'sI I I I I I I

Author

G. Ghaisson

Approval

Cummins

Rev

AD01A-TT-3
Cross Reference

Date Q7 /31/72

The Maintenance Manual for the ADOI-A analog to digital converter subnotes be added to the calibration procedure
in the appendix.
These caution notes are to prevent possible damage
to equipment.

system requires caution

ADOI-A Calibration Procedure,
Section 3.1 add note:
CAUTION:

Section 3,

Basic ADOI-A,

before

Turn off the AC power to the computer and remove
the *A405 and A220 modules.
If they are not
removed damage may result.

Before Section 3.3 Range Adjustment,
CAUTION:

rage -2-

Make certain the *A40S and A220 modules have
been remo v ed hefore setting the EDC voltage to
-9.9853 volts.

mamaama
Title

All
SIS

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

[]I

ADOIA
16 Bit

18 Bit

36Bit

Approval

w. Cummins

ADOIA - CAUTION NOTES (Continued)
Processor Applicability
Author G. Chaisson

I I I

Option or Designator

Rev

Tech Tip
Number ADOIA-TT-3
Cross Reference
0

Date 07/31/72

Before Section 4 Adjustment of the A40S,
NOTE:

At this time turn AC power off and replace the A40S
in slot ABI3.
The A220 should remain out at this
time.

*A40S is the Sample and Hold module which is optional in this unit.

Title
All

\Tech Tip ADOIA-TT-4
Number
Cross Reference
Rev
0

ADOIA - INITIAL CONVERSION IN ACCURACY
Processor Applicability

I 8 I 8IIsLIsEIlli

Author

G. Chaisson

Approval

w. Cummins

Date Q7/31/72

Problem - recently two ADOl's have exhibited a peCUliar problem when
attempting to take conversions and change either gain and/or channel.
The symptoms appear as a non-stable input causing conversion readings
to start at an incorrect value.
Successive conversions approach a
value near what it should be when only one channel is used.
Use of more
than one channel will disguise these symptoms into hash that may appear
meaningless.
Solution - this problem can be observed on a scope at the output of the
A220* switch gain amplifier Al4 pin V2.
The output waveform should be a very distinctive step (either positive
or negative, depending on input) of less than 1 usec rise time as the
gain is changed or a different input channel is selected.

~___'-Ir ~ ~ ..

Good Wave Form:

Bad Wave Form:

= values

actually converted

Solution - this problem is totally corrected by replacing the Al24* used
for switching the gain in B14.
* AD01-D

PAGE 3

A220 Location Al6
A124 Location B16

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1 9 72

momoamo
Title

All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit ~

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 I

36 Bit

al8I1

I J I I

Author

G. Chaisson

Approval

W. Cummins

AD08-B

Tech Tip
Number AD08-B-TT-l

TEST ROUTINE FOR AD08-B MULTIPLEXER
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Rev

Cross Reference

Date 07/31/72

The AD08-B maintenance manual, and other sources, suggest short maintenance programs which are incorrect and give indications of problems
which do not actually exist.
The following program does work and can be used for most maintenance
purposes.

20/7604
21/6542
22/6531
23/5022
24/6534
25/7200
26/6532
27/6531
30/5027
31/6534
32/2100
33/5032
34/5020

Load Channel from SR
Select Channel and Convert
Skip on A/D Done
Not done
Read A/D Buffer
Clear AC
A/D Convert
Skip on A/D Done
Not done
Read A/D Buffer
Stall Loop
JMP .-1
JMP and do again

** The lOT 6542 (ADSC) must be followed by an lOT 6531 (ADSF) before
attempting to select another channel (6542) or before an A/D convert
(6532) can be issued.
George Chaisson

IpAGE 1

June 1970

II PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

mamaama
Title

I
8's
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16 Bit

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

Tech Tip
Number AFC-TT-l
Author

I I I I I I

AFC

AFC DIAGNOSTIC
Processor Appl icability

Option or Designator

Approval

Cross Reference

Rev

G091z

G. Chaisson

Date

0
07/27/72

AFC diagnost.ic does not recognize ASR35/KSR35 or LA3$3'
altmode codes.
When using the AFC-8 diagnostic MAINDEC-08-D6VA on a
system that has an ASR35 or KSR35, it is necessary to
change a location in the program. This is necessary
since the code for the ALTMODE key is different on the 35
(376) than the 33 (375). The change is
Location:

6404 - change from 7403 to 7402

When using an LA30 make the following change (altmode
code = 233):
Location:
I

,tie

All

8' s

6404 - change from 7403 to 7545
Tech Tip
Number

AFC-8 TIMING ADJUSTMENTS
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

Author
Approval

Rev

A. Thompson
G

C:hrl;~~{"\n

Date

AFC-TT-2
Cross Reference

1 ? If) Q I'J?

The AFC-8 Diagnostic write-up (Maindec-08-D6VA-DL) contains a
Timing Adjustment Procedure (paragraph 5.5.2.1).
It presently
calls for a 2 ms wide pulse from the M3~2 at AM~4-F~2T2 (lower
pot) .
This pulse being adjusted for only 2 ms will cause the AFC
Readings to drift on high gain and will make calibration of the
AFC difficult.
Change the procedure to read as follows:
Adjust lower potentiometer on M302
a 3 ms wide pulse.

(located at AM04-F02) for

This is a correction to the AFC-8 Diagnostic Write-up only. The
AFC-8 Engineering Specifications calls out a 3 ms wide pulse.

~IP_A_G_E_ _ _l---uU_P_A_G_E_R_E_V_IS_IO_N_ __A_

nPUBLICATION DATE

December 1972

momooma
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

AGOl
12 Bit

16 Bit

18 Bit

AGOl or AG02 PRESTON AMPLIFIERS
Processor Applicability

All

I a

Option or Designator

I all aLI I I I

Author

G. Chaisson

Approval

Cummins

36Bit

lTeCh Tip
Number AGOl-TT-l
a
Cross Reference
Rev
Date 07/31/72

Suggested PM service of Preston Amplifiers on contract:
The maintenance manual describes three tests for the Preston
Amplifiers:
Gain Accuracy
Linearity
Common Mode Rejection
These tests should be made periodically (every 1500 hours of
operation) as a part of the PM routine.
In addition two other
things can be done:

A check of the chopper circuit with a scope,
checking for noisey sig'n als (noise 50 mv P-P)
indicating necessity of replacing the chopper.

On a customer requested basis and at a $60 fix cost
replacement of the chopper on a yearly periodic
ba sis. ( P / N 0 E C 2 9 - 1 83 1 3 )

These suggestions are an attempt to improve customer satisfaction
with service of these units on contract.
Corrective maintenance is normally accomplished by returning the
amplifiers to Preston for repair and recalibration.

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Jul ' 1972

momDDma
Title
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit {]

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 I

AG02
36 Bit

0
ITech Tip
Number

AGOl and AG02 PRESTON AMPLIFIERS
Processor Applicability

I S ISllsLI I I I

PAGE 1

Author

G. Chaisson

Approval W. Cummins

PAGE REVISION

Option or Designator

Rev

Cross Reference

Date 07/31/72

PUBLICATION DATE

AG02-TT-l

AG01-TT-l

July 1972

CPL

mamBDma
Title
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

(i]\

16 Bit

18 Bit

kJ I

AM03
36Bit

0
,Tech Tip
Number AM03-TT-l

AM08-AM03 TIMING
Processor Applicability

I 8 II 9 1 15

1121 I I

Option or Designator

Author

G. Chaisson

Approval

w. Cummins

Rev

Cross Reference

Date

Low Level Multiplexer
The AlII multiplexer relay modules have been found to bounce and
interfere with reliable AID conversions. This problem appears in
two different types of operation. First, if a single channel is
selected and reselected the problem can show up. Typically, what
a programmer may do is select a channel and allow the channel
selection to cause an AID conversion from the AM08.
If another
conversion is desired on the already selected channel, a reselection
of that channel will cause the AID conversion but will probably
cause that relay to bounce arid produce unreliable data. Second
case would be if an attempt is made to select channels at a rate
greater than 180 channels per second.
The problem sterns from the fact that the relays used on the AlII
module are specified such that the relay must be opened or closed
for a minimum of 2.5 milliseconds. This plus AM08-AM03 timing yields
a maximum of 180 selectable channels per second with the stipulation
that no channel is reselected.
(Reselection of the same channel
operates the relay faster than specified.)
An ECOhas been written for AM08 timing.
If a program cannot be
changed, ECO ~HH~~6, AMO 8 could be accomplished to reduce the likelihood of unreliable AID conversion results.

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

CPL

mDmDomo
Title
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

lXJl

16 Bit

18 Bit

36Bit

\8I\9

h5~2

[P"AGEl

I I

Author

G. Chaisson

Approval

II PAGE REVISION

Cummins Date

AM08

AM08 AM03 - TIMING
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Rev

Tech Tip AM08-TT-1
Number
Cross Reference
0

07/31/72

o nPUBLICATION DATE

AM03-TT-1

July 1972

momODma
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

[]

16 Bit

18 Bit

0 I

36Bit

I 8 I 8I1 I I I I

Problem:

AXOB

Tech Tip
Number

8I-AX08 INCORRECT PRINTS
Processor Applicability

All

0 I

Option or Designator

Author

T.~~ev

Approval

Cummins

Rev

0
Date 07/31/72

AXOB-TT-l
Cross Reference

Logic Prints do not reflect the following:
1.
2.
3.

How RCLK is cleared by the rOT CLRK.
How CLYK is cleared by the rOT CLXK.
The origin of the signal external.

The rOT RCLK is decoded as RCLK 0'», (refer to
D-BS-AX08-0-l sheet 1 at coordinates B 1/2, 6)
at pin F of the Rl13 in slot A14.
This signal
collector clears the RCLK flip-flop at pin M of
the R203 in slot C12 (D-BS-AX08-0-2 at coordinates
D,S) .

2..

The rOT CLXK is decoded as XTAL CLK(f'), (D-BS-AX08-0-l
sheet 1 at coordinates B 1/2, 7) at pin K of the Rl13
in slot A14.
This signal collector clears the XTAL CLK
flip-flop at pin F of the R203 in slot C12 (D-BS-AXOB-O-2
at coordinates D, 21/2).

Refer to D-BS-AXOB-O-2 coordinates D, 6 and make the
following additions .

Answers:

....---ExcK

"""
E )(TERw;J.t~~ RI;'
.

'=
1;-

. 'I

ADD ~'\",_J

PAGE 1

A1.'1
*External clock BNC connector

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title
All

AX08 - RANGE CAPACITOR PROBLEM

Processor Applicability

Author

is j SI ISL I I I I

Nunlel1

Approval w. Cummins

,TeCh Tip AX08-TT-2
Number
Cross Reference
Rev
0
Date 07/31/72

Some AX08's have been shipped to the field with some of
the range capaci tors for the RC clock revers'ed.
If any
capacitors are reversed, there will be no output from
the RC clock for that position of the range switch. The
capacitors are electrolytic and all should have their
positive ends connected to the top waffer of the range
switch.
This waffer may be identified by measuring
continuity from the center tap (white wire) to terminal
3 of R4 (fine control below the range switch.
/mt

Title

LAB S/AXOS Wiring Error
Processor Applicability

All 181

I I

Rev
Frank Purcell
~
Approval D. Dubav
Date 07/31/72
Author

ITech
TiPAXOS-TT-3
Number
Cross Reference

It has been discovered that all AX08's shipped prior to April
1969 have an error in the wiring of the X display register.
The AX08 diagnostic and the Lab-8 software package both run
normally. Any customer program which is displaying a base
line may have one or two points displayed at random above or
below the base line.
The following wiring changes must be made:
Delete
Delete
Add
Add

B21M
B17V
B17V
BISM

to
to
to
to

B2lV
B16K
B16J
Bl6H

Markup the X and Y register print to show that on all X register
R205's, the pulse inputs at Pin M are labeled "Load Xl"~ the pin
V inputs should be labeled "Load X2". An ECO is being prepared
and will be issued shortly.

Page -2-

...

CPL

mamaama

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

Gli

16 Bit

A633

Gli

18 Bit

GJI

36Bit

POWER LOW CIRCUIT IN A633 MODULES

Title

Processor Applicability
All 1

81111151

I I I

Author

Option or Designator

Rev

A. Thompson

Approval G. Chaisson

Tech Tip A633-TT-l
Number
Cross Reference
~

Date 7-31-72

PROBLEM:
The A663 module used in the UDC 8/11/15 has a power low circuit.
If the UDC + SVDC supply drops below 4.68 volts, ground will be
applied to the "LOAD" pulse (Pin CH2 on the A633) to prevent
changing the DAC output.
The "POWER LOW" circuit whose output is Q42 emitter or the A633
is biased and operated by the +SV and +18V of the H738 DAC supply.
If the +5 and/or +18 H738 DAC supplies change value beyond a certain
point, or R60 is misadjusted, or a circuit component fails,
"LOAD" on Pin CH2 will be grounded even though the UDC +5 supply
is correct.
The "LOAD" pulse on Pin CH2 is common to the other three functional
slots in that DD02 and grounding of load by an A633 prevents
outputting to other modules in that 0002. This problem will not affect
other DD02's since "LOAD" is buffered by each DD02.
SOLUTION:
An ECO is ' being generated to correct this problem.

ECO #A633-00002

No Calibration Procedure is available in the Field for the "Power
Low" circuit (R60) on the A633 module. If it is determined that R60
is out of adjustment use the following procedure.
1.

Set the UDC (H72l or H740 supply) +sV input to the A633 module
Pins AA2;-BA2, CA2, and DA2, to 4,6 VDC + .05 volts.

A4just R60 fulty clockwise (CW).
Note: 4 Double heigth extenders (W984( are required to enable
access to R60.

Insure that the +5V + .25V,-l8 +.OlV and +18 + .01V of the H738

~ supply are within tolerance7

Slowly adjust R60 until gate E19 pin 13 jsut goes to ground.

Adjust

Slowly lower the UDC to +5V and insure that gate E19 pin 13
goes to ground as the ~ +5V passes through 4.68 + .05V

Readjust the UDC +5 to 5.1

PAGEl

the UDC +5V abck to 5V.

PAGE REVISION

.025 volts.

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

momouma
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

18Bit

BC01V WIRING ERROR
Processor Applicability

All

16Bit

IBE I

Author

Bill Freeman

Approval W E

36Bit

Option or Designator

BCJH

,TeCh Tip BC 01 -TT- 1
Number
Cross Reference
Rev 0

Cummins Date 06/06/72

Some BC01V cables have made their way to the field which have
the black wire that should be attached to pin VV on the Berg
cable terminator connected to the unlabeled slot below pin VV.
To correct this problem move the wire from the incorrect
position to the proper one.
The BC01V cables can be used on KL8E/A-G, KL8FA-K, OP8EA.

C
E
H
K
M

P
S
U
W

Y
AA

CC
EE
HH
KK
MM

PP
SS
UU

PAGE 1

••

re• ••

••• ••

o
F

...

•.•• •
• ••
•• •
•• •
•
•
••

L
T
V

X
Z

BB
DO
FF
JJ

•• •• LL
RR
•• •• TT
•• •• * •
NN

VV4.~____CORRECT

PAGE REVISION

LOCATION
INCORRECT LOCATION

PUBLICATION DATE June 13, 1972

mamaoma .-F_IE_LD""",",,:::S~E_RV_IC_E~T--rEC_H_NI_CA_L__M_A_NU_A~'L
12Bit
Title
All

KJ I

16Bit

10Bit

36Bit

I SIssloIloE\SL I I

Author

CABLING RULES

Tech Tip CABLING RULES

RULES FOR CABLE USAGE
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Number

Don White

Approval W Cummins

Rev

TT-l
Cross Reference

Date 07/31/72

Rule #1
Round and flat coax are electrically interchangeable, and may be
intermixed in a system. Round coax is preferable for interconnecting
free-standing cabinets, since it is far more resistant to the elephantlike feet of computer operators.
Rule #2
Ribbon cable and unshielded flexprint are "for the birds". Any person
using such a cable on an 8-Family I/O bus does so at his own peril,
and had better not get caught.
Rule #3
The maximum length of coax which may be used on the programmed I/O bus
is 50 ft.
Rule #4
The maximum length of coax which may be used on the data-break bus
is 30 ft.
Rule #5 .
Indiscri~inate intermixing of shielded flexprint and coax is not advised.
For consistency, and minimum cost, we recommend all cables be shielded
flexprint unless used to interconnect free-standing cabinets, or to
gain maximum length. No more than one change from flexprint to coax
(or vice-versa) is permitted over the length of a bus.

Rule *6
Shielded flexprint (flexprint cables with alternate solid flexprint)
can be used in place of coax. Shielded flexprint should be used only
within cabinets, or in locations where it will not be subject to physical
abuse (see rule #1).
Rule #7
.
Maximum permissible length of shielded flexprint is 45 ft. for programmed
I/O, and 25 ft. for data break.
Rule #8
A DMOl = 10 ft. of cable (data break only). in rules #4 and #7.
A DM04

5 ft. of cable (data break only)

in rules #4 and #7.

A DW08 (either A or B) equals 10 ft. of cable in rules #3, #4, and #7.
For DMOl and DM04, rules #4 and #7 refer to the sum of c.able lengths
from the processor to the DM and from the DM to the most distant break
device.

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title

Processor Applicability
All 112

USE OF COAXIAL CABLE IN PDP-12"s

I I I I I I

Rev

Author
Approval

H. Lonq

Tech Tip
Number Cable-TT-2
Cross Reference
0

Date 8.17.72

Your attention is called to drawing D-AR-PDP-l2-0-2 sheet
4 (Equipment Layout (PDP12».
Note 3 specifies that all
systems with data break devices must be cabled with coaxial cable only. This should be strictly adhered to.
/mt

Page -2-

mamoomo
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16 Bit

18Bit

0 I

BC08H
36Bit

NO POWER LOW FROM 8E ENABLE BOX BA8-A or BA8-B
Processor Applicability

;" 1 I I I I I I

Author

Rev

J. Blundell

Approval F. Purcell

Option or Designator

Date

Tech Tip
Number BC08H-TT-1
Cross Reference

09/20/72

BC08H omnibus expander cables using a Rev. C M936 may fail to
bring power low up to the processor from the expander box
because the jumper from the cable to pin BV2 of the M936 is
missing.
Check for this jumper on any systems using the BC08H cable,
especially if you have power low problems.
/mt

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

1972

momBDma
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12Bit []

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

BCOaM
36Bit

BCOBM-OM CONNECTOR
Processor Applicability

All IBE I

1I I

Author

Ralph Boehm

Option or Designator

Rev

Tech Tip BCOaM TT-l
Number
Cross Reference
0

Approval W. E • Cummins Date 07/31/72

Some BC08M-OM over the top connectors have been manufactured with
10 OHM resistors on pins A2, B2, Ul and V2. The use of the connectors with the resistors can cause signal problems.
These resistors should be removed and jumpers installed.
/mt

IPAGE 1

II PAGE REVISION

RpUBLICATION DATE

July] 972

Rule #8 (continued)
In the case of the DW08A or B, positive and negative buses must be
~onsidered separately.
For one of these buses (the one originating
in the computer) rules #3, #4, and #7 should be applied directly. For
the other bus, rules #3, #4, #7 and #8 govern the sum of the lengths
of cable from the computer to the DW08 and from the DW08 to the most
distant peripheral on the bus of opposite polarity.
Rule #9
Termination is required on programmed I/O cables longer than 20 ft.,
and may be desirable on shorter cables. For negative bus, use 220 ohm
shunt resistors to ground on lOP 1, lOP 2, lOP 4, BTS 1, BTS 3 and
Initialize. No special termination module exists for negative bus.
For positive bus, 100 ohms to ground on the same lines should be used.
(A G7l7 module does this for you, and should be inserted at the end
of the bus on cable #1.)
If two buses are present in a machine, they
are electrically independent, and must be separately terminated.
Rule #10
No branching ("Y" connections) is permitted on the bus.

Page 2

momooma
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

lKJl

16 Bit

18 Bit

CR03

36Bit

\ Tech Tip
Number

CR03 NOISE PROBLEM
Processor Applicability

All

Option or Designator

Author

I I I I I I I
8

Approval

Rev

Fi tek

W. Cummins

CR03-TT-l
Cross Reference

Date 0 7 / 31/7 2

When the reader motor start switch is actuated, noise can be generated
as relay Xl contacts close.
The solution to this problem is to install
a Thyrector across contact terminals #6 and #8 of Xl.
l17V, 50Hz l17V, 60Hz -

Title

$3.66
$2.10

/TeCh Tip
Number

EXCHANGE OF 804 WITH CR03 INSTALLATION
Processor Applicability

All

Thyrector part # SP9B9 Thyrector part # SP4B4 -

I I I I I I I
R

Author
Approval

Rev

Fitek
rnmmins

Date

a7 /

CR03-TT-2
Cross Reference

31 / 7 2

PDP-8 ECO #256 specifies that any 804 logic below serial number 751
must be e~changed i f a CR03 is to be added.
A new 804 logic will
be included with a field add-on CR03.
There are no additional
charges involved for the 804 exchange; the original 804 is to be
returned to the factory.
T:tle

Processor Applicability

All

lTech Tip
Number

50 CYCLE CONVERSION OF CR03 GDI CARD READER

I 81 I I I I I

Author
Approval

Rev

H. Fitek
W. Cummins

Date

CR03-TT-3
Cross Reference

fl7/7.7/7?

A 60 cycle CR03 can be converted to 50 cycle operation by the following
procedure:
1)
2)

If the motor is rated 50/60 cycles i t need not be changed.
A 60
cycle motor, however, must be exchanged for one rated 50/60 cycles.
The two timing belt pulleys must be changed from #24XL037 (two
to #20XL637 (two each).

ea~h)

Capacitor C4 (.0033 mfd.) on the 4017 module must be changed to
8 2mmfd.
(6 8mmfd. is acceptable.

The following adjustments must be made:
a)
b)
c)

PAGE 1

decrease TPl from 80msec. to 60msec.
decrease TP2 from l80msec. to l66msec.
TP3 should be unchanged, 20msec.

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

mamaoma
Title

12 Bit

[X]

16 Bit

lKJ

18 Bit

[K)

36 Bit

, I ,

I I I

Author

CR04

f1D

Tech Tip
CR04-TT-l
Number

DOCUMATION CARD READERS
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Bruckert
Approval W. Cummins

Rev

0
Date 12/08/72

Cross Reference

In order to make control of ECO's easier for Field Service,
Engineering is giving the Documation Card Reader's option
numbers.
You should change your parts lists to callout the
following options in place of part numbers; ECO's will be
written against the CR~4.
Part Number

Option

3~-1~639-,0'l

CR,0'4-A
CR,0'4-B
CR,0'4-C
CR,0'4-D
CR,0'4-E
CR,0'4-F
CR,0'4-H

3f1-lf1639-,0'2
3.0'-1.0'639-$0
3.0'-1.0'639-.0'4
3.0'-1~639-~5

3.0'-1.0'639-.0'6
3.0'-1.0'639-.0'7
3.0'-1.0'639 - .0'8
Title

All

-,T
~RrA4
-

HOPPER EMPTY SWITCH FAILURE

Processor Applicability

I I 1 I 11

Author

Rev

G. Morrison

Approval Bob Yurick

Tech Tip
Number CR04-TT-2
Cross Reference
0

Date 7/20/72

A high failure of the "Hopper Empty Switch" used on the documation
card readers is due to the wrong type of switch being used.
Possibly
due to nomenclature used by docllm,ltion for "Hopper Empty" and "Hopper
Full".
Action: Check all units for the correct switch.
Change all references in the documation manual for "Hopper
Full" to "Stacker Full".
Order switches by Part Numbers.
Documation Switch Assembly Summary
A.

Hopper Empty Switch Assembly
M200/MlOOO/M1200 - 29-18523 - 1020277
Switch, Hopper Empty
M200/M1000/M1200 - 29-19488 - E2l-85HX, GRN/BLK

Stacker Full Switch Assembly
M200:
29-18524-1120551
M1000:
29-19619-1020211
M1200:
29-19634-1320702
Switch,
M200:
MI000:
M1200:

Stacker Full
29-18524-E34-85tlX-RED/BLK
29-194-87-E63-60K-GRN/BLK
29-18524-E34-85HX-RED/BLK

Title

All
X

Tech Tip

CROSS REFERENCE: DOCUMATION CARD READERS
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

Author

G. M:>rrison

Approval Bob Yurick

CR04-TT-3

Number

Cross Reference

Rev

Date 12/08/72

The Documation Card Reader, being a Cross Product Line device,
results in different Part Numbers for particular assemblies
e.g., modules. Part Numbers for the modules (vendor number)
are marked on the ETCH side of the module as an "ASSY 610-03"
for example.
NOTE:

The revision level of the ETCH or the revision level
of the component sides is not the part number.

To establish a standard on future bulletins the following will
be used to flag a reference to a particular model of card reader:
MXXYY.OOO

xx = Modle

YY "" Power Type
DDD = Logic Type
e.g. M0260. GDI

e.g. M1250. MDS

M200

Model
(pos.
M1200 Model
(neg.

60Hz with GDI Interface
logic).
50Hz with MDS Interface
logic).

MODULE CROSS REFERENCE
1.

M0260 GOI, M0250 GDI
Control
Clock
Sync
Error

VENDOR #

29-18511
29-18510
29-18513
29-18512

1040619-05
1040765-05
1040353-03
1040610-03

29-19490
29-19491
29-18513
29-19494

1040845-01
1040765-03
1040353-03
1040822-01

29-19490
29-19491
29-19493
29-19494

1040845-01
1040765-03
1040353-05
1040822-01

29-19490
29-19491
29-19491
29-19494

1040845-01
1040765-03
1040353-02
1040822-01

MI060, MOS, MI050, MDS
Control
Clock
Sync
Error

DEC.

M0260, MOS, M0250, MOS
Control
Clock
Sync
Error

-...

M1260. MDS, M1250, MDS
Control
Clock
Sync
Error

DIGITAL

l;;;.~·.lUI~

It: 1'.,

H-t·)l JPA 1 r

Page -2":'

CPL

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

mamaoma
Title
All

12Bit ~

16Bit

CRSI

18Bit

36 Bit ~
-IT,ech Tip
Number CRaI-TT-l

CRaI TECH TIP
Processor Applicability

laII121

Option or Designator

I I I I

Author

Chuck Sweeney

Approval W. Cummins

Date

Rev

Cross Reference

07/3 1 /72

There is a problem with the CRSI in a certain application; the following
simplified program will demonstrate the fault.
6672
S2{4j
6671
52[62
52{4[6

Skip if reader ready; pick card
Look for reader ready
Skip if card done
Look for card done .
Get next card

The problem application involves the operator (1) filling the input
hopper of the reader, (2) pressing motor start and read start on the
reader, (3) loading and starting 7{4{4{4 on the computer. Cards will begin
to be processed and after the last card has been processed the program
will hang up in the loop looking for READER READY. The operator now
repeats steps 1, 2, and 3 and if everything were right the cards would
be processed.
The problem is that when motor start is activated, there is enough noise
on the READER READY line to cause an erroneous SKIP ON READER READY.
Consequently, the program may hang up looking for CARD DONE.
A temporary fix, which will only apply to customers using this scheme
of operation, 1s to install a .Oluf capacitor from pin R2 on the M7l4
module to ground. A formal ECO to the module is being generated as the
permanent method of solution of this problem.
",-_.I' .. ,.,.-CARD READER MODEL GDI 100M RANDON HALTS CM8I,
1TeCh Tip
Number CR8I-TT-2
CM8L, CM8E
Cross Reference
Processor Applicability
Rev
Author
Steve Kline
0
All
Approval Bill Cummins Date 07/31/72
18E I 8~ 8%2 I
I I

Title

Due to the floating grounds of the GD! 100M, there is a lot of internal
noise.
Occasionally enough noise is induced on the signal LEAMP, to
cause motion errors when no card is in the reader.
This has the effect
of "MOTOR ON _ II to go high turning off the motor and "ON LiNE X" to go
false.
To cure, place .01 microf cap pin A2-29A to ground.

PAGE

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Ju1

1972

CPL

mamaama

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16Bit

18 Bit

\ Tech Tip

Improper Operation of Reader Ready Logic
Processor Applicability

BL\/4..\

I I

Author

CR8I

36Bit ~

Title GDI MARK SENSE CARD READER
All

Option or Designator

rhl1t"'lr

C::..,.~ ......

a:y.

Rev

Number CR8I-TT- 3
Cross Reference
n

Approval Bill Cummins Date

The following program will illustrate the problem:
7400/6672
7401/7402
7402/6671
7403/5202
7404/5200
PROBLEM:

Program should HALT when last card has been processed

In the MARK SENSE
card reader, a signal called MTRON + is
used to reset the ON-LINE X flip-flop (the status of this
flip-flop is sampled by our control logic to determine if
the card reader is capabre-of processing another card).
The time span from when the last card leaves the input hopper
(Hopper Empty signal), until MTRON + goes false (resetting
the ON LINE X flip-flOp), is so long that the reader will
appear to be ready even though there are no more cards to
be read.
(under these conditions, the program above will loop
around locations 7402 and 7403)

SOLUTION: ' The only way to correct the problem is to OR the Hopper
Empty signal with MTRON + and use the resultant signal for
resetting ON LINEX: this can only be accomplished by adding
an external component to the existing GOI logic.
The following diagrams will explain the exact nature of
the modification.

See drawing, page C.

PAGE 2

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

CR8I-TT-3 (Cont:inllAo)

EFFECTS

MOOIFIC.RTI ON

Gr 1:) J:.

PRlf\I T

L.O G 1C.

22A

191\

)>-----.l..

,---------1
I

DE"LE"TE

I
I

>-2_0-4AI---_----',~: E>~--..---=-<

L
________
:
I
,- -,

(Ac.- 16A) t'vlTROI\I

(A2-/"1S) MTRON

- - - -

--yy.._ _2~IA

+ Cif 5 -

IS)

~------------------

ON LIN E' )(

- - - ---

I
I

(A2- 98) HS LM P -

ADD

PIN I

A2 - I.qB

Pitta

A2. - 9B
?ltJ

PIN 3
PIN 5

+sv

PIN6

A6 - 2.0A

f'\N

G.ND

-+sV

PIN 14

capec.l't.or

'ac.Y'O~S

( • c!,u~.1 ) dl!a~ I
P&r-fOf'CltC.d l ,-,,,,-c.h,J pY'/",tC'd

(e.~.

Ie.

= Me.S46P
C DfC- ~T/(

I- ·th~

-abc, \!C

or-

1f.

Cl sseH11ly

!:i~C.1: I ')1-\

of'

Ie F\"'~ 7 ~ 1"1

lao v)

boa",J
W99

}-o

xfJ3-6.tl

'RDy

X1l3-61d

. ..

·.xil3-$/)

RD'/l

Po:.,
eg(?oR..

C OM

e~Ro~

CI7RP

R011.

F,P,

- FF
COM~OS'I )t'FB-7;Q

X1'13-61?-

£,t:lifJY

I(EIl D l

TH1~

•

'PN L- •
.

/ :/

•

i·

CONTK:o.' -

NE;~

.$3
I

sw.

fl.r::U'1 >'

j·

0.)

sToP

1/
WI oToT<.

'.-

(?ELPf-1

..54

~TaP:svJ.

r..

C.11l?O A

FJLE"

)< 113-7/1

)

XlII.-SA

RDYl

OIOl?G.5 /NZ.7C.

J,..l:;-

cHnlV~G" 1/1/11..1P~EVGlvT AN.)' .:s/~~Vl9}...
OCJTPut-. .. FKon-'l
7)-)6 "CllC 3"
" '.' (c./l/,?V· IN
-KenosfC. .. SI~IV.n'-) WHe.A/
Pou.Jl~~
/s
TueN~
(Y\.).
Ct::B . P~OV;OGs __71-Je- RE~6-1 To Tilt; {C'l;;7]O/
____ .F.F. _ .PRo..,..., TH.e- MoTcle. /ecl.J1,;1 I7ND . IsoLnTE.:>T1J5 :sToPs(.(J,TGH __ cg_CJ . PRovU:Jt:~ .. . THCi" C J R 3 .
l.V'I'::JNj

_Cllimp _, LoCA..l

. ()vRIN~ .

POUJCI'a. .. _._ .QN .. flIvO
W'LL. .. iI()Lor~Cj.JlvG" Lot.AJ . l"I.IV7'i1; ... 7HET tnl>To.e.
KG'VeJescr .. (8ms .CR 8
c R? .... wll~.JHjr... _YI'!.!J!D~ /?£{.Jq

_ RZ _...P..RoIII rJe-s __ .II.. pu/"'L._Ve... Tt>
. . •7'H~

CtlIlN$S'" .. ~eQIJ't:!5.S

IS .sT/JRTc-z:J._..__ _
oPc"t?nT2i5 ..

.. I9IV_ /JPl)JTJ(YvI'1'- . WIR(;;- .Fi?oWl TIIl:TC oNTRo <- _ .._._.. _
. . '_
C/9IZP .... .FllG ..... C;_~~IV.e..c.To,e...xFi'i ..__ ... 11~2() 8 .
a..~
mOO&?-_:">.1 00.. KEiJo~1Z_ ..()SsO'_As__ A_. __.Tie:___ P~~.":JT_.. _FCJ~ . ... T/Je- _. fAJ/~e:: . , ..~g~.~g!1.-~p.- .R7.,L ..... .._.._____ .. _. C/le.:5J./Vl-JleiT" c.u~cCJ,T.

...__.P~~e(.. ...To_TIls:...

m"I. . ..

_____ ..

,:j. ~~~·;s·o~

JtrZ3-70

CPL

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

momoomD

12 Bit

lKll

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 I

CRSI
36 Bit

IX)

GDI MOD 100 CARD READER CHANGES (Continued)

Title

Processor Applicability

All
lSI
II.

IIII I I I I I

Author

Bob Nunley

Approval

Bi 11 CumminSDate

Solenold & Indlcator Drlvers

Option or Designator

Rev

Tech Tip CRS I -TT-4
Number
Cross Reference
0

(AS)

2-3-69/EN4012/A/4014 Solenoid and Indicator Drivers (AS) reduce
voltage on associated lamps to 14V.
(No need to field retrofit.)
Change resistors from 47 ohms to 75 ohms on AS - Rl1, R13, R15,
R19, R21, Mod 100 & Mod 500.

Model sao
Drawing D4000 R6, R7
(DEC #13-05281 = 75 ohm)
Model 100 Wiring R4, Rs
Provide a non-recoverable error signal to Js-18 (output connector
to c omput er) .
Adds an IC.
Changes part number of P.C. board to 4013A.
Cannot field retrofit P.C. board.
When new module is installed,
add XAs-lsB to Js-18 NRE (drawing 1).

Keep ready signal high until read cycle complete.
See (1)

above.

With new board:
Add XA4-l4A to XA5-25B
PICK FF

Add XA3-2A to XAs-26B
Drawing 2
NR E

Ib5
'"2

'16

N.u.

RDY2

SVNC

24, B PiC I< F

III. Power Supply
3-l7-68/EN-B-lOS02/B-C/Power Supply/
Change components

FROM
REV.

REV. C

PAGE 6

R2
91 ohm
Cl
12000 microf 10V
Tl
Part number 12.8-8
Ql, Q2
TlP14

PAGE REVISION

120 ohm (DEC #13-00243)
13000 microf 15V (DEC #10-09436)
Signal #5864
2N3055 (DEC #15-05819)

PUBLICATION DATE

Ju]l.y 1972

Title

GDI MOD 100 CARD READER CHANGES (Continued)
Processor Applicability

All

18I I I I I I I

Bob Nunley

Author

Rev

Tech Tip CR8I-TT- 4
Number
Cross Reference
a

Approval Bill Cummins Date

III. Power Supply (continued)
10-29-69/EN~B-10S02/D/Power

Add thyrector (CR7)
GE #6RS20SP4B

Supply

between J3-2

& J4-7

(DEC #11-00106)

2-l9-69-/EN-B-10S02/E/Power Supply/By pass line transients
Add dual

.1 uf capacitor to power supply (C4A, C4B)

Sprague #DYR60llJ

(DEC #10-021S3)

6-S-69/EN-10S2/F/Power Supply/Improve +S Volt regulation
Change Rl
From

62 ohms 1/2 Watt S%

33 ohms 1 Watt S%
(DEC #13-04831)

IV . Control and Error Detectors

(A3)

10/14-68/EN-4006/B/C & E DET.
(A3)Occasiona1ly the CIRI F/F
does not set when a card enters the Read Station.
This will
cause a false l i ght check.
To eliminate:
Add IN4S7 diode between A3A8-ll (cathode)

and A3A7 - 12 (anode)

Page -7-

momDDma
Title

All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

Ii]

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 r

36 Bit

8 1

8J 121

Au~or

Tech Tip
Number DATA.COM. TT-l

Rev

Bill Freeman

Approval

DATA
COMMUNICATIONS

COMMUNICATION CABLE INTERFACE INFORMATION
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Cross Reference

Date

("l1mm; T\S

Cables interfacing DEC terminals (communication interfaces) to
data sets come in several varieties depending upon the terminal
to be utilized. The following are cable types issued by DEC and
the terminal interface that the cable may be used with:
Cable

Interface

BC~lA

8/1, 8/L, DCJJ2
DC,il8F
8, DC~8B, PT~8B,

BC,il1B
BC,illC
BC,illE
BCJJlJ
BC01V
7JJ-S7l7
74-6139
7JJ-S639
74-6136
74-7226

PT~8C

DC~8B

8/1, 8/L, 12, DC~2*
KL8E, KL8F, KLBM, DP8EA
PT~8F, PT,il8FX, 689 MQ, 689 MA
689AF, 689AG
DP~lA

689 ADF
DC~8H

DP86A

BC~SC

Following is a table giving the standard signals assigned by EIA
Standard RS232. Each data cable is listed giving the pins utilized
on the data set connector (TYPE DB25P - The hood is Type DBS1226-l).
Of the several data sets available below are listed the most common
along with any differences they have in relation to the EIA Standard.
The data sets are also noted on the following table in relation to
the signals they used.

Utilizes Type DBM255 Female Data set connector.
Differences from Standard

Data Set

t Bell lOJF

Pin 11 and 12 are originate mode and
local mode respectively

+ Bell

Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin
Pin

PAGE 1

Bell 1,3 A,E,
G,H

2~2.C,D

19
20
21
22
23

remote release
remote control
Ready
Ring indicator 1
Ring indicator 2

Bell 2,ill
Synchronous
modem

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Jul y 1972

Data
set

'in ff
1
2

4
5

6
7

8
9
10
11
12

13
14

15
16
17

32
Pin l\ssignments
EIl\-I~S2

Protective GND
'rransmltteCl Data
Recelve Data
Hnqucst to Send
Clear to Send
Data Set Ready

SlC)nal GND
Data Carrler Detect

·*

*
*

*
•

Reserved for testlng
Not to be used ].n termlnal

#
#
#
1/
11
11

Jl
1/

+
+
+
+
+
-+

BCOID
1'1853

DeDIC
GB57

BCOIE
G857

Tied to
7

X
X

Tled to Tied to
5
5

X
-)(

1/
#

Tied to Tled to

nCOlv
BERG

70-571 7
W023

74-6139
1'1023

Tied to

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X

22
23
24
[L)

NOTE:

S"condarv
R(~~leS t to Send
~f) ,l La 'l'(~rmlna 1 ·~C,lcly
~;lgnal Quallty \Jetector
IO.ng Inellcator
Da ta S l.Cjn.ll Ha te SC':.lector
Transmlt 51.g. Element
Timing
--

70-5639**
W023

X
X

-+
-+

X
X

(note)
X

(note)

ill

1 'J
20
21

Beose
BERG

•

Sec. Rec. Llne 5lg.
Detector
Sec. Clr to Send
Seconrlary 'I'ransml t tea Data
Transmlt Slgnal Element
Timing
Secondary l{eCelVcd Data
[(CCelVe Slg. El (~men t
Timing

ClI.nI E TYPE
BCOIJ
MOSO

lleO 11\
'1850

•

---

+
+
+
+

X
X

+
X

__ _ _ _

L-

X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X

)(

Shielded conductor tied to ground pins on both ends.

'tI

-- .- - - - - - - - - - - t f - - - - - - - "

. t-~;_---------l~------J

DP-8E

Page 2

mamDDma
Title
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

[]I

16 Bit

DS32
18Bit

36Bit

I I I

laIlaLI

PAGE

Author

G. Chaisson

Approval

PAGE REVISION

Tech Tip
Number DS32-TT-1

DF32-DS32 DISK DATA ERRORS
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Cummins

Rev
Date

Cross Reference

7-31-72

PUBLICATION DATE

DF32-TT-4

July 1972

mamaoma
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

[iJ

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 I

MAINDECS AND THE DEC DATA SYSTEM 300
Processor Applicability

All 18

I I I I I I

Author

Freeman

Approval w. Cummins

36 Bit

Option or Designator
DS300

Tech TiPDS300-TT-1
Number
Cross Reference
Rev 0
Date 12/08/72

The DEC DATA SYSTEM 300 is being sold without any means of
paper tape input; thus to run any Maindec's the PMK02B Field
Service cassette is required as input.
To connect the cassette remove the 2400 baud KL8E from the
system and insert the cassette interface. Remove the BC01V
cable from the VT05 and use the 7008519 cable which was
shipped with the VT05
to connect the VT05 to the cassette.
(Reference cassette instructions.) Switch the VT05 from
2400 baud to 110 baud.
(Remember before leaving site to
return the switch to 2400 baud.)
Run diagnostics according to existing procedures. The only
need to reinsert the KL8E supplied with the system is to run
the KL8E diagnostic, the VT05 diagnostic and customer software.
The DEC DATA SYSTEMS are delivered with a complete set of paper
tape diagnostics. If the diagnostics on your cassette are
incomplete or of the wrong revision, take the supplied paper tape
to a system with paper tape input and make the necessary corrections
to your cassette.

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

December 1972

--,

mamBDmD
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

[]I

18Bit

36Bit

DTOI

DTOI - PDP-alE
Processor Applicability

All

16Bit

ISE I I I J I I

Author Bill Freeman

\Tech Tip
Number

DT."l TT-l

Cross Reference

Rev

Approval · W. E. Cummins Date

Option or Designator

7-31-72

PDP-alE
TT# 002

When using a DTOI Bus switch on a PDP-SE, it is necessary to change
the Wl."3 to W123 as noted in PDP-S/E TT #002 and also change the
outputs of the W64." in B6 from 4~~ nsec, to 1 usec. To utilize 1 usec
outputs add wire on location B6 - E to F, L to M, and S to T.

Title

All

Tech Tip
Number DTOI-TT-2

INTERMITTENT BREAK FAILURE ON DTOlAN
Processor Applicability
Roney/Nunley
Author

Is I I I I I I

Approval W. Cunnnins

Cross Reference

Rev
Date

6/6/72

Erratic Break Operation
The use of a 552 or TCOl with a OTOI-AN may cause erratic break
operation to one or both computers.
The reason is that, unlike ·
the OM01, OF32, and RF08, the break request signal is not clamped
at the source.
To cure the erratic operation, clamp the signal
C-BRK REQ in the OTOl to -3V.
Add B31J to B265.
C.E. Roney/R. Nunley - October 1970

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Jul

mamaomD
Title
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit []

16 Bit

18 Bit

0 I

G020 - G021
36 Bit

Tech Tip
Number G020-21 TTI1

SENSE AMP REVISIONS
Processor Applicability

I BIlsLI I

Option or Designator

Rev

Cross Reference

Author

A. Newbury

Approval

W. Cummins Date 7-31-72

8I/L sense amps now use a -4V slice level instead of -3V for increaed
noise immunity.
Either level works fine as long as they are not
intermixed.
When replacing a G020 or G021 check for the proper level,
or when a ghosty symptom occurs in memory check for this mix up.
There
are a few different revisions of sense amps but the following few rules
should eliminate the confusion:
1)
2)
3)

Rev. D and earlier are considered -3V slice level.
Rev. F and later are considered -4V slice level.
Rev. E can be either -3V or -4V and it is the only revision
that can be changed.
The resistors to change are listed
below:
300
330

RS
330
180

If.~

-3V slice level
-4 V slice level

Rl2
330
180

Rll
300
330
A.II ~

~J2*

0 0 0

* Denotes components present only on G021.

-G"'~ ~------ ----------- ---~-- .. ---......,,;:;=

G020 uses G021 etch.

(eyelet leading from
pin Tl)

(eyelet connected to collector of Ql)

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Ju1

1972

SENSE AMP REVISION (Continued)

G020-G021-TT-l

Rev. H sense amps should have a 30 guage ground strap as shown
above. This ground strap insures proper strobe margins and
noise immunity.
Randon 81 Memory Failures:
If you have intermittent memory problems or you do not have a wide
strobe margin, check for these things:
1. That -3V and -4V sense amps are not intermixed in an 8K unit.
2. That Rev. H sense amps have the ground strap.
3. That G221 selectors have 2904 transistors.
If the 2904 transistors are Texas Instrument, check that the fall time is within
specification (10-90 nsec.).
4. That G624 load resistors are all the same value in any 8K unit,
and that for Ferroxcube stacks they are all 56 ohm. Previous
values have been 60, 70 or 52.5 ohms. 52.5 is not acceptable
under any conditions.

5. That memory current has been adjusted with a current probe and
strobe has a good window between checkerboard failures and strobe
adjustment. Measuring voltage does not insure proper current
values for memory.
6. That ECO 81-00022 is installed. Although this ECO was directed
to the field, it has been instrumental in fixing problems in
several older machines. The SPECO does not explain too clearly
the add/delete scheme. You will see that the first two deletes
are A30D2 to A34S2 and A30E2 to A34T2. The essence of the
problem is that those two leads carry the sense signal and may
not be identical in length or routing and may trigger the
sense amps erroneously because of the noise or phase discrepancy;
the two deletes are to be replaced by one run on twisted pair.
The other deletes are similarly paired; each pair is to be
replaced by one . run on twisted pair. The other deletes are
deletes are similarly paired; each pair is to be replaced by one
run of twisted pair.
7. If instruction test 1 will not run in field 1 of a system with
8K or more of memory, it may be a result of induced noise picked
up from the memory power supply lines by the memory flip-flop
output lines. ECO 81-00051 reroutes these runs to eliminate
this problem.
/mt

-~-

momDama
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit ~

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 I

36 Bit

ADJUSTMENT OF G084 in TU20
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I
S's
All

PAGE 1 OF

Rev

Author
Approval W. Cummins

PAGE REVISION

Date

Option or Designator
G084

Tech Tip
Number G084-TT-1
Cross Reference
0

CPL

06/06/72 TU20-TT-4

PUBLICATION DATE Au ust 1972

momDaml
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

lKJ T 16 Bit 0 I

0 I

36 Bit

G826 ADJUSTMENTS
Processor Applicability

All

18 Bit

lSI I 8~ I I I I

Author
Approval

Rev

Cummins

Date

Option or Designator
G826

Tech Tip
Number G826-TT-1
Cross Reference

7-31-72

Many G826's are returned from the field as defective when, actually,
there is no defect, only misadjustment of POWER OK.
The basic operational functions of the G826 are first, to detect the
AC power input going low and second, to regulate the memory voltage
level. The detection of power-in going low, due to either line failure
or the front panel power switch being set to the OFF position, is
accomplished by sampling for variations on the 5 volt bus. When the
5 volt bus drops below 4.75 volts, the condition is felt by an
'
operational amplifier which generates POWER OK as a +3 volt level.
This level becomes the conditioning level which allows the next TP3 to
clear the RUN flip flop. At the same time, a turn off signal is
applied to the -30 volt memory supply. These two logical events occur
to disallow a random read without its associated write cycle. When
POWER Ok is at +3 volts, the RUN flip flop will act as if the SINGLE
STEP switch were on and -30 volts will not come up.
The memory voltage level is set by a pot which is in parallel with an
amplifier between the -6 volt ' and -30 volt supplies. In normal
operation, POWER OK is low (~vo1ts). With a scope sampling at A02J2
(of the 81) or the negative probe of a meter on that point, with the
positive probe to ground, adjust the he1ipot, in the center of the
module, clockwise until POWER ok just goes low (~ volts), them. ~ ,flltw
degrees more.
With POWER Ok low, memory voltage may now be adjusted; set up meter
connections as follows.
METER LEADS
POSITIVE
NEGATIVE
B02M2
B02V2
81
B27M2
B27V2
8L
Adjust the Bourns pot on the edge of the module for a reading of +21 to
+22.5 volts.
PDP BL's, logic serial #150 and later, have a power supply connector
card, G785 revision "D" or later, which will make the POWER OK
adjustment less critical. They have an extra detection circuit which
is OR'ed with the output of the differential amplifier at pin AJ2 which
stops the CP before the +5 volt line begins to drop.

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Title
All

G826 ADJUSTMENTS (Continued)
Processor Applicability

lSI I sJ I I I I

Rev

Author
Approval

After these adjustments have
Power ON/OFF Test, should be
sensitive; after adjustment,
be applied to the adjustment
position.

Page 2

Cummins

Date

Tech Tip
Number G826-TT-l
Cross Reference

7-31-72

been made, Maindec 08-D1AB, Memory
run. The helipot is mechanically
a spot of nail polish or paint should
stem to secure it in the desired

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

mamaama
Title

All

12Bit

16 Bit

1 18 Bit

Insufficient Low End of Delay
Processor Applicability
Author Al Shimer

Ii~ I I I I I I

ApprovalHaro1d Long

1 36Bit

Option or Designator
H307

Tech Tip
Number H307-TT-1
Cross Reference
Rev
CC54
Date 9/18/72

Due to modification. in an SMA 12/60 by Technicon, Corp., the
H307 Delay Box must be modified so that a 1.2 sec adjustment
can be achieved.
SYMPTOMS:
Test result skipped and all results in error from that point on,
due to being out of sync with the analyzer.
SOLUTION:

H307

10 yfd lSV
+

I
Blk Wire __~__~
From >L-~~~~
-1.2/60 I Input B
1.8K
1Cable

From
12/60
9hange TO,..

- -

Remove the 1.8K, and replace with one of the 3.3K's.
NOTE:

Some components may have to be soldered to the signal lead
on input cable.

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

September, 1972

momODma
Title
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16 Bit

18 Bit

36Bit

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

H710

Tech Tip
Number

H710 POWER SUPPLIES

Option or Designator

Author
Approval

w.
w.

Rev

Cummins
Cummins

Date

H710-TT-1
Cross Reference

7-31-72

It is possible for the +5VDC supply (H710-Dynage 700-167) to
go into an overvo1tage or protective mode i f the outputs of
several H710 supplies are paralleled.
The resultant supply
output in the overvo1tage mode is approximately +lVDC.
The
supply will come back up to correct voltage i f it is allowed
to cool.
The vendor (Dynage) acknowledges that a problem may exist
(depending upon the system and its operational environment) .•
The vendor proposes that DEC perform the following temporary
change in the supply until the problem can be more explicitly
defined and a final fix can be implemented.
It is only
necessary to perform this change i f the supply demonstrates
the above symptoms.
The vendor also states that the supply is
not marginal .
substitute an 1N750(A) Zener (DEC Part #11-0214)
(lN749) currently in use.

for ZD3 Zener

The H710 is currently being used in 680I sustemsTitle

All

Tech Tip
Number H7l0-TT-2

Module Fail ure in H7l0

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Author

W. Freeman

Approval

w. Cummins

Rev

Cross Reference

Date

If the module is the cause of the failure of an H7l0 power
supply, it would be less expensive to replace the module than
the whole power supply.
The module is now available from the
Field Service stock with a part number 29-17366.

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Jul

mamaoma
Title
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

Ii)

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 I

36 Bit

Tech Tip
Number

Rev

Author
Approval

H716

H7l6 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

H716-TT-l
Cross Reference

Date

When replacing a "Wanlass" type H7l6 Power Supply due to
faulty or erratic operation, specify that the replacement
supply is to be the "Armour" type. These new supplies are
in stock and will be segregated from the older wanlass
supplies. If the stockroom is unable to provide an armour
supply, a substitute wanlass will be shipped.

IPAGE

II PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

August 1972

CPL

mamoama
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

!Xl I

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 I

H72l
36 Bit

ITech
Tip
Number

H721 HARDWARE
Processor Applicability

I 8I1 I I I I I

All

Option or Designator

Rev
'Rnhp.rt Nunlev
a
Date
Approval W. Cummins
07/31/72
Author

H721-TT- 1
Cross Reference

When ordering an H72l to replace other types, it is also necessary to
order connectors to fit the H721 outputs. They are:
1 each - 12 pin Mate-N-Lock - 12-09351-12
10 each - pins

- 12-09378

ITech
Tip
Number

Title AC INPUT/PASS-ALONG JUMPERS
Processor Applicability

;11 I I I I I I I

Author

Cross Reference

Rev

Approval

H. Lonq

Date

H721-TT-2

08/17/72

The 110 VAC 4A available on TB2-3 and 4, 5, and 6 are auto tap- outputs and they should not be used to supply power to grounded devices.
If the input for the H721 is 220 VAC, TB 2-3 (110 VAC) output is
taken from the "source" side of the AC input and may be 220V above
a real earth ground.
Refer to ECO #H721-00004 for correction.

Title
All

Tech Tip
Number H72l-TT-..3

BAD FAN BEARINGS IN H72l POWER SUPPLY
Processor Applicability

Au~or

Jeff Blundell

Rev

Cross Reference

Approval

Pamotor 4500C fans with date codes of 11/70 or 12/70 are likely
to contain bad bearings.
Any fans with these date codes that fail in the field will be
replaced free of charge (material only) by Pamotor, who will
supply DEC with enough to cover the respective H721 shipments.
When the new fans arrive they will be put in the Field Service
stockroom for issue on an exchange basis, and they will be
shipped with captive nuts to get away from the difficulties
experienced when trying to replace the present loose nuts.

PAGE

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

November 1972

mamaoma
Title

All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

IKJ I

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 1 36 Bit 0

Option or Designator

H724

Tech Tip H724 TT-l
Replacement of Transistors Q199, Q299, Q399
H724/H724A Power Supply
Number
Cross Reference
Processor Applicability
Author Jim Parker
Rev
n
S~
Approval W. E • Cummins Date 7-31-72

I I I I I

If the 2N30S5 transistors being installed are manufactured by RCA
or Solitron this problem will not be experienced. If the transistors to be installed are manufactured by Motorola and marked
DEC3055 or 2N30S5 longer screws will be needed to fit the nut which
holds the screw through the transistors with the collector connection
tag. This is due to these transistors having a thicker base plate.
The replacement screw is a 6/32 X 3/4" and two per transistor are
needed.

H724 CA) UL Information

Title

Processor Applicability
All

\sEl

Rev

Author

Ken Quinn
Approval B. Cummins

Tech Tip
Number H724 TT-2
Cross Reference
0

Date

The PDP-8E power supplies are UL approved. Field conversion of
power supplies from 115 VAC to 239 VAC (H724 to H724A) w~uld
nullify UL approv~d. It is therefore reco~e~ded.that F1eld
conversion be avo1ded. Also, any field mod1f1cat10ns to H724(A),
unless accomplished by following a Field Effect ECO could nullify
the UL approved.

IPAGE 1

II PAGE REVISION

nPUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

mamaoma
Title
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16 Bit

18 Bit

36Bit

H85l

\ Tech TiPH85l-TT-l

INTERMITTENT OVER THE TOP" CONNECTIONS
Processor Applicability

ISE ISM ISF 1

I I I

Author
Approval

Number

Rev

Mike Parry
W. Cummins

Option or Designator

Date

Cross Reference

11/20/72

For a period the 50-08903 board used on the H85l over the top connector
was manufactured using griplets to make the connection through the
board.
The griplet process can result in bad connections (anything from
five (5) OHMs to open circuit), and was ECOId out of the H85l manufacturing procedure as from September 1, 1972.
The only methods of checking are careful visual inspection under the
board, using a solder sucker to clear a hole for inspection or OHM meter
checking.
SOLDER FLOW
FROM TOP OF ~
BOARD
TOP ETCH
rx-.~y

~GRIPLET

CONNECTOR BLOCK

Also, an unknown number of connectors were assembled with the board
on backwards. This gives no electrical problem, but could be confusing if you are counting pins for scoping and rely on the "A" etched
on the board to find pin A.
It could be pin V.

IPAGE 1

II PAGE REVISION

o II PUBLICATION DATE

November 1972

mamaoma
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

[] 1 16 Bit 0 I

KA8E
18 Bit

36Bit

0
lTech Tip
Number

ECO IN ERROR - M835-0003
Processor Applicability

All leE

I I I I I I

Option or Designator

Author Bill Moroney
Approval W.

Cununins

Rev
Date

KA8E TT-l
Cross Reference

7-31-72

ECO M83S-00003 is in error.

to correct.

A new ECD #M83S-0004 has been generated
The following sketches are correct .

...__-- Remove Jumper

Remove
Jumper
Cut etch
Side 2
Add
Jumper

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

mamaama

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

(]I

16 Bit

KD8E

o r 18 Bit 01

36Bit

Tech Tip KD8E TT-i 1
Number
Cross Reference
0

Halting During An Interrupt of a Break

Title

Processor Applicability
All I 8EI

Author

Ken Quinn

Approval

Cummins

Option or Designator

Rev
Date

7-31-72

This Tech Tip i~ written to aid the Field Service Representative when
operating the PDP-8e and should not be interpreted as a malfunction.
A.

INTERRUPT FLAGS
There are certain things which, although illegal, one may do
with a PDP-8/8I/81, but not with the PDP-8e.
On the PDP-8/8I/8L
Time; therefore, a
the interrupt on.
users have already

flags were cleared before Interrupt Strobe
flag could safely be cleared after turning
(This is normally not done because most
restored the AC.)

Sample TTY service:

/
/
/ SERVICE
/
/ ION
*/ KCC
/ JMp· EXIT
The PDP-8e clears flags at Interrupt Strobe Time due to the
faster I/O cycles. As a result, the above routine would
interrupt from location "*,, with a cleared (i.e. No.)flag.
This would confuse the best Interrupt Scan Routines.
The solution is to follow the rules and clear the flag before
the ION command.
This holds true for all options (not just the
B.

T~Y).

HALTING DURING A BREAK
Under certain conditions, it is possible to FETCH a HALT
instruction and have a break request in the same cyc~
(diagnostics are the best example).
With a Break Request, the CPMA, MAJOR STATE, and Instruction
Register are disabled at TP4.
The CP MA and EMA in the PDP-8e are updated at TP4 and the
machine always stops in TSI.
Therefore, under the above
conditions the machine stops with the Break MA indicated.
The result is one does not know at what address the machine
halted.

IPAGE 1

II PAGE REVISION

DPUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title
All
X

HANDLING OF MaS DEVICES
Processor Applicability

I I I I J I I

(Continued)

Tech Tip
Number MOS-TT-l
Cross Reference
~

Author ART ZINS

Rev

Approval ART Z INS

Date 11/7/72

Empty the contents of the bag onto the work area without
touching the MaS devices.

Prior to touching the MaS device, always discharge yourself
by touching the work area or attached metal.

'- ,

10.

Insert the MaS device into the module using care to ensure
minimal handling of the device leads. Try to grasp the
chip by the body of the device and not by its leads.

11.

Repla,ce the unused spare MOS devices in the conductive plastic
bag by grasping the body of the Ie, after previously discharging
yourself against the work table. Reseal the bag using
tape or a stapler.

All of the above precautions are to reduce the possibility of a
potential difference between the MaS device being handled
and the surrounding environment. Again, common sense is
essential when choosing a good work area and method of handling
these devices.

Page 2

mamaama

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

(!)

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 I

KE8E
36 Bit

KE8E NORMALIZE INSTRUCTION

Title

Processor Applicability
All IBEI

I I I I

Author

Dick Weimer

Approval

W. Cummins

Option or Designator

Rev
Date

Tech Tip
Number KEBE TT-1
Cross Reference
0

7-31-72

PROBLEM:
The KEBE module MB341, ECO 1999992 enables the option to clear the
AFC ifAC = 4999 and MQ = 9999 prior to issuing a normalize instruction,
in the "B" mode of operation.
The Maindec (BE-DOLA), however, does not check this function. The
following program patch will check it. MCN tBE-DOLA-2 will follow.
Location
4741
4760
4761
4762
4763
4764
4765
4766
4767

5369
7431
7621
7339
7411
7449
7402
7447
5342

GO TO PATCH
SET "B" MODE
AC & MQ = 9
AC = 4999, MQ = 9999
NORMALIZE
AC SHOULD
9
NORMALIZE FAILED TO CLEAR AC
SRT "A" MODE
EXIT

---.

Title

.7671 INSTRUCTION PROBLEM

Processor Applicability

All

\ Tech Tip
Number

I Bd I I I I I

Rev

Author Dick Weimer
Approval

Cummins

KEBE TT-2
Cross Reference

Date

The Microprogrammed Instruction "Skip If Mode B" (7671) as specified
in the EAE Instruction Set, does not work. If a mode check is desired,
the use of the following two instr~ctions is suggested.
7621
7451

Clear the AC and MQ
Double Precision Skip if Zero

If the mode is "B", a skip will occur.

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Ju1

1972

momoama
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16Bit

18Bit

KE8E EXTENDED ARITHMETIC ELEMENT

All

Processor Applicability
18EI

Author Dick Weimer

I I I I I

Option or Designator
KE8E

36Bit

\Tech TiPKE8E-TT-S
Number
Cross Reference
Rev 0

Approval Frank Purcell Date 07/31/72

Part numbers for the Read Only Memories as used on Module
M8340 are as follows:
ROM #1, Ell
ROM #2, E19
Title

Part Number 23-001Al
Part Number 23-002Al

DLD MICRO-PROGRAMMED EAE INSTRUCTION

J ,

Processor Applicability
All kE 18MI

Author

J. Blundell

Approval

W. cununins

\Tech Tip
Number KE8E-TTCross Reference
Rev
~
Date 07/14/72

Be aware that the correct code for the DLD Micro-programmed
EAE Instruction is 7663.
DLD is a combination of DAD (7443) and CAM (7621) which gives
7663.
The documents in error are schedule to be reprinted as shown
below:
Small Computer Handbook - approximately September 1972
Option Bulletin

- approximately August 1972

8E Instruction Card

- approximately January 1973

If you are aware of any other errors in the above publications,
please send them in on a Problem Report and we will try to get
them corrected by printing time.

PAGE 3

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title

Tech Tip
Number MM BI-TT- 3

MM8I 4K/8K Conversion
Processor Applicability

Au~or

Nunley

Rev

Cross Reference

Approval

An MMSI-A is the MM logic with only 4K installed.
ECO MMSI-00013
prevents the generation of mem done from the non-existent field in
an MMSI-A.
The MMSI is wired initially as an MMSI - B (SK).
To make
it operate properly as an MMSI (4K), wiring should be done after
ECO MMSI-A-00013 has been installed.
DELETE:

BOSEI to B06BI

ADD:

B06S1 to B06BI

To revert to SK: DELETE:

B0651 to B06BI

ADD:

B08EI to B06BI

These wiring changes are shown in the ECO drawing but not in the
ADD/DELETE list .

Title
All

)(1

Tech Tip
Number MM8I-TT-4

MM8I Memory Field Conversion
Processor Applicability

I I 1 I 1 I

Au~or

Nunley

Approval w• Cummins

Rev

Cross Reference

Date 7/31/72

For add-on MM8I extend 2 or extend 3, check notes on print MMSI-A.
All extended memories will be wired as extended 1 - control fields
2 + 3 . To convert from extend 1 to extend 2 - control field 4 + 5.
EAOCO)
EAO (1)
EA 1 (l)
EAI (l)
EAO (l)
EAICO)

to B07K2 - delete
to B07LI
- add
B07MI
- delete
to B07H2
- add
to B07H2
- delete
B07K2 to B07MI - add
BOnl

To convert from extend 1 to extend 3 - control fields 6

EAOCO) B07LI to B07K2 - delete
EAO(l) to B07LI
- add
EAO(1) B07H2
- delete
EA signals are available at the following:
EAO (l)
EA 1 (l)
EA2 (l)

A28 or 028
A2S or 028
A28 or 028

D2
E2
H2

Page 2

mamaama
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16 Bit

0 1 18 Bit 0 1 36 Bit 0

SHORT INITIALIZE PULSE
Processor Applicability

All IBE I

I I

Author
Approval

KK8E

Tech Tip

(M833/M833~)

Ken Quinn
w. Cummins

Option or Designator

KK8E TT-1

Number

Rev
Date

Cross Reference

7-31-72

If a PDP-8E has a M833 Timing G~nerator it is possible for a
peripheral to miss the Initialize pulse when powering up the
processor. This ~an happen if the processor issues the relatively
short initialize pulse before the peripheral is "up-to-power".
An indication of this problem could be "Tape Runaway".
If the
drive is under remote control and has unit ~ selected at the time
the system is powered up the tape may drive in one direction
until the clear key is depressed. This problem is taken care
of by the M8330 Timing Gemerator Module (the initialize is SSO
ms long).
If the p~oblem is observed, the M833 should be
exchanged for a M8330.

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Ju1

1972

mamaama
Title
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16 Bit

18 Bit

36Bit

0
Tech Tip
Number

KL8E (M865) INTERMITTENT PROBLEMS
Processor Applicability

M865 -

PROBLE~f:

SOLUTION:

M865 - Problem:
Solution:

Author
Approval

Dick Weimer

Rev
0
Date 7 - 31-7 2

Cross Reference

Some crystal clocks will not start due
to circuit impedance.
Add a 10 picofarad capacitor across crystal
output leads.
Noise spike may clear reader run, manual
restart required.
Delete etch connection to E46 Pin 11, add
jumper , from E40 Pin B to E46 Pin 11.
(Reference ECO

M865~~~~~3)

\Tech Tip
Number

Title

KL8E TTY Control (M856,M8650)
Processor Applicability
Author Bill Freeman
All 18d
Approval w. Cummins
.\
\ \

Option or Designator
KLBE

Rev 0
Date 7-31-72

KL8E TT-2
Cross Reference

There are two (2) module types that may be used as teletype
interfaces in PDP-8E's, the M865 and M8650. The M8650 may
be used as a replacement for the M865 (double check the
M8650 jumpers to insure they conform - referencing engineering specification A-SP-KL8-E-l).
The M865 may not be used indiscriminately as a replacement
for the M8650-eicept when the M8650 is used as the console
teletype and the console device is 110 baud.
The M8650 and M8650YA modules are the same except for operating frequences. The M8650 has a crystal for 110 baud
operation and the M8650YA has a crystal for multiples of
2400 baud. The part number for the M8650 crystal is
18-09880-01 while the M8650YA crystal is 18-09880-02. In
emergency situations, the boards may be exchanged merely
by changing the crystal.

IPAGE 1

II PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

mamaama
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit [ ]

16 Bit

18 Bit

KL8E

36 Bit

0
Tech Tip
Number

MS650, PRINT CORRECTIONS
Processor Applicability

All

Option or Designator

I sJ I I I I I

Rev

Author

Ken Quinn
Approval w. Cummins

Date

7-31-72

I
i

KLSE TT-S
Cross Reference

Some M8650~ C.S . Rev. A prints were shipped without the hand made
change added to the circuit which would make them C.S. Rev. B.
The change to the circuit is shown below.
+5YDC
Q3
653'iD
C&3

.~;JSMoP
At:I

06
D~b'f·

::~---]

R/2
/K

RII
5j
IW

PRINTER

MIl(;'N£.7

-J5'VOC

C-S . REV.,t:;

C. S. REV. B
+5VDC
~3

~,5'3.cfD

• ~/.J.)...f'
~

----]

06
D664-

PRINTEA
MAGNET

----

RII
-ISVDC

IPAGE ...

\I PAGE REVISION

75'¢
1'.4

II PUBLICATION DATE

December 1972:]

mamaama
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

I[)

16Bit

18Bit

36Bit

All ISE

I I I I I I

KM8E

KM8E TT-l

Tech Tip
Number

Time Share Clearing User Mode Flip/Flop
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Cross Reference

Rev 0
Robert Shelley
Approval W. E • . Cummins Date 7-31-72
Author

Problem:
It may be found impossible to manually clear the "User Mode" bit
(except by turning power off and on) on M837 module~ at etch Revision B,
even though the handle stamp indicates the module has been ECO'd to
circuit schematic Revision C or D.
This is because most of ECO M837-0000l (circuit schematic Revision C)
was never installed on these modules.
When Revision C is fully
installed the User Mode 'Buffer' (labeled "DB" on print M837-0-l,
2 of 3) is cleared by the load-address key.
(The extended load-address.
key clears the user flop itself.)
Revision C and D prints are correct but the following changes must
be made to the module if it's etch revision is B.
The steps below refer to the drawing that follows:
I.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

10.
II.

12.
13.

Cut
Cut
Cut
Cut
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Add
Cut
Add

etch at E19-6, side 2. '
etch at E19-5, side 1.
etch at E19-4, side 1.
et ch at E19-4, side 2.
jumper from E19-6 to E29-3.
jumper from E23-11 to E29-6.
jumper from E29-S to Feed-through
jumper from E19-4 to Feed-through
jumper from E19-S to feed-through
jumper from E19-8 to feed-through
jumper from E29-4 to feed-through
etch at E40-11 , side I.
jumper from E40 -11 to E2S-9.

Modules at etch revision Care alrea.dy correct.

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

shown
shown
shown
shown
shown

on
on
on
on
on

the
the
the
the
the

drawing.
drawing.
drawing.
drawing.
drawing.

Ref. ECO M837-0e003.

PUBLICATION DATE

Jul

1972

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

mamDDma
Title

12 Bit

KJT

16 Bit

o 1 18 Bit 01

36Bit

KP8E

Tech Tip
Number KP8F.-TT-l

POWER FAIL OPTION (M848 )
Processor Applicability

All IBE I

I I

Option or Designator

Author

Ken Quinn

Approval

Cummins

Rev
Date

Cross Reference

6/01/72

If a PDP-BE has an M8330 Timing Generator and a power fail option,
KP8E, the power fail module should be either an M848 CS. Rev. F,
or later, or an MB4BO.
M8330
Long Init**

M833
Short Init**

M848F*

y/'

M8480

Title

All M848 1 s should be ECOid to CS Rev. F or later

Generated by Power OK.

KP8E (M8 48), Proper Selection of Threshold
Jumpers
Processor Applicability

All 18EI

I I

Author

Ken Quinn

Approval

Cummins

Rev

Tech Tip KPBE-TT-2
Number
Cross Reference

Date 6/01/72

Due to the design characteristics of the PDPB/E, the Power supply
(H724) may be providing power to many different "option" modules.
The M848 module has three (3) pairs of jumpers on it to select the
correct thresholds, which will vary with the load, for each particular
configuration. Also~ they may be used to help compensate for poor line
voltage conditions (E.G. 95 to 105 VAC).
For example; if a PDP-8E has
there is a loss of AC power,
they would if it was a basic
threshold may need to be set

many modules plugged into its OMNIBUS and
the DC voltages will decay faster than
PDP-8/E. Therefore, the power fail
higher for a "Larger" PDP-8E.

/mt

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

November 1972

Title
All

Tech Tip
Number LT33-TT-l
CONVERTING ASR-33 TO PDP
Cross Reference
Processor Applicability
Rev
Author Swppnpv/Ollinn
A
Approval F.Purcell
Date 7/31/73

I I I I I I I

Converting the ASR-33 to the PDP-8/E
Occasionally a customer may request to have an older ASR-33 configured such
that it can be used on any 8/E type system.
CAUTION:
Prior to performing any rewiring, be certain that the teletype
in question has in fact been modified for use on DEC's PDP-8
family of computers. (Reference the field service technical manual,
LT33-TT-3)
The following chart has been designed to reduce the amount of time you would
normally spend cross-referencing several different sets of prints.
It is
highly recommended that, before applying power to the reconfigured system,
you double-check all wiring for correctness.
Failure to do so could result
in damage to the Teletype Control Module and/or the Teletype.

Title

Tech Tip
Number LT33 TT-2
Cross Reference
Rev A

ASR CONVE
Author

K.Quinn
Approval w. Cununins

All
X

Date 5-4-73

Disconnect and remove the step down transformer from the
teletype base.

Remove the AC supply lead from the terminal strip inside the
teletype.

Connect the new AC power cord to those same terminals, white to tl,
black to 12 and green to a chassis screw.

If the motor is rated for 50 cycles, it must be replaced with
one rated for 60 cycle operation. If it is reated 50/60 cycles
it need not be changed.

Proper operating speed is determined by the ratio of the belt
driving gear and its pinion gear: these must be replaced in
this conversion.

The parts required for conversion can be specified as follows:
Part
Belt driving gear (60Hz)
Pinion gear (60Hz)
60Hz motor
AC power cord

181420
181411
181870
182510

29-11417
29-11412
29-11432
29-16755

7.35
1.83
61. 50
3.45

Installation charges are based on time and material; there is no
fixed charge for this conversion.
Page 2

mamaoma
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

fX)1

16Bit

18Bit

36Bit

Processor Applicability

ISL

PAGE 1

I I I

Author

KP8L

Tech Tip
Number KP8L-TT-1

G785/MC8L/KP8L COMPATIBILITY

All I

Option or Designator

Art Newbery

Rev

Cross Reference

Approval Frank Purce11Date 07/31/72

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

MCSL-TT-1

July 1972

mamaoma
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16 Bit

18 Bit

36Bit

,I I I I I I I
8's

All

Author

R. Nunley

Approval

w. Cummins

KV8r

Tech Tip
Number KV8I-TT-1
Cross Reference
Rev 0

611 Scopes
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Date

7-31-72

Some older Tektronix 611 scopes have a potentially disastrous
flaw.
The leads on the secondary of the high voltage transformer
do not have sufficient insulation to withstand long usage and
will break down and short the cathode voltage (leads 8 & 9) to
ground.
To cure, unsolder leads 8 & 9 from the ceramic strip,
cover those leads with a heavier teflon spaghetti then res older
to the same spots on the ceramic strip.

Title

Tech Tip
Number KV8I-TT-2

KV8I Problems
Processor Applicability

All

lSI

I I I I I I

Author

R:Nunley

Approval

C ummi ns

Rev

Cross Reference

Date

,,'36

An error in the Add/Delete lists for ECO's SI-",2l and
has resulted in the introduction of peculiar problems into the
KV8I.
Some KV8I's have left the plant improperly wired.
The error:
Correction:

ADD Dl,E2 to E,9L2
ADD E,9Vl to E,9L2

A jittery presentation on a VT,l may be the result of a faulty
ground between the VT,l and the SI.
It is probable that the
situation can be improved or corrected by plugging the VT,l into
the BI power supply or in any DEC option.

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

momoamB

12 Bit

[]1

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 T 36Bit 0

Title

LAB 8 INSTALLATION NOTES
Processor Applicability
Author
All 181
Approval

I I I I I I
1)

A. Newbery
W

Option or Designator
LAB 8

Cummins

Rev

Tech Tip
Number LAB 8-TT-1
Cross Reference
0

Date 7-31-72

The Lab 8 systems are checked out "in-house" with the standard
grid input intensity (Z) signal. If the customer has supplied
his own scope, it may be a type which required a cathode input
signal. The Lab-8 AID logic can be modified to provide a cathode
signal as follows:
ADD A22F to A21R

Delete A22F to A2lN
2)

If you are running a test during which you expect to see a .
character or pattern on the screen, and only a raster is visible,
it may be that the intensity control has been advanced too far.
Best practice is to reduce brightness to minimum, then bring it
up to the desired viewing level.

If the left diagna1 (switch setting 1000 octal) generated by
Maindec 8I-D6AA has curled ends, a lack of termination iss
indicated. Two 33K OHM terminators (which are listed on the
experna1 component list) may be missing, install as follows:
C2SK to C2SE (C2SE is -10)
B2SK to B2SE (B2SE is -10)

PAGE

It should be noted that there are two errors concerning the
VC81 in the "Small Computer Handbook". Voltage at terminal BS2
on the A607 module varies from 0 to +2, not 0 to -10. The
reference voltage is -8, not -2.

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

mamaamo
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12Bit ~

16Bit

0 I

All 18EI

Author

I I I

0 I

36Bit

LAB 8/E

{TeCh Tip LAB 8/E TT-l
Number
Cross Reference
Rev ~

LAB 8/E SOFTWARE PROBLEMS
Processor Applicability

18Bit

Option or Designator

George Chaisson
Date 7-31-72
Approval w. Cummins

PROBLEM:

Recently software for the Lab-8E has been released
from the Program Library and shipped to all customers.
Two pieces of software in the software package have
problems.

SOLUTION:

The Basic Averager DEC-LB-0603-PB needs a one
word patch.
Location 7203 from 6530 to 6531.

PAGE

The Time Interval Histogram DEC-LB-U42B-PB has a
checksum in the paper tape. This tape must be
replaced.

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Title

jTech Tip
Number

Data Products Line Printer Ribbon
Processor Applicability

:" I I I I I I I

Rev 0
R.K. Stannard
Approval w. Cummins
Date 10.13.72
Author

LPOl-TT-lS
Cross Reference

The end of a Line Printer ribbons life is often caused
by stretching and skew problems, which eventually cause
it to tear or maybe get jammed in the drum.
As most printers call for routine cleaning of the drum
area on a weekly (maybe monthly) baSis, it is a good idea
to reverse the ribbon rolls (top to bottom) at this time
to even out any stretching that has taken place and significantly improve ribbon life.

DIGITAL

EQUIPMENT

Page 19

CORPORATION

FEI 0 SERVICE TEC...CAL MANUAL

a.....--..-.....---~

Optioo Of OIIiInatDr

LA30

12 Bit

Title

Teeh Tip
Number LA30-TT-4
Cross Refarence
0

DECWriter Ribbon. - Reca.ll
Processor Applicability

I I I I l

Author

Bryan OUnqay

Rev

Date 09-05-72

Appro".1 Ed Parr

We have disQovered that one shipment of DECwriter ribbons,
which were over inked, were JUt iato stock sometime
around the first of the year. The ribbons can be identified by the lot 135 which is printed on each ribbon carton.
These ribbons will smudge badly and should be recalled from
all field stock areas. Maynard and Westfield Stockrooms
have already been ur ed.
Title

Tech Tip

PASS ON SOME BASIC 8E MAINDECS BECAUSE OF NO
BELL
PrOC8$SOr Applic8Wlity

Nu~r

Rev

Author

LA30-TT-5

Approval

09/20/72
As there is no bell on the LA30, there is no indication of a
pass on some of the Basic BE Maindecs. The following changes
give a "P" for pass when runninq these Maindecs.
change
chanqe
change
change
change

Instruction Teat 1
Instruction Test 2
Random DCA
Basic JMP-JMS
EAE Inst. Test 2

location
location
location
location
location

g12g from ~2g7 to ~32g
3751 from g2g7 to g32g
g~13 from ~2g7 to ~32g
3567 from ,2,7 to ,32,
2175 from '11117 to ,32,

(N.B. this change will print "CP" once a minute)
Title

LA30 INTERMITTENTLY STOPS PRINTING
Pro~r Applicability
Author
J. Blundell

I I I I I I I

Approval F. Purcell

Rev

Tech Tip
Number LA30-TT'-6
Cross Reference
0

Date 09/20/72

PROBLEM CAUSE: Right margin switch (N/O contact) floating into
Mll3 pins HI and Jl at Al7.
Cure:

Add a jumper A17 HI to A17 Ul to clamp the line to plus 3.

There will shortly be an EeO to make this a retrofit.

Title KEYBOARD SHORTS CAUSED BY PAPERCLIPS, ETC.
Processor Applicability

~" I I I I I I I
PAGE

Author

Tech Tip
Number

Rev
0
Davis/Barnett
Date 11/20/72
Approval W. Cl.1mm; n~

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

L~30-TT-7

CrOll Reference

LKOI-TT-l

Title
All

PROBL~S

A TRIBUTED TO THE STATIC ELIMINATOR

Processor Applicability

Approval H. Long

Rev

Author D. Oldham

Advance a corner
the spring point
should be an ARC
than 1/8" and no

LPOl-TT-14

Tech Tip
Number

Cross Reference

Date 8/15/72

of the screwdriver blade towards
in each orifice of the bar. There
of between 1/8" and 1/4". No less
more than 5/16".

Repeat this for each hole and point in the bar.
If any hole fails this test replace the bar.
If no ARC is present anywhere along the bar, do the
following.
1.

Check primary power to the eliminator transformer.

Replace static eliminator assembly (the assembly
includes the bar).

If OK, go the the next step.

Part Numbers for the above are:
115 Volts 50/60 Hz
LPOI
LPOI
*LPOI
LP02
LP02
*LP02

Bar •••••••••••• 29-l7943
Transformer •••• 29-17944
Assemb1y ••••••• 29-17520
Bar •••••••••••• 29-19364
Transformer •••• 29-17944
Assembly ••••••• 29-19407

Other Vols 50/60 Hz
29-17943
Note 1
Note 1
29-19364
Note 1
Note 1

*Assemb1y contains bar, cable, transformer and hardware.
Note 1:

Specify voltage at time of order (i.e. 231V).

/mt

Page -17-

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

mamDDmo
Title

M8 31l:83~ 9

12 Bit

[i)

0 I

16 Bit

18 Bit

0 -1

36 Bit

LC8E

Tech Tip
Number LC8E-TT-l
Cross Reference

lOT SELECTION JUMPERS

Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Author

L. Kral/J. Richarcflfw A
Approval W. Cummins
Date 10.13.72

I I I I I I I

LSBE-TT-l

Volume III of the 8E Maintenance Manual and the M8329 circuit
schematic, Rev. C both have mistakes with the jumper numbering
for device code selection. The board actually agrees with the
drawing below~
The fault symptom will typically be either wrong sense of bits
5 or 6 in the decoded lOT, or MD bit 6 always constant on the
omnibus.
The same mistakes have been carried over into the LSBE (MB342)
control.
The drawing below also applies exactly to the C.S.Rev.~
of that board.

MDf15

1:
1
---® .

) 2:6

To Ef11

To E13

pin 11 (KBD) .

To Ef11

pin 9 (PRNTR)

To E13

pin 12 (KBD)

(PRNTR)

MDf16

.........

1-0
III
~

(8I

001
(1)

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION A

PUBLICATION DATE

October 1972

\Tech Tip
Number

DATA PRODUCTS C.I.B. (AZ=19 Substitution)

Title

Processor Applicability

~' I I I

R. shelley
Approval W. Cummins

Cross Reference

Rev 0

Author

LPOl-TT-ll

Date 07/31/72
L\

A customer information bulletin from Data Products is as follows:
Change Description:
The AZ-19, Hammer Interlock, circuit board assembly (P/N 212500) is
being replaced by an AZ-167 (P/N 215565).
The reason for this change
is to improve voltage loss detection.
The AZ-167 will perform the
function of the AZ-19 and voltage monitor circuit (P/N 214278-2).
The paper guide/ribbon guide assembly (reference 2410 Manual Fig. 3-4)
is being eliminated.
This change will simplify mechanical alignment
and make the units less susceptible to operator abuse.
The change
also reduces "smudging" by minimizing unwanted contact between paper
and ribbon.
Effectivity:
The AZ-167 will be incorporated at SIN 2525 scheduled for October
delivery.
The AZ-l67 can be used int·erchangeably with the AZ-19 in
all units.
The AZ-l9 cannot be used in units above SIN 2525.
This
change will also be implemented in the Model 2310 in the near future.
The paper guide/ribbon guide will not be used after SIN 2492.

Title

INSTALLATION OF AUTOMATIC PERFORATION STEPOVER
Processor Applicability

I I I

I I

Author
Approval

w.
w.

Rev

Cummins
Cummins

Tech Tip LP01-TT-12
Number
Cross Reference
0

Date 07/31/72

All Data Product Line Printers (2310-80 column) delivered to DEC
that are above Data Product serial number 556 DO NOT HAVE automatic perforation stepover installed. If you have any customers
who desire this feature, the following change must be made:
Add a wire from 9-27 to 4-25 on the logic cage.
Title

Tech Tip
Number LP01-TT-l3

LPOl 96-Character Drum
Processor Applicability

{' I I I I I I I

Author

J. Lacey

Approval

Cummins

Rev

Cross Reference

Date

The LPOl normally has a 64-character print drum, but as an option
a 96-character print drum is available. Unfortunately there is
very little information in the Data Products Corporation Technical
Manual regarding this option, which has caused some concern. The
following provides additional information.
1.

Nonprintable Code Detector (Figure 6-7)
Pin 31 on the input is grounded thus making 140 through
177 legal.

Page 15

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

·mamDDmD
Title

12 Bit

(!J

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36 Bit

~ 2 ILsl I

Problem:

I I I

Rev

Author
Approval H.

LINC-8

Incorrect Cable Listings in the Linc-8
Processor Applicability

All

16 Bit

Option or Designator

Tech Tip
Number

LINC-8-TT-l

Cross Reference

Date 8 - 1 7 - 7 2

LONG

Incorrect cable listings in the LINC-8

Since the Linc -8 was first introduced there has been a problem with
the cable listings.
The prints of the PDP-8 section give standard'
PDP-8 cable connections, which for the Linc-8 are totally useless.
The PDP-8 section is the only part in error.
Solution:
Attached is a complete list of the cables of the Linc-8
their slot positions, part numbers, length and type of cable,
This list complements the list in the Maintenance Manual Vol 2
on page 72 and 73 (print #D-IC-LINC 8-0-5 and #D-IC-LINC-8-0-6 I/O
cables) both these prints and these attached sheets should be
consulted before coming to the conclusion that a cable is missing
or a wiring error has been found.
L.ength-

P.art Numb er

Notes

Type of Cable

Slot Positions

#1
#1
#1

W034-W035
W034-W034
W034-W034

MA37
MA38
ME36

PC 01
PDOI
PEal

50"
52"
70"

74-5559
74-05554-10
74-05554-5

W034-W034

MF36 - PFOI
MA36 - LAOI
LDOI
MD40
LEOI
ME40
LFOI
MF40
MH38 - LH03
MJ39 - LJ02
MJ40 - LJOI
LH39 - PH02
LH40 - PHol
LJ39 - PJ02
LJ40 - PJOI
LH02
MH39
LHOI
MH40
MJ37 - LJ04
MJ38 - LJ03
LJ38 - PJ03
LH38 - PH03
LA02 - PAOI
LA03 - PBOl
LA31 - DB36
INDol- PC38
IND02-PB38

30"
10"
10"
10"
10"
10"
10"
10"
10"
10"
10"
10"
12"
12"
12"
12"
12"
12"
52"
52"
80"
80"

74-05554-8
74-05554-1

W034-W034
W03l-W03l

W031-W03l
W034-W034
W034-W034
W033-W033

IPAGE

11 PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

74-05554-1

74-05554-1
74-05552-2

74-05552-2
74-05554-10
74-05554-10
74-055-3-5

October 1972

Title
All

y..

LPOI/LP02 HAMMER FLIGHT TIME ADJUSTMENT
(Continued)
Processor Applicability
Author R. Rasmussen

I I I I I 1I

Approval

Cummins

Tech Tip
Number

Rev

LPOl-TT- 9
Cross Reference

Date

The wave form seen is the negative portion of a 65V
negative pulse.

Now reset scope to ADD channel B INVERTED. The
waveform now seen should resembre the waveform shown
below. The dotted area drawn inficates the error and
should be adjusted out by turning appropriate allen
screw adjustment.
FIGURE - 2A

,[:,: ~
'f

-- ,
,.'

~ 1--

,
/J.\.

'I::----' ;'II
\

on Phase of
Error Pulse will be
either Positive or
Negative.

~Depending

"' Adjust
Pulse!

for no Error

Refer to table 5-5 and connect channel B probe to test
point of hammer to be adjusted with hammer #1 as reference.

Adjust hammer 3 through 20 (24) per figure 2A.

Change to zone 1 and 2 on interface test board.
waveforms will be observed as zones are added.

Change scope setting from ADD to Channel A. Now adjust
hammer #21 (25) so it falls simultanwously with waveform
producted by Hammer #1. The hammer #1 and hammer #21 (25)
waveform will look similar to Figure 3A.

Multiple

FIGURE - 3A

E;ror

-i
t~.

is time between
po sitive upswing of
wa veform. Adjust hammer
#2 1 (25) so hammer #1
an d hammer #21(25) occur
at same time.

I
I

Page -13-

momaama
Title
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12Bit ~

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

Option or Designator
LINC-8

Tech Tip
LINC-8 CLAMP LOAD'S LOCATION AND USE
Numb& LINC-8-TT-~1
Processor Applicability
Cross Reference
Rev
Author STEVE LAMOTTE
Approval DICK EDWARDS Date 9/12/72
L I IN
c
81

I I

I I I

A list of the unused clamp loads within the normal (basic) Linc-8
system has never been compiled in the past.
First, a word about the clamp load and it's uses. There are
basically 3 types of clamp loads: 2 rna, 5 rna, and 10 rna, with
flip-flops, singleshots and special purpose modules differing
in load and drive capability.
The clamp, when driven to ground acts as a load, of it's given
value, thus removing that value of driving capability from the
circuit. Although, when the clamp is driven to -3 volts, it
acts as a supply; the amount of supply per clamp is given in
chart form later.
Each circuit in theLinc-8 needs 1 rna of input drive, and has an
output capability of 18 rna, except for flip-flops and singleshots
which have 17 rna's of 9utput.
Adding a clamp will inprove fall time and the -3 volt drive,
but at a cost of the ground driving and noise immunity
capability of the output circuit.
In conclusion: before adding a clamp load, take into account:
1.

What logic level is needed on the output to be clamped?

How many circuits are already being driven by the output
circuit?

If the output is ground, as a logical one, how much noise
is tolerable to achieve the added drive.

IPAGE lOF

I PAGE REVISION

~I PUBLICATION DATE

September, 1972

Title

\Tech Tip LP01-Trp..7
Number
Cross Reference
Rev
0

LP01/LP02 PRINT QUALITY (Continued)
Processor Applicability

~I I I I I I I
H)

Author

J. Lacey
Approval w. Cummins

Date 07/31/72

The setting of the copies control can also effect print
quality. There is very little information concerning
this adjustment, because all it does is allow you to
change from single copy to multiple copy paper. This is
accomplished by moving the hammer bank exactly the thickness of the paper, thus maintaining the same hammer flight
time. It is possible, depending on the thickness of paper
used, when changing from single copy to multiple copy
paper that the copies control lever will need to be set at
a position other than the one that corresponds with the
number of copies being printed. When the copies control
is out of adjustment it can cause one of two problems.
First, if the hammer bank is too close to the paper, the
hammer flight time is shortened and the top of the characters are lost because the hammer strikes the character drum

too early. In extreme cases, paper jamming can result.
Secondly, if the hammer bank is not close enough, the flight
time is increased and the bottom of the characters are lost.
The increased flight time also means that the hammer strikes
with less force and degrades the print quality on the back
copies. In extreme cases, hammers may be damaged.
This information was made possible largely through the efforts
of John Benton.
Title

xii

Tech Tip
Number LP01-TT- 8

LP01/LP02 HAMMER/HAMMER DRIVER FAILURE
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Author

J. Lacey

Approval

Cummins

Rev

Cross Reference

Date

Upon the failure of a hammer driver module it is possible that a
hammer may be destroyed, which in turn could cause damage to the
replacement hammer driver module.
Before replacing a failed hammer driver module it is advisable to
insure that none of the hammers were damaged. This can be accomplished by removing all of the hammer driver modules and taking
resistance readings across each of the hammers. If the resistance
of any hammer is not bewteen 15 and 20 OHMS (nominal 18 OHMS) it
should be considered bad and replaced.

Page -11-

Title

Tech Tip
LINC-8 CLAMP LOAD'S LOCATION AND USE
Number LINC-8-TT-,9'1
Processor Applicability
Rev
Cross Reference
Author STEVE LAMOTTE
L I N C
ApprovaloICK EDWARDS Date 9/12/72
18

-~II I I I I I

UNUSED CLAMP LOADS
PIN

MODULE
LOC.

TYPE
MODULE

PA24

5111

PA27

SIll

PA27

SIll

PA27

SIll

PA3~

SIll

PA36

W5~1

PB23

SIll

PB29

SIll

PB32

SIll

PB32

SIll

PC28

SIll

PD24

5111

PD27

5111

PE27

SIll

182

PE17

SIll

182

PE17

SIll

182

PE2~

SIll

182

PE2~

SIll

182

PE2~

SIll

182

PE26

SIll

182

PE26

SIll

182

PE27

SIll

182

Page 3

APPLICABLE
ONLY IF OPTION

Title

IMPROVING PRINT QUALITY ON THE LP01 (DATA
PRODUCTS 2310) (Continued)
Processor Applicability

I I I I I

Author

Jim Lacey

Approval

Cummins

Tech Tip
Number

Rev

LP01-TT- 7
Cross Reference

Date

Ribbon and paper dust will accumulate on the paper tension bar
(figure 1-8) and also become trapped in the ribbon as it winds
on the spool.
This will cause a smearing effect on the first
copy of the printed paper when allowed to accumulate in sufficient
quantities.
Regular cleaning of the ribbon and the paper
tension bar with a brush or other suitable tool should eliminate
this problem.

The ribbon tension should be checked to insure that the drag
current is being applied to the ribbon take-up motors.
This
may be checked in the following manner:

With power on, open the drum gate and swing out the
drum assembly.

Check the drag current for the upper take-up by holding
the lower ribbon spool and rolling the upper ribbon spool
so that the ribbon goes slack.
Now by releasing the upper
spool, it should automatically rewind and pull the ribbon
taut.

Perform this same type of procedure for the lower ribbon
take-up.

The type of paper used will have an extremely important effect
on print quality, particularly when using multi-part paper.
An evaluation was conducted to determine the best six-part
paper with carbons for use.
The results are as follows:
First Choice:
Moore Business Forms,
Paper Weight:
11 pound multirite
Carbon Weight:
6 pound tab back
Performance:
Good
Print Quality, Copy #6: Dark, Distinct

Inc.

Second Choice:
Paper Weight:

Standard Register Company
10 pound Stancote (copies 1 through 5)
15 pound Stancote (copy 6)
Carbon Weight:
#512 (Carbons 1 through 4
#510 (Carbon 5)
P erformanc e:
Good
Print Quality, Copy #6: Medium to light, Distinct
Third Choice:
Paper Weight:
Carbon Weight:
Performance:
Print Quality, Copy #6:

Royal Business Forms, Inc.
11 pound, Form 811-3
Unlabeled
Good
Dark, somewhat blurred

page -9-

Title
All

LINC-8 CLAMP LOAD'S LOCATION AND
Processor Applicability

I L II

Ic I I 81

Author

n~F.

STEVE LAMOTTE

Approval DICK EDWARDS Date

Rev

Tech Tip
Number LINC-8-TT-~1
Cross Reference

9/12/72

MODULE
LOC.

TYPE
MODULE

MH11

R3~3

MH11

R3~3

MH19

SIll

MH19

SIll

MJ18

Slll

MJ23

SIll

MJ23

SIll

MJ27

SIll

MJ27

SIll

LA28

W~~5

LA28

W~~5

LA34

W~~5

LA34

W~f15

LD~2

Bl15

LD,02

B115

LDf12

Bl15

LE,03

Bl15

183

LE,03

Bl15

183

APPLICABLE
ONLY IF OPTION

Page 5

LPOl INFORMATION (Continued)

Title

Processor Applicability

~I I I I I I I

Author

J. Lacey

Approval

w. Cummins

Rev

Tech Tip LPOl-TT _ 6
Number
Cross Reference
0

Date 07/31/72

***********

CAUTION

***********

Do not allow code wheel to hit pick-up as damage can occur.

Thread pick-up in or out until desired signal is obtained.

Tighten locknut; ensure pick-up does not move.

/mt

Page -7-

("PT.

mamaama

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

[i) I

16 Bit

[iJ I

18 Bit

fi) T

36 Bit

I I I I I I I

Author Davis/Barnett
Approval w. Cummins

LKOl

[i)

Title KEYBOARD SHORTS CAUSED BY PAPERCLIPS, ETC.
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Rev

Tech Tip
LKOI-TT-l
Number
Cross Reference
0

Date 11/20/72

Exposed foil etch on keyboard becomes shorted by staples and/or
paperclips, etc; resulting in permanent damage to keyboard assembly.
To reduce or eliminate the problem cover the exposed etch with
paper stock or foam rubber and tuck the material under the top
'r ow of keys. Then tape material to board.
/mt

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

November 1972

CPL

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

mamaoma
Title

12 Bit ~

1 16 Bit

18 Bit ~

LPOl
36 Bit

rXJ
Tech Tip
Number LPOI-TT-l

NOISE PROBLEM ON DATA PRODUCTS LINE PRINTER
Processor Applicability

Author

;<11 I I I I I I

Rev

Bill Freeman

Approval Bill Cummins

The ASl3 module used in the 23l~ and 241~
by Data Products have spare gates used on
are prone to pick up noise. Pins 5 and 6
I.C.'s should be tied to ground.
(Module

Option or Designator

Date

Cross Reference

June 1

line printers manufactured
the transducer amp which
on the Zl,l, Z2,l and Z3,1
Pin 2 or 6,).

/mt

NoCr f

reo,.

QJcls
th', s

G"J de.' ~te.s
c:l ro.lA)·' nj

n:
Page 2

momoama
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12Bit

G785/ ~·lCgL/KP8L

[)

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

I 1 I I

Author
Approval

!·1C8L

Tech Tip
Number

CO!-1PATIBILITY

Processor Applicability
All 18L

Option or Designator

~J ewbury

~'l.

Cumluins

Rev

HC8L-TT- 1
Cross Reference

Date 07/27/72

The ~C 8 L/KP9L configuration requires that the G785 in the 8L be
an E etch revision or later.
This eliminates the need for the
"7991 :-:lodule in COl of the BAaS.
'!'he G785E revision keeps CP
pm~R OK from dropping too fast at power down.

PAGE

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title

All

Tech Tip

CHECKSUM ERRORS ON LONG TAPES
Processor Applicability

Number

Author }buntain View F IS Rev
Approval

KLSE-TT-6
Cross Reference

Date

Intermittent errors when reading in long binary tapes can
often be cured by installing a logic change described in
ECO MS650-002.
(The ECO is a one year old phase in ECO
which has not yet been implemented in Production.)
The relevant portion of the ECO reads as follows:
Problem: Gradual frequency drift of incoming data relative
to receiver clock allows logic hazard to occur in receiver
shift register under worst case IC combination.
Correction: Guarantee E6/E10 shift register is allowed proper
setup time by cutting Etch at Ell pin 9. RUN JUMPER Ell pin
9 to E4 pin 6. Cut Etch at E7 pin 10. RUN JUMPER E7 pin 10
to E4 pin S. ADD JUMPERE3 pin 5 to E12 pin 9.
This correction applies only to Etch Rev. C boards and is
already represented graphically on Rev. C and later circuit
schematics.
Modules shipped to date have CS Rev. D stamped on their handles,
BUT DO NOT INCORPORATE THE ABOVE CHANGE.

'- -

DIGITAL

EQUIPMENT

CORPORATION

Page -4-

momODmo

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 I

36 Bit

Processor Applicability

18FIsE

I I I I I

W. Freeman

Author

Approval W. Cummins

MI8E

Title MI8E l'1ANUAL
All

Option or Designator

Rev

Tech Tip
Number MI8E-TT-1
Cross Reference
0

Date 06-21-72

The preliminary MI8E Manual, page 3, explains the encoding scheme
of options. The discussion for the TD8E is in error. The data
should be:
1312
4312
4312

6773

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE June 21; 1972

Title

Processor Applicability

All bE

Tech Tip
Number

FAULTY I.C. ON KL8E

I I I I I I

Author

Bill Freeman

Approval

w. Cummins

Rev
Date

KL8E TT-3
Cross Reference

7-31-72

If converting MB650 to a MB650YA or experiencing garbled
data on a MB650, insure the I.C. E22 (74193) is not manufactured by National. Replace this chip with one manufactured
by Texas Instruments to correct the problem.
Title

ITech
Tip
Number

KL8E Device Codes (MB650)
Processor Applicability

All IBE I

I I I I I

Author Bill Freeman
Approval

w. Cummins

Rev
Date

KLBE TT-4
Cross Reference

7-31-72

The KL8E (M8650) has jumper selectable I/O device codes.
Unless the
customer requests, or the system configuration requires a deviation
from standard, the select codes will be 03-04 for console and 30-31,
32-33, 34-35, 36-37 for added units.
The device codes for TSS8E
and EDU systems configured by production will be:
KL8E#

o
1
2

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

10
11
· 12
13
14
15
16

(console)

KL8E Device Code

03/04
40/41
42/43
44/45
46/47
34/35
11/12

30/31
32/33
SO/51
52/53
54/55
56/57
70/71
36/37
72/73
74/7 5

If a KL8E is to be a field add on, the option will be delivered with
device code 03/04.
Reference pages 12, 13, 14, and lS of the KL8E engineering spec
in the PDP-8E print set to change or check the jumpers.

Page 2

momDomo
Title
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16 Bit

o I 18Bit 01

18E I 8MI

I 1 I I

MM8EJ

0
ITech
Tip
Number

MM8EJ MODULE INTERCHANGEABILITY
Processor Applicability

36Bit

Option or Designator

Rev
Author Bruce Tarpley
~
Approval Frank BurcellDate 12/1/72

HM8EJ-TT-l
Cross Reference

There are two combinations of boards which have been shipped to date.
Up until September 15, 1972 GIll Rev. D., G646 Rev. B., and G233 Rev.
E were shipped. Everything up to serial #230 falls into this group.
The serial number is stamped in ink on each memory board.
Since 9/15/72, GIll Rev. F., G646 Rev. C., and G233 Rev. F have been
shipped. This is the correct and most up-to-date combination.
Any problem encountered with an MM8EJ with a serial number below 230
should be treated by removing the entire memory and returning it for
repair. The GIll and G646 may be retrofitted, but the G223 should be
scrapped.
Any MM8EJ with serial number greater than 230 has modules which are
totally interchangeable and may be replaced singularly if necessary.
If a D or E Rev GIll must be retrofitted to an F Rev in the field, the
following procedure must be followed:
Use a G233 which has both a l4.7K and 34.8K resistor in it.
(R96 and R97)
With a
the +5
the +5
be put

Digital Voltmeter, measure the voltage on pin HAl, Vxv and
volts. vxv must be between -3.65 and -3.70 with resp~6t to
volt measurement. To change Vxy , a parallel resistor should
across R65.
-

Below is a list of useful resistor values which may be used for R65.
pin

Valve
2.37K
2.49K
2.6lK
2.74K

13-10632
13-00424
13-03303
13-04868

~
~
~
~

watt,
watt,
watt,
watt,

1%
1%
1%

To change from 2.37K to 2.74K gives a voltage change in Vxy of
approximately 130 mv. If R65 is made larger, Vxy becomes smaller.

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE December 1972

momoama

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16Bit

18 Bit

36 Bit

r:J

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Author

MM8I

Title POP-l2 MEMORY BUS TERMINATION
AIIXI

Option or Desigilator

Approval H

Rev

LonQ
T,on cr

Tech Tip
Number MMBI-TT-l
Cross Reference
0

Date 6/2/72

Owg. A-MU-MMBI-A specifies that a G7l7 terminator is to be used at the physical
end of the memory bus. The POP-l2 memory bus drivers are severely loaded by
a G7l7 and memory problems may occur. Instead, use a M906 terminator in
A32 or 032 as necessary. NOTE: The M906 requires a +5 volt supply; jumper +5V
to A32A2 or 032A2 as necessary.

Title

Noise In MMBI

Processor Applicability

Author

Rev

Nunley

Approval

Tech Tip
MMBI-TT-2
Number
Cross Reference
o

Date

We are getting complaints of erratic operation of MM's on systems 12K
and up. The symptoms are inability to run EAE maindecs in field 2 and
up or occasional jumping to wrong field for data or instructions, or
inability to manual load or examine in field 2 and up, etc.
The problem is noise pick-up in the MM due to proximity of mem done
and mem start, and between EA bit signal lines, and in some cases,
poor termination.
The following is a summary of cures for the problem:
EC08I-.0.0,054

Buffer mem start and TP2.

ECO 8I-%%%85

Delay TP3 by 50 nanosec to allow adder more set-up

time.
ECO 81-,0,0107
ECOt~8I-,0,0,015

Install in all with MM.

Install in all with MC.

Buffers EA bits and increases drive capability. Install
~n all with MM where noisey EA bits are observed.
-

Inhibits mem done from a nonexistent field in MM8IA
or ~ill8IC. Install in all MM8IA or MM8IC. ECOMM8IA-,0,0,016
corrects ECOMM8IA-,0,0,015.
(Last line should read B08El
to B06Bl - add, instead of B06Bl to B06El - add.)

ECOMM8I-,0,0,012 -

Terminates mem start and TP2 in last MM. Install in
last MM.
The cure for inductive pick up between mem start and mem done is to
reroute and separate the two by maintaining the current pin connections
but reroute mem start across the "A" row and mem done across the "D"
row, instead of both running across the "B" row. ~he same type thing
could be done for the EA lines if inductive noise 1S observed on them
in the MM.
PAGEl
PAGE REVISION 0
PUBLICATION DATE
July 1972

mBmDDmD~F_'E_LD~S~E~R_V'_CE_T~E~CH_N_'C~A~L~M_AN_U~AL~
12 Bit ~ I 16 Bit 01 18 Bit 0 I 36 Bit 0
Title

I I I I I I I

MMBI

lTech Tip
Number

PRINT CORRECTIONS (PDP-12)
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Rev

Author
Approval H. Lonq

MMBI-TT-S
Cross Reference

Date OB.17.72

The following signal names should be corrected on the MM8I-A-l,
Memory Control Page.
Name

1.
2.
3.
4.

MXB START MEM H
MXB MEM TP 3 H
MXF EA fI H

MEM START

BTP2
EAO
EA1

MXF EA 1 H

/mt

PAGE

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Au ust 1972

Title

Processor Applicability
All

I I I I I

KE8E TT-3
Cross Reference

Author

Rev
Dick Weimer
0
Approval W.E. Cunnnins Date 7-31-72

For EAE to run on a four Omnibus system, the M83l0 module
must be at least Etch rev. B es rev. F.

It is possible for the M8340 module (circuit rev. 0 and earlier)
to decode an erroneous EAE instruction while in use on a four
Omnibus system.
This is due to the relatively high threshold
value of the I.e. DEC 380 input buffer and slow rise time of
the M.D. bits on the long Omnibus (ECO in progress)

Title
All

Tech Tip
Number

KE8E COMPATIBILITY

At present it is not advisable to extend any module which
transmits or receives the signals AC & MQ load, when using
M834l circuit rev. C. and earlier.
Until M834l circuit
rev. D. is available use a module swap method of troubleshooting the EAE.

When M834l circuit rev.D becomes available, it will be
necessary to extend BOTH the M8300 and M83l0 simultaneously
when troubleshooting M83l0. or H8300.
All other modules may be
extended individually. (M833, M~j40, M834l, M8330)

KE8E INSTRUCTION TEST 2
Processor Applicability

Tech Tip
Number

(8E-DOMA)

Author D'

Rev

Approval W. Cunnnins

Problem:

1)
2)

Date

KE8E TT-4
Cross Reference

7-31-72

Binary tape does not entirely match the listing.
Teletype reader will not read a tape for
interrupt testing.
Halts defined in the document must be changed to
conform to binary t~pe.

Correction:
1)
2)

A new Maindec will be released at a later date.
To start the TTY reader, press any key on the
teletype keyboard.
Change the following halts defined in the
document:
Paragraph 5.1.1

0201 to 0200
0251 to 0250

Page 2

CPL

mamDDma
Title

~II

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit ~I 16Bit gj

18Bit ~

I I I I I I I

Author ART ZINS
Approval ART ZINS

MOS DEVICES

36Bit ~

HANDLING OF MOS DEVICES
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Rev

Tech Ti~OS-TT-l
Number
Cross Reference

Date 11/7/72

Due to the high input impedanc~ of MOS (metal oxide semiconductor) devices, they are susceptable to damage from static
discharge. These devices, such as the Intel 1103-1, are employed extensively on the G401 MOS memory matrix for the PDP-l1/45.
Many manufacturers of MOS devices use variol~types of internal
protection against damage from static discharge. These types
of protection range from Zener diodes to 1in1.iting resistors.
However, the effectiveness of these protection schemes is
questionable and many manufacturers suggest that additional
precautions be taken to ensure safe handling of these devices.
Of course the precautions taken in the factory are more extensive
than those that are practical for field implementation. However,
the following information should be helpful for field handling
of MOS devices.
1.

Choose a work area that exhibits minimal potential for the
generation of static electricity.

Use a power receptacle that has a connection to earth
ground.

Only use a soldering iron that offers a 3 wire ground such
as the new DEC-supplied soldering iron (DEC Part No.
29-13452). Do not use a transformer type soldering iron.

If you are sitting in a chair while working with MOS devices,
it is suggested that the chair be electrically connected
to the frame of the work table. If this is not possible,
use care to prevent the " chair from touching the work
table, thus preventing a static discharge from the chair
to the work table.

Removal of defective MOS devices from a module requires no
special handling procedures. MOS devices, once soldered
on the board, offer no danger of damage from static discharge.

If you are standing while handling MOS devices, avoid rubbing
your clothing against the work table or near by furniture,
thereby preventing the build up of static electricity.

MOS devices (as supplied by DEC) are packaged in a conductive
plastic bag. Before opening the bag, touch the work table
or metal connected to it to discharge any static build up.

IPAGE 1

II PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

November, 1972

1~ech Tip

Title

Halting During An Interrupt of a Break (cont Number KD8E-TT-l
Processor Applicability

All

I BEl

I I I I I

Author

K. Quinn

Approval

w. Cwmnins

Rev

0
Date 7-31-72

Cross Reference

HALTING DURING A BREAK (continued)
Symptoms If Halted During A Break
1. MD = HALT
2.
Turn front panel indicator switch to State.
3.
If no major State is visible (BRK or BRK PROG is on)
then the above condition exists.
Best Way to Recover Address
1.
Depress Single Step, then continue as many times as
necessary to obtain the Fetch State.
2.
The EM, CPMA generally would now display the address
of the Halt command +1.

HALTING DURING AN INTERRUPT
It is possible to Fetch a Halt, have an Interrupt Request and
the Interrupt Qualified in the same cycle.
Symptoms If Halted During An Interrupt
1.
EMA,MA = ~ 0000
2.
STATUS:
ION is Lit
3.
STATE:
Execute, (IR=JMS)
Best Way to Recover Address
Push Single Step down
1.
2.
Hit Continue
3.
MD = Memory Address of Halt + 1
4 . To find EMA issue RIB instruction.

Page 2

mamaomo
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16Bit

18Bit

36Bit

Processor Applicability

ISElsMlsFI

I I

Author

Jeff Blundell

Approval F.

Purcell

MR8E

tTech Tip
MR8E-TT-l
Number

Diagnostic Difficulties with ROM's

All

Option or Designator

Rev

Cross Reference

Date 11/20/72

The MR8E is a 256 word Read Only Memory (ROM) and can in no way
have its contents changed by program control.
It follows therefore
than the only way to test it is to compare its contents against a
table that lists what should be in the ROM.
There are two (2) problems currently associated with the MRSE ROM.
1)

A number of problem reports have been received saying that
extended memory control test (Maindec-OS-DHCMA-A) fails when
there is a ROM in the configuration. This is to be expected.
The program will halt at 2263 to tell you memory has been
found in an area that supposedly contained none.
(Most ROM's
are used as a bootstrap in field 7), and this is a legitimate
halt.
If you want to test extended memory, then remove the
ROM temporarily.
The error halt can be useful however, to
check that the ROM is only answering to addresses that belong
to it, or to locate the starting address of a ROM if you don't
want to go diode hunting to see what it is set up for.

Maindec-SE-DlJB (MR8E Test) if full of mistakes.
It does a good
test if the ROM is okay, but if you have errors then it bombs
itself and print inaccurate error information. The current MCN's
do NOT correct the problem, and a new version of the program is
about to be issued. Most ROM problems, incidently, are due to
bad corrections at the ends of either the current wires or the
sense wires. Re-soldering, being sure to tin the wire, will
usually fix it.

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

November 1972

Title

Processor Applicability

All

I BEl I I I I I

Author

Ra.lph Boehm

Approval

w. Cummins

KABE TT-2

/Tech Tip
Number

MB350 POSITIVE I/O BUS IN'l'BRt'A.CE

Rev 0

Cross Reference

Date 7-31-72

For customer peripherals that need more than SOO nanoseconds
separation between roP's, it is necessary that ECO MS350-0002
be accomplished.
Without the ECO it is possible the rop will still be timing out
at the next TP2. This can cause the KA to restart its timing
and send the machine off into random locations in memory.

Title

ITech
Tip
Number

COLD SOLDER ON M835
Processor Applicability

All 18EI

I I I

Author Weimer/Toolan

Rev

KA8E-TT-3
Cross Reference

ApprovalFrank Purcell Date 07/31/72

The ground side of capacitor C16 on the M835 module may be
found to be cold soldered. This is due to the unusually
small pad on side two. Although this problem does not
affect the normal operation of the module, it is advisable
to inspect the connection, and if necessary, resolder from
the component side of the module.

Page 2

mamDDma

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

lliJl

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

All .1
8's

I I I I I

Author

M302

\ Tech Tip

Title RINGING ON M302 OUTPUT
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Number

Sweeney/MacLeod

Approval F.

Purcell

Date

Rev

M302-TT""1
Cross Reference

11/20/72

The M302 rev~s~on K and L will have multiple transitions on the trailing
edge of the output, when the input trigger signal remains low longer
than the delay time-out.
(When a pulse trigger signal is used, this
problem does not occur.)
This particular problem showed up in theTROS Magtape Interface. The
signal RAMP H was causing inconsistant tape motion.
Replacement of
the M302 at location A18 of the TROS with a new M3020 will correct
this deficiency.
If an M3020 is not available, an M302 with a revision
earlier than K may be substituted.

PAGEl

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

November 1972

"' -

r-------------~~~~--~--t--FI_E_L_D_S.E_R_V_i_C_
...
·:..

mamODma

·:'"E_:'.:~==T:E:C:H~N~_I~C~A~L~~M~A~N~_U-_A-_L---'-r---O-p-ti-on-:-;o-D:-si-gn-at-or~.....

'--_ _ _ _ _ _-'-_1_2_B_it-.::CEJ=
x :-.a..l
i _ 16 Bit

Title

~PT

®l

18 Bit

ell

36 Bit

~
Tech Tip
Number

M40S A CRYSTAL CLOCK-MULTIPLE OUTPUT
Processor Applicability

All

8' 51 lsi

Cross Reference

GUS PASQUANTONIO Rev 0
Approval DICK EDWARDS Date 11/20/72
Author

M405-TT-l

The M40SA Crystal clock has been known to produce a multiple pulse
output when operating in the 5-10 and 19-20 KHZ ranges.
If
you experience this problem, replace M405A with M405B, which
incorporates ECO M405-01. This ECO isolates the analog circuitry
ground from the tank circuitry ground, and both widens and
shortens the tank ground path to reduce inductance, thereby
eliminating the problem.
If an M40SB is not available you may install the ECO yourself
as follows:
Looking at the etch side of the M405A (Handle UP),
cut the etch between the bottom left shield screw and R5. Solder
a piece of insulated wire from Pin 7 of El to the ground side of
Rl.
The accompanying sketch illustrates the ground path and the
alteration points.

('._"._. [1

b. ___ ... _l

ft.

PAGEl

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

November 1972

mamaama
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

(!)\

16 Bit

o I 18 Bit 01

36Bit

M4l0 REED CLOCK

Processor Applicability
All ISII

Author

Bill Freeman

Approval Bill Cwmnins Date

Option or Designator

M410

\ Tech Tip M410-TT-I
Number
Cross Reference
0
Rev

7-31-72

A problem has been encountered with the reed in the M4l0 reed clock.
The error indication may be that the DC08A clock interrupts stop,
causing the user program to hang up. The problem may be that the
bracket is not properly supporting the reed. The solution is to put
double sided tape on the bracket so that it holds the bracket to the
top of the reed and the reed is seated properly in its holder. It
may be necessary to elongate the mounting hole on the support bracket
to permit a firm bond between the bracket, the tape and the reed.

PAGE I

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Ju1

1972

mamoama
Title

12 Bit

liJl

16 Bit

o 1 18 Bit 01

I 8~ I I I I I

Au~or

Approval

36Bit

0
\ Tech Tip
Number

Bill Freeman

Option or Designator

M453

SPEED SELECTION OF M453 CLOCK
Processor Applicability

All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

Cummins

Rev

M453-TT-l
Cross Reference

Date 7/31/72

When using an M453 variable speed clock in place of an M452 clock in
a DC02A, the following jumpers are used to determine the frequency
of the clock output.
Pins Used On Clock

Baud rate

Frequency
200 hz - lK hz
1 K hz - 5 K hz
5 K hz - 25K hz
25 K hz - 125K hz
125K hz - 625K hz
Greater than
625K hz

25 baud - 125 baud
625
125
3125
625
3125 - 15625
15625 - 78125
greater than
78125

JI-Rl
JI-Pl
Jl-Nl
Jl-Ml
Jl-Ll
J 1- Kl

If an M453 is to be installed instead of an M452 also add Sl to Ul and
VI to +5 on each clock.

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

mamaoma
Title
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 I

36 Bit

ISMlsE

lTech Tip
Number M848-TT-l
Rev

Author

r.1848

POWER FAIL OPTION (M848 )
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Ralph Boehm
Approval w. Cummins

Date

Cross Reference

07/31/72

Due to the difference in power supplies between the 8E and the
8M, the M848 module must. be brought up to Revision "K" to work
correctly.
Revision "3" installs split lugs on the M848, for
use in an 8/M remove the jumper in these split lugs.
For use
in an 8/E install a jumper.
"8/M jumper out - 8/E jumper in"

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

mamonma
Title
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12Bit [)

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

ADJUST OF M8650 POSITIVE I/O MODULE
Processor Applicability

Author Don Herbener
Approval

Rev

Option or Designator
M8650
Tech Till
NumberM8650-TT-l
Cross Reference
0

Many M8650 modules being returned as defective are just out of
adjustment. To adjust the module put in the following program
where XX is a non-existant device code.

Now look at lOP 1 with probe 1 and lOP 2 with probe 2 at the most
distant interface logic. The width of lOP 1 should be adjusted
between 6~~ and 8~~ nanoseconds and the separation should be
adjusted between 2~~ and 4~~ nanoseconds. The specification for
total time from the start of IOPl to the start of lOP 2 should be
between 8~~ nanoseconds and 1 microsecond.
/mt

IPAGE 1

II PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

September 19_~

- .

momooma
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit []

1 16 Bit 0 1 18 Bit 0 I

36 Bit

Option or Designator
PA60A

USING TYPESETTING READER "9" AS A HIGH SPEED
READER
Processor Applicability
Rev
Author Don Stahl
Approval
Date

Tech Tip
Number PA60A-TT-l
Cross Reference

It may be desirable to use typesetting reader "0" as an 8 level
high speed reader to read Maindecs into the computer.
Instance s
where you would use this would be:
1)
2)
3)

If you have DECtape problems.
If you don't have a usable TCOI or 552 Library Tape, or
If it is a disk only system.

The following changes in the PA60, PA68A, PA68F, will enable you
t 0 use rea d e r " 0" tor e a din t-I a i n dec sin pia ceo f the AS R 3 3 / 3 5 .
If
reader "0" has been set up properly for 6 level input tapes, you
should not have any problem reading 8 level tapes.
If problems do
arise and you cannot read 8 level tape, you may have to set up the
reader for 8 level operation.
If this becomes necessary, remember to re-align reader for 6 level
operation after you are done using reader far maindecs.
Then place
6/8 level guide in 6 level position (UP).
PA60
1)

Delete PA60 A25 Pin D to GND (Hole 6).
Delete PA60 A25 Pin E to GND (Hole 7).

Check PA61 Slots AIO
Remove, if present.

Add PA60 A25 Pin 0 to SW.
Add PA60 A25 Pin E to SW.
Add PA60 , ny GND to SW.

AlSD
A1.5f.

& 11

for jumpers from Pin D to Pin C -

."'"

."-...

open 8 level
closed 6 level

& 11.

Add 2 /R-141 at PA61 slots AIO

Refer to Tech Tip for 6/8 level RDR alignment.

Set 6 / 8 level guide for 8 level (DOWN).
Reader 0 may now be
used as a high speed reader.
Parts required:
2/R-141 Modules
1 - Switch Assembly DPST
Wire

PAGEl

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

(continued)

July 1972

Title USING TYPESETTING READER "0" AS A HIGH SPEED

Tech Tip
Number

READER (Continued)

All

8's

Processor Applicability

Author.

I I I I I I

Rev

Don Stahl

Approval W.

Cummins

PA60A-TT-1
Cross Reference

Date 7 /31/72

Delete PA68A B13F to GND
Delete PA68A B13M to GND.

Add PA68A B13F to SW.
Add PA68A B13M to SW.
Add PA68A any GND to SW.

Refer to Tech Tip for 6/8 level reader alignment.
be used as a high speed reader.

Set 6/8 level guide for 8 level (DOWN).

Reader may now

Parts required:

l/switch assembly DPST
wire
PA68F
1)

Delete PA68F BlOH2 to GND.
Delete PA68F BlOEl to GND.

Add PA68F BlOEl to SW.
Add PA68F BlOHZ to SW.
Add PA68F any GND to SW.

B\OEI

----e. '--........-_---,

open 8 level

6\(; l-t1.

----e."-.

closed 6 level

Refer to Tech Tip for 6/8 level reader alignment.

Set 6/8 level guide for 8 level (DOWN).
Reader may now be used
as a high speed reader.
Parts required:
l/switch assembly DPST
wire

Title CLARIFICATION AND CORRECTION OF TYPESETTING ECO's

All

8 's

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

Author

Fred Miller

Approval

W. Cummins

Rev
Date

ITech

Tip
Number

PA60A-TT-2

Cross Reference

7/3lL72

PR68-TT-8

Page -2-

mamaama

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

[]I

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

36 Bit

Processor Applicability

Aumor

Fred Miller

Tech Tip
umber PA60A-TT-3

Cross Reference

Rev

Approval

8's

PA60A

Title ERRATIC PUNCH OUTPUT FROM PUNCHES ON A PA60 CONTRO
All

Option or Designator

Complete all punch adjustments detailed in Tech Tip "Punch
Adjustment Procedure" Section 4, Page 21. If there is still
unreliable operation such as holes being picked up or dropped,
characters being punched on top of other characters, or blank
frames of tape, check the Schmitt trigger in the PA60 control.
The W50l Schmitt trigger (B32) might not be operating properly.
The output pulses may vary radically in width and frequency
with the punch running constantly. The problem may be that pin
R, the input is clamped to about 2~ to 2~ volts. The problem
can be solved by taking the 2 rna. clamp load (Pin D) off the
imput (Pin R), and the 10 rna clamp off the output (Pin F) and
switching them. This results in having the input clamped with
10 rna clamp load, and the output clamped with the 2 rna clamp
load. This causes the input to go to -3V and, as a result,
reliable operations of the W50l.
Reference print PA60-A-4 circuit changed as follows:

To A14F

ST
W50l
B23

......1-...- - - - 1
F

PAGE 3

PAGE REVISION

____~___ Selected
Timing

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

momBDmo
Title
All
8's

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

KJ I

16Bit

0 I

l8Bit

0 I

36Bit

I I I I I I

PA60C

Tech Tip
Number PA60C-TT-l

PA60C OPTION
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Author

John Gleeson

Approval

('l1mm in""

Rev

Cross Reference

Date 07/31/72

The PA60C option (which will control up to 16 readers) provides a
user with a "non-torn tape" system.
The paper tape from the keyboard
perforator is left in the reader with the tape arm down and initiation
of reader selection is begun by pressing a push button mounted on the
reader. An indicator lamp, also mounted on the reader, will be extinguished and, provided that no other tape is being processed, the
computer will proceed to read and justify the tape. The end of a
"take" is indicated by a "stop" code which has been punched on the tape
by the operator. When this code is sensed, reading is discontinued and
the indicator lamp on the reader lights again. Thus, an operator is
free to perforate tape continuously, except for the pushing of a button
to signal the computer that a take is ready for processing.
BASIC THEORY OF OPERATION
Reader selection is made in the PA60A and/or PA60B (see print
BS-PA60-A-2, and Diagram #1) which generates select reader levels used
to gate the outputs of A and B flip-flops in order to drive the stepping
motors in the PR68A Readers (see print BS-PA61-A-3). Further control
over reader selection is made by ANDing the Select Reader signals with
the outputs of the reader selection in the PA60C.
INITIAL CONDITIONS
On power up and Key Start, Power Clear (produced in the computer)
is used to set all R202's in the PA60C .to the "1" state. The output
from each R202 is taken to two (2) WOSl's, one being used to control
the indicator lamp on the reader and the other to control S~lect Reader
signals. A ground level on the output from each "Select" WOSI will
inhibit reader selection by the PA60A or PA60B logic.
Thus', on power
up all readers are de-selected with the exception of reader ~ which
uses the opposite state of the RDR01 flip-flop for selection. This is
for purposes of program read-in since the Typesetting Rim Loader uses
reader ~ for reading program tapes, bootstrap tapes, etc.
Selection
of reader #~ is controlled by the RDROl logic in the PA60C; #1 by the
RDR02; #lS by RDR16.
When the typesetting program is started, it sequentially steps through
reader selecion searching for a selectable reader; i.e. one with tape
in it, the tape arm down and for which the button has been pressed;
for example, assume readers #1, 2 and 6 are selectable. The first lOT
312 will deselect reader ~, reset RDR01 flip-flop, find reader #1
selectable and will pegin processing the tape (See READER SELECTION,
next page). When processing is complete the nect lOT 312 will deselect
reader #1.

PAGEl

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

,July 1972

Title

Processor Applicability

All ,

8's

Tech Tip

PA60C (Continued)

I I I I

Number

Author

John Gleeson

Approval

W. Cummins

Rev
Date

PC60C-TT-l
Cross Reference

07/31/72

INITIAL CONDITIONS (Continued)
Set RDR02 Flip-Flop and check Reader #2. This is selectable so
the tape in Reader #2 will be processed. When processing is
complete the third lOT 312 will deselect Reader #2, set RDR03
Flip-Flop and check Reader #3. Thisis not selectable so another
lOT 312 will be given which will check reader #4. This continues until another selectable reader is found, in this example reader
#6. When the tape in this reader has been processed, reader #6
will be deselected, RDR07 Flip-Flop set and Reader #7 checked.
After reader #15 has been checked, searching will begin again at
Reader #/1.
Note that if Reader #0 is selectable when the typesetting
is started, (the button pushed after start but before the
is loaded) it will be deselected by the first IOT3l2.
It
selected again only after the program has checked through
other readers in the system and provided, of course, that
ator at Reader #0 has again pressed the button.

program
program
will be
the
the oper-

READER SELECTION
(See Diagram #1) - Example, when an operator at Reader #1 is ready
to have a "take" processed, he presses the push button mounted on
his reader.
The closing of its contacts produces a positive
going transition from the W700 switch filter in slot C06 (Pin K).
This pulse resets the RDR03 flip-flop in slot D09. The indicator
lamp on · the reader will be extinguished by the WOSI at C09, Pin F.
The SELECT READER 02 signal from the PA60A will hold the output
from the WOSl at CIO Pin F, at ground, and level RSOl will be at
-3V. When the operator selected read~ becomes program selected,
both SELECT READER signals will be at -3V, thus, tape processing
wil.l begin. When the stop code at the end of the tape is read, tape
processing is stopped, some housekeeping is performed and then the
program begins to step through reader selection again.

The IOT3l2

which began tape processing allowed RSOl to go to ground. The DCD
gate for the Flip-Flop is now enabled and hence the first IOT312
following tape processing will set Flip-Flop to the "I" state, thus,
deselecting the reader and lighting the indicator lamp on reader "I".
INHIBIT FACILITY
Mounted on the PA60B/C logic frame is a toggle switch. When switched
to the OFF position this provides an inhibit level which is used to
hold all reader select Flip-Flops in the "_" state~ i.e.~ permanently
selected. Thus, a selectable reader is redefined as a reader with tape
in it and the tape arm down, but without the requirement for pressing
the reader push button. PA60C-1-2, revision C and below do not show
this inhibit logic.

Page -2-

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

momoama
Title

All
lR '_s:.

PA60C

12Bit {]

16Bit

0-'

18Bit

36Bit

1 I I I I I

Author

John Gleeson

Approval

Currunins

PA60C

ITech Tip
Number PA60C-TT-l
Cross Reference
Rev
·1iJ

(Continued)

Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Date 07/31/72

INSTALLATION
The PA60B is a two (2) rack control which is pre-wired to include
the PA60C option.
The PA60C option is implemented by inserting
extra modules in the PA60B interface as per UML-PA60B-l.
If a
PA60C is being added in the field, cable interconnections are as
follows:

ORIGINAL
CONFIGURATION

PA61/1

PA60A
AB31
AB32

--------------

--0

PA60A

AB20
AB31
~

AB32

L--

CD30

EXPANDED
CONFIGURATION

PA61/1

PA60B
CD31

CD32

CD20
CD29

PA61/3

C0 2 7

--------------

c: 0 2 8

-------------- -------------------------

CD~7

CD!i18

PAGE 3

-------------

___ DASI12
.

READERS ~ thru 7
(lines to reader indicat or lamps and switches)
- - - - - - READERS 8 thru 15

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title
All

Tech Tip

PA60C (Continued)
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

Number

Author

John Gleeson

Approval W. Currunins

Rev

PC60C-TT-l
Cross Reference

Date 07/31/72

---- --

c.Q.

)
'~

.----4--~

-------

\.....

/
./

,--

'- -- --

_ .

NOTE:

Ihterconncctions are not shown on PA60B/C
prints.

DIAGRAM 1 - Example of Logic Interconnection
(Refer to Print PA 60-C -l)

Page -4-

mamaama

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

[]T

Title

PA60C (Continued)

All
8's

I I I I I I I

Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

PA60C
16 Bit

18 Bit

Author

John Gleeson

Approval

Cummins

36Bit

\ Tech Tip
Number PA60C-TT-l
Cross Reference
Rev
0
Date 07/31/72

PARTS LIST
Listed below are relevant part numbers for the PA6¢C modification:

DESCRITPION

QUANTITY
REQUIRED

PART
NUMBER

"Select"

Switch Box

1 per reader

76-.05424

Switch

Grayhill Switch #22.01

1 per reader

12-¢2995

Sub-miniature Toggle Switch

12.01168

"Inhibit"

Phillips Panhead M/C Screw 8/32xll/4LG 2

Switch

Spacer 1/4 0.0. #6 CL Hole lLG

Switch Mounting Bracket

74~5269

Dia1co l¢IR Light

1 per reader

12-4628

Light Eulb 33¢

1 per reader

12-2986

Jones 'Ierminal Strip *1=4-140

1 per reader

9¢-¢69¢1

John Gleeson

PAGE 5

9.0¢6¢44-1

1)ecember 1970

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Jul

1972

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

C~)tion or Desi9na~;-;1

~------~~--------~~------~~~---------=-

12 Bit

Title

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 I

36 Bit

Au~or

Number

Approval

Date

PA61A--TT-l
Cross Reference

Rev

P. Tinkham

A false indication of tape being read can result from unused reader
slots in the PA6lA logic.
With no reader connected to the PA6lA
logic, "feed hole" will float more negative than 0.7 volts falsely
indicating tape in the reader.
Since the typesetting program does
not know how many readers are available in the system it must check
each one.
Sequentially looking at readers 0-15, it in turn gives
each one a read command and then checks for a reader flag.
In existing
readers (assuming no tape is in the reader) "feed hole" will be at
ground and the flag will not be set. The program will then go on to
the next reader.
If the program tries to check a reader number
where none exists or is not plugged in, "feed hole" will be floating
negative enough to set the flag and will erroneously indicate a
reader with tape.
This will cause the program to hang up on the
false reading of rubout codes.
This problem is most likely to occur when:
1)

The system has just been installed and the typesetting program
is being run for the first time.

A reader has been temporarily taken off line for repairs, etc.

The problem can be solved by connecting the "feed hole" inputs of all
unused reader slots to ground.
Locate the correct points in Table 1
and jumper all unused reader slots to the nearest ground.
If a
reader was taken off line temporarily, remember to remove the jumper
when the reader is back in service.
PA61A

Number
1
1
1
1

2
2
2
2
3

4
5

2
3
6
7
8
9

3
3
3
4
4

10
11

12
13
14
15

IPAGEI

Reader
Number

II PAGE REVISION

Grounded
AIH
A2H
BIH
B2H
AIH
A2H
BIH
B2H
AlH
A2H
BIH
B2H
A1H
A2H
B1H
B2H

II PUBLICATION DATE

.~-~-----~-j
Tech Tip

PA6lA UNUSED READER SLOTS
Processor Applicability

Ph.61.A

July 1972

.Title

All

8!s

Tech Tip
30 VOLT POWER SUPPLY PROBLEMS
Number PA6lA-TT-2
Cross Reference
Processor Applicability
Rev
Author
Paul Tinkham
-'l
Approval W. Cummins Date
07/31/7'1

I I I I I I

There are two problems associated with the 30 volt power supply
used on all typesetting systems.
This is the G799 power supply
(G799A for 240V/SO HZ) which supplies -30 volts for the PA6lA
and PA68A, and +30 volts for the PA63 and PA68F controls.
The
absence of a bleeder resistor on the 30 volt line has caused reader
modules to be blown when inserting or removing the reader cable
even with all power turned off.
The other problem is excessive
noise on the line when both the reader and punch are operating,
causing various intermittent problems.
Both of these problems were solved by ECO number PA61-A-00003,
but most units shipped to date have not had this change incorporated.
The ECO consists of addition of a 500 ohm/25 watt bleeder resistor
and a 50 mfd/50 volt bypass capacitor in parallel across the 30
volt output.
This change applies to all controls (PA61A, PA68A,
PA63, PA68F) and must be added if not already present to expect
proper operation.
See Figure 1 for correct wiring and parts numbers.

+l5 ~~~~--~--~~----~GND
COM

10 PA~l A
OR PAbBA

(-I

-15

-30
-'30 VOL.

CO~FlGURRTION

+15

-ro PAb3

-15

~~~~

____~____~________~GND

.,. 30

Fl G. \
PAeTs
l

"O~T

CON FIGURATION

G799* FbW·ER SOPPL),
"*-G719 A - 240 V/50 1--11.,

~9ut e£D:

Rl
C.\

PAb8F

'"3-00333
\O-OO~80

500 OHM '25
50

MFa

Wf-lTTK£SISTOR.
SO ·"OLT CRPAC\TOr2.
Page -2-

momDDma
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

[j)

I I I I I I I

All :

I
8's
All

Title
All

36Bit

Author

P. Tinkham

Approval

W. Cummins

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Author

Fred Miller

Approval

Cummins

PA63

Rev

Tech Tip
PA63-TT-1
Number
Cross Reference
~

PA61A-TT-2

Date 07/1'/72

Tech Tip
Number

WARNING ABOUT M710 PUNCH CONTROL MODULE

I
8's
Title

Title

All

18Bit

VOLT POWER SUPPLY PROBLEMS

Processor Applicability

8's

16Bit

Option or Designator

Rev
Date

07/31/72

PA63-TT-2
Cross Reference

PA68F-TT-3

CLARIFICATION AND CORRECTION OF TYPESETTING ECO' s/TeCh Tip
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Number PA63-TT-1
Author

F. Miller

Approval W. Cummins

Rev
Date

07/31/7"

PA63/PA68F
Processor Applicability

g's

PR68 TT-9

Tech Tip
Number PA63-TT-4
Author P. Bezeredi
Approval

IPAGE 1

Cross Reference

II PAGE REVISION

Rev

Date

HpUBLICATION DATE July 1972

Tech Tip
Number

Title

NOISE ON IOP2

I
8's
All

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Author
Approval

R.Boehm

F. Miller

Rev

PA63-TT-S
Cross Reference

Date 8/9/73

Some PA63's were wired with the IOP2 line to C07E1 running parallel
with the 30V wires on C row.
The 30V runs induce noise into IOP2
line causing errors.
If this problem occurs reroute the IOP2 line
so that it runs down "B" row to B07 and then down to C07E 1.
The problem that occurs is the Reader Select Buffer being loaded at
the wrong time with the wrong value, thus deselecting the reader that
is running.
Usually shows up while running Test 07, typeset configuration test.

Page 2

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

Option or Designator

mamaoma L-'-2 -[J=--r-'-6-B-it--;:O~---:18:-:B::-:-it--;:0=\1~3::-6-=B:-:-itro=,1

PA68A

-B-it

USING TYPESETTING READER "0" AS A HIGH SPEED
Title READER
All
8's

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Author

Don Stahl

Approval

Cununins

ITeCh Tip
Number
Rev

PA68A-TT-l
Cross Reference

Date 07/31/72

PA60A-TT-l

Tech Tip
TWeCLARIFICATIO N AND CORRECTION OF TYPESETTING
BCO ' s
PA68A-'l'T-2
Number
Processor Applicability
Author Fred. Miller
Cross Reference
Rev
a
All ;1
8' s
Approval w. Cummins
PR68-TT-8
Date 07/31/72
1

I I I I I

Title
All
8
i 's

30 VOLT POWER SUPPLY PROBLEMS
Processor Applicability
Author
P. Tinkham

1J I I I

PAG[ 1

Approval

PAGE REVISION

Curnmin s

/Tech Tip
Number PA68A-TT-3
Rev
Date

Cross Reference

07/31/72

PUBLICATION DATE

PA61A-TT-2

,J 1111 9 7 2

mOmDD!a

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16Bit

18 Bit

36Bit

Option or Designator

PA68F

Tech Tip PA68F-TT-1
Number
Cross Reference

USING TYPESETTING READER "0" AS A HIGH SPEED

Title

READER

Processor Applicability

I I I I
8's
I I I
All

Author

Don Stahl

Approval

W. Currunins

Rev

Date 07/31/72

PA60A-TT-l

Tech Tip
Title CLARIFICATION AND CORRECTION OF TYPESETTING ECO's
PA68F-TT-2
Number
Cross Reference
Processor Applicability
Rev
Author
()
Frpn Millpr
All
PR68-TT-8
Approval W.
Date 07/31/72
~'s
Cununins

Title

I I I I I I

WARNING ABOUT M710 PUNCH CONTROL MODULE

I
8's
All

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Author

l<'rp'" Millor

Approval W. Cununins

Rev

Tech Tip
Number PA68F-TT-3
Cross Reference

0
Date 07/31/72

If you don't like to rebuild PP67C and PP67D (Teletype BRPE)
punches don't pull the M710 module out of PA68F or PA63 controls
and leave power on.
When the M710 is out of the circuit, the Ml13 input gates float.
This will turn on the M060 modules and drive maximum current
through each solenoid of the punch that is selected. within a
few minutes smoke begins to appear as the windings of the solenoids
begin to melt together and the green 10 watt resistors underneath
the punch turn shades of amber.
If you must have the M7l0 out or the circuit, remember to ~ie the
input gates of the Ml13 high.

All

8's

\ Tech Tip
Number PA68F-TT-4

30 VOLT POWER SUPPLY PROBLEMS

Title

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I
PAGE 1

Author

P. Tinkham

Approval W. Currunins

PAGE REVISION

Cross Reference

Rev 0
Date 07/31/72

PUBLICATION DATE

PA6lA-TT-2

July 1972

All

B's

lTech Tip
Number

PA68F CONVERSION PROBLEM - 6 to 8 level

Title

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Author

P. Tinkahm

Approval

W Cummins

Rev
Date

PA68F-TT-S
Cross Reference

07/31/72

When a PA68F {Positive Logic Single Reader/Punch Control}
is used for 6 level operation, the "one" side of RD7 and
RD6 flip-flops are wired to ground. This keeps RD7 and
RD6 from ever setting to a "one". Reference print
D-BS-PA68-F-I Rev. H.
Conversion of a PA68F to 8 level operation required removal
of the grounds (BlOEl, BlOH2 to Ground). There is a good
possibility that RD7 and RD6 will fail to operate properly
even with the grounds removed. This is due to the fact that
grounding these points might blowout the IC chips for RD7
and RD6.
Solution of the problem is either replacing the M216 in slot
BIO or replacing the appropriate IC's on the module after
the grounds are removed. An upcoming ECO will alter the
method of disabling RD7 and RD6 thus alleviating the problem.

Title

All

8's

\ Tech Tip

PA63/PA68F Typesetting Configuration Tests

Processor Applicability

I I I I 1 I

Author

Rev

P. Tinkham

Approval w

('llmminl=;

Number

Date

07/31/72

PA68F-TT-6
Cross Reference

TYPESET
SFTWRE-TT-6

Page -2-

CPL

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

mamaoma

12 Bit

([)-I

16 Bit

18 Bit

00 I

36Bit

PCOl

Tech TippC01_TT_l
Number
Cross Reference
0

Title PCOl PUNCH MOTOR REPLACEMENT

A~I

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

Au~or

Rev

Sweeney/Elm.

Approval

Pllr~p.l1

Option or Designator

Date 7 / ~ 1 / 7 ~

Pun.

PCOl
CHASSIS

ABay.

]

Rdr.
Mtr.

I .

LEFT

RIGHT

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _,_____ --1

Drive Pulley Position

IPAGE 1 OF

II PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

Title

All

Tech Tip
Number PCOl-TT-l
Cross Reference

PCOl PUNCH MOTOR REPLACEMENT

Processor Applicability

Author
Approval

s
11

Date

There are currently two kinds of motors in stock as replacements for
the PDP-8 Family series of High Speed Punch Assemblies.
These are:
12-05383
12-09365

GE
GE

5KPM49EGl90
(stamped: CW) old, PCOl
5KPM49EG276A (stamped: CCW) new. PC04

These motors are not interchangeable.
If the wrong one is installed
the Punch will run backwards (adding considerably to tape assembling
time).
The restrictions for use of these motors are as follows;
accompanying drawing):

(refer to

On punch assemblies where the drive pulley is at the left, motor
12-05383 is to be used.
If the drive pulley is located on the right,
then motor 12-09365 must be used.
Aside from the difference in armature rotation, motor 12-05383 has
five leads whereas motor 12-09365 has only four.
*For information purposes only. new style Punch Assemblies with the
longer input shaft (pt.#29-l988lj equal length at both ends), can
be set-up for either right or left hand drive.

Page 2

---

CPL

mamaama
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

l!ll

16 Bit

18Bit

0 J

36Bit

I I I I I I

Author
Approval W. Cummins

\Tech Tip PC02-TT-i
Number
Cross Reference
Rev

PC02 READER ADJUSTMENT
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator
PC02

Date

7-31-72

If a PC02 is found to be difficult to adjust, it may be that the
G904 Photo Amplifier has not been modified. The modification is
as follows:
1.

Change eight (8) 12K ohm resistors ("A" in drawing below) to
lOOK ohm, 1/4 W, 5% (DEC Part 113-2466).

Change nine (9) 3K and 1K ohm resistors (B) to 100 UF capacitors
(DEC 110-00016).

Change 3.9K ohm (or may be 7.5K) resistor (C) to 27K ohm, 1/4W
(DEC 113-5346).

Replace the 2.2K ohm resistor (D) with a jumper wire.

Replace the ZENER diode (E) with a 1N750A ZENER (DEC 111-00124).

Remove nine (9) .OlUF capacitors (F) from the card; there should
be only one (1) .OlUF remaining on the card, (X).

NOTE:

The G9-4 should be adjusted for a 50/50 duty cycle using
an alternate ones/zeros tape.

G904

&tB~~~ ~~~~
DB] 8 [E

IPAGE 1

II PAGE REVISION

O!B[E [E [E 0

II PUBLICATION DATE

CPL
Title

Tech Tip
Number PCO 2 -TT- 2

PC02 MOTOR EXCHANGE
Processor Applicability

~I I

I I I I

Author

Chris Groves

Approval

Bi 11 cumminSOate

Rev

Cross Reference

7 - 31-72

If a motor must be replaced in an older PC%2 reader, the newer type,
oil-damped motor will be supplied. There are differences in the
configurations of the forward bearing housing on the two motors and
different mounting plates are required. An older type motor can be
identified by the absence of the oil port screw and the presence of
wires which pass through an opening in the motor case. The newer type
motor has the oil port screw and power connections brought out to a
Deutsch connector mounted on the rear of the motor (no wires). When
a replacement for an older type motor is required, order both of the
following:
Motor #12-4735 - $298.00
Mounting plate #74-5941 - $57.00

Pge

CPL

momaama
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

001

16 Bit

0 1 18 Bit IKJI

36Bit

I I I I I I I

PC02

ITech Tip

PC02 MOTOR EXCHANGE
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Number PC02-T'I'-2

Author sweeney/Groves
Approval
.,/~'

F. Purcell
. ' ........

'- ~~

Cross Reference

Rev A
Date

7/31/73

New style Rdr. Moter
~'_" " "---- pt.# 12-04735
.....

/
Deutsch
connector

, ......1 1 - - - -

oIII n

GRN

r:~:::7
.k ~

~
\

G
CD-

----

~L~

New Single Molded Block H851

Old 2 Block H851

In the event of this problem in the field, new H851's can be obtained
from Maynard stock.
Reference this tech tip and ask for the new
single molded block. type.

Page 4

mamaama

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

[XlI

16 Bit

18 Bit

36Bit

All IBE I

Tech Tip
Number PDP8E-TT-6

Rev

Author Klotz/Moroney

I J 1I

Approval B. Cununins

PDP-BE

Title CABLINE RULES FOR I/O AND BREAK CABLES
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Cross Reference

Date

The BC08J cable (flat gray cable used with MB35 and MB360) has a
characteristic impedance of 75 ~ 7 ohms, DEC #74-5556 cable (coax)
is approximately 95 ohms while DEC #BCOBA cable (Mylar) is 90-125
ohms. Therefore in cabling a PDP-BE system if mylar is used an
impedance mismatch occurs which cannot be tolerated by peripherals.
As a result

r~lar

cannot be used in PDP-BE Systems.

Cabline rules should be as follows:
1)

Round and flat coaxial cables are electrically interchangable
and may be intermixed in a system.
If cables will be subjected
to extra ordinary abuse (such as Free Stand Cabinets) round
coax is preferred.

Mylar may not be used.

Not more than one change from gray cable (BC08J) to coax or coax
to gray cable should be made over the length of a bus.

The following cable length restrictions must be observed:
Cables
I/O
Break

PAGE5

Directed to Peripheral
50 ft max.
30 ft max.

PAGE REVISION

Through DWOBA
40 ft. max.
20 ft. max.

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title

Processor Applicability

All

Tech Tip
Number

PDP8E BOUNCE IN CONSOLE KEYS

I IBE I
I I I I

Author Jeff Blundell

Rev

PDP8E-TT-7
Cross Reference

Approval Frank purcellDate 07/31/72

Problem:

Bounce in console keys. Examine and deposit may double
step. continue may step over halts when starting test
programs.

Cause:

Some front panels may have reached the field with the
wrong capacitor in the switch filter circuit.

Check:

cl3 should be 39 MFD, bad boards have 6.8 MFD installed.
Cl3 is located on the right of the board (as seen from
the front) between the five (5) transistors and ElO
(DEC 7404) just above the aluminum supporting strip with
the lamp holes in it.
The correct capacitor has DEC part number 1¢¢¢¢76.
The following program may be of use when investigating
this type of problem.
It will cycle the teletype once
each time continue is pressed, and halt with the number
of bounces in the AC.
If the switch bounces for longer
than 85ms, more than one printer cycle will take place.
Starting Address is 3.
0/
1/

2/
Start

3/
4/
5/
6/
7/

7402
6041
5006
7200
6046
5000
7001
5000

Normal Halt. Number of bounces in AC
Flag Set?
No, Error, Add one to AC
Yes, No Bounce
Set Flag in 85 ms
Jump to Halt to wait for bounce
Add one to AC
Jump back to Halt to wait for bounce

Page -6-

mamaama
Title

All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit (]

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 I

36 Bit

18E

I I I I I

Author
Approval

Mel Arsenaul t
W Cummins

PDP-8E

Tech Tip
Number PDP8E-TT-13
Cross Reference
Rev 0

MM8-e OMNIBUS LOCATION
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Date

07/27/72

When a PDP8/E has more than on omnibus, the memories should
always be located no further back than slot 28 as long as
this agrees with the priority listing.
When a machine is
fully loaded and the memories are located in locations higher
than slot 28, the system should always be run with the cover
on to insure proper air circulation. For checkout purposes,
an external fan should be used when the cover is off.

~E13

II PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

.----

mamaama

12Bit

GJI

TitlloNT PANEL ECO' 5
Processor Applicability
All

Option or Designator

FIELD SER'nCE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I8el I I I I I

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

PDP8E-TT-14

Tech Tip
Number
Author J .. B~unde1l
Approval W. Cummins

Rev

Cross Reference

Date 6/4/73

It has been decided that a change to a r~qular t YP0 of mechanical switch
(rather than the magnet/reed cornbir.ation presently used) will be made
on the BE console board. ECO 5409057 - 0010 implements this change,
and creates etch Rev. J. The boards can be easily recognized by the
8M style rotary switch, rather than the previous plastic one. Without
dismantling the machine to look, a quick check is to see whether the
status switch will continue clicking a full revolution. Old ones will,
\:)ut new ones will not, they will come to a stop at the "State" and
"Bus" positions.

The two switches travel a (afferent number of degrees between detents
(old switch was a 36 degrees/click, new switch is 30 degrees/click)
so a new console panel (plexiglass) is also required. The new panel,
created by ECO 7408244-03, can be recognized easily by looking at the
"State" and "Bus" reference lines.
(See drawing below) it will also
be date coded later than 15 June 1973.
Stat__
e_ _ _ _

State

Switch
Knob
Bus
Bus
OLD

NEW

Note That these ECO' s are not for £ie1(1 retrofit. They are ~ anufact
uring changes only, and the purpose of this tech tip is to warn the field
of a possible logistic/compatibility problem as the newer panels start
to appear from production.

./ I

IPAGEl 3 OF II PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

Title
All

Tech Tip
Number

Use of Module Extenders
Processor Applicability

Author

,..

COl. ............. __

Approval G.Chaisson

Rev

Date 6/19/73

PDP-8E -TT-1S
Cross Reference

SF & 8M

It has been noted that on several occasions destruction has been exhibited
in 8E and 8M power supplies when using W900A (multilayer) module extender.
When inserting the w900A in Row D of the omnibus, +5 is shorted to +15.
When working on B family omnibus machines it is required to use the W9B7
or W984 module extender.
The following is a list of module extenders and their uses:
W982 - single height, normal length extender.
W984 - double height and ext~nded length extender. Two can be used
in conjunction for omnibus use.
w987 - Quad height and extended length extender.
BCOBM-OM Over the top flex print cable, connector, for use when one
module is extended and other is in omnibus. For use when
modules are connected by H8Sl connectors. Two are needed for
omnibus use.
Note:

In some cases two W9B4's can be used in place of the BCOBM-OM.
This can be done by turning the extenders upside down and placinq
the H-85l'g on the extender ends .

Title
Processor Applicability

All
~

_ _- L_ _L--L__

Rotary
may be
If new
then a

Author
__

Rev

Approval
___

G• Ch a iss 0 n

Tech Tip
Number PDP - BE-TT.-16
Cross Reference

Date 8/1 7 / 7 3

switch pin 12-10129 is no longer being manufactured.
This switch
identified through the use of glass reeds and 360 0 rotation. switch is needed and if Logistics is depleted of pin 12-10129
new front panel will have to be installed.

Page 14

mamDomo

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16 Bit

18 Bit

PDP-81
36 Bit

MEMORY CURRENT ADJUSTMENT

Title

Processor Applicability

All

I 811 I I I I I

Author

Bill Kochman

Approval

W. Cununins

Option or Designator

1Tech Tip
Number

PDP/8r TT#l

Cross Reference

Rev

Date 07/31/72

The recommended method for setting up PDP-81 memories is by
adjustment of memory current. DEC uses the following memories
with the associated optimum operating currents:
Data Products (Core Memories Ltd)
Plessey Core Stores Ltd.
Electronic t·1 emories Inc.
Data RAM Corporation
Ferroxcube Corporation

360MA
340MA
340MA
340MA
340MA

These are peak currents and are adjusted by the memory voltage
pot on the G826.
Current loops can be field installed in any 81.
1.
2.
3.

Delete 30 AWG wiring from XR/W source C39Kl
Delete 30 AWG wiring from YR/W source C39S1
Replace each of the above with 24 AWG green
leave enough slack to accommodate a current

to C37T2.
to C32T2.
wire and
probe.

MC8r does not have a separate power source, so current loops are
not necessary.
When tuning memories, use a current probe.
Ideal memory turning is strobe occurring 270 nsec after read current
begins. wich channel A, current probe on read/write current and
channel B o~ strobe, calculate the 270 nsec by measuring leading
edge to leading edge disregarding ten percent rise time.

Revised by Bill Kochman/January 1971

PAGE 1

PAGE

REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

J u 1" 1 9 7 2

PDP-8I

Title

ME~ORY

Processor Applicability
All I 8 II

Tech Tip PDP-8I TT#2
Number

STACK REPAIRS

Author NewBurv J:Fuller
Approval

Cummins

Rev

Cross Reference

Date 07/31/72

PDP-elI Mm-tORY STACK REPAIRS
fDP-S/I memory stack failures will usually display one of two
symptoms, a bit set at all locations and/or a group of addresses
with a common X or Y coordinate not accessible. An open inhibit
or sense amp line will produce a set bit at every location; these
leads are small gauge and break easily with handling. Typical ohms
readings at the W025 connector cards with the stack out of the CF are&
a)

inhibit lines - approximately 10 ohms (except BS2-BT2)

BS2-BT2 - thermister - approximately 300 olTos

sense lines - approximately 14 ohms

W025 LEAD/CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION
MFG.

SENSE Al-IP LEAD COLORS

EMI

Red/White

Ferroxcube

Multicolor/White
Purple/Red

Data-Ram

SLOT

INHIBIT LEAD COLORS

SLO'I

Black/White
AB34

Multicolor/Black
Black./Whi te

AB35

PDP-elI MEMORY DIODE LOCATION
The instructions which follow will assist in solving the problem
of a group of addresses not accessible which is usually a result
of diode failure on the stack (G6l0, G6ll, or G6l2 boar6s). e/I
Memory Diode Location and Function print #CS-30052S6-0-3 and prints
for G610, G6ll, G612, may be referenced if available, however, some
copies show diode polarities incorrectly.

Give careful attention to the diagram on page 3j the circuit
structure of the 8/1 stack is clearly presented. A complete reading
through of this procedure, with each step referenced to that
diagram is suggested and will provide the understanding necessary
for efficient repair.
2)
Locate in column 1 of the table on page 5, the Xn or Yn
failure in octal.

In column 2, you will find the decimal equivalent; this will

be indicative of the terminal nunbers which must be located on

the stack. ONCE THE DECIMAL EQUIVALEN'I IS DETERMINED, IT MUST BE
USED WITH NO FURTHER REFERmCE TO THE OCTAL VALUE. THE MARKINGS ON
THE STACK (Xn, Yn J etc.) ARE IN DECIMAL.

Page 2

momoamo
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16 Bit

0 I

PDP-8!
18 Bit

0 r

36 Bit

lSI I I I I I I

Au~or

Approval

Newbury/Fuller

w. E.

Cummins Date

PDP81 TTi2

Cross Reference

Tech Tip
Number

PDP-8/1 MEMORY STACK REPAIRS (Continued)
Processor Applicability

All

Option or Designator

Rev

7-31-72

4) For an Xn failure, this number must be interpreted to indicate
terminal Xn and its opposite terminal Xn; for Yn failure, terminals
Yn and Yn are indicated. This pair of terminals defines a
read/write current path through core. The Xn, Xn, Yn, Yn terminals
will be found by counting in DECXMAL from the marked terminals
of the stack. The G6l0A has four rows of terminalsl
a)
b)
c)
d)

marked XO - (count ~-2-4-6- etc. to 62)
marked Xl - (count 1-3-5-7- etc. to 63)
marked YO and Y62 - (count f-2-4-6 etc. to 62)
marked VI and Y63 - (count 1-3-5-7 etc. to 63)

The configuration of the G61lB is identical and its terminals
are similarly marked. It will be noted trat X and Yare on the
G6l0 and X and Yare on the G611.
\

5) From the chart on page 5 you have now identified (from column 2)
the location of the terminals of the unexposed path through core
and identification of the external pin connections will be found in
columns 3, 4, 5, and 6. Insert the data from columns 2 through 6
into the indicated boxes in the diagram on page 4 and you will
have all necessary information for determination (with an ohm
meter) of the four diodes and associated circuitry which are
suspect.
6) The next step is to determine that wiring, etch, and solder
connections are good, which will leave only the diodes in question.
A visual check of the physical arrangement of the diodes will
indicate that they are connected 1n pa:lr- with a connon "node"
terminal for each pair. As shown in the diagrams, there will be
a pair of diodes on each side of the stack. With one ohm meter
lead connected to a ~ terminal, move the other probe along
the rows of node points until continuity is observed. As this is
done on both sides of the stack, the two node points will be
located and the four diodes identified. An ohm meter reading
through core from node point to node point should be approximately
three ohms. A continuity check should now be made from each
diode out to the external pin connections OC], @[], ~, and [§[J.
7) If no fault was evident in Step 6, it is reasonable to assume
diode failure. REPLACE ALL FOUR DIODES, it is not possible to
determine reliably the failure of a single diode and replacement
of one or a par only may result in an unbalanced . cireui t .•

PAGE 3

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Jul - 1972

8) Special care must be taken to prevent pieces of wire or solder
from dropping into the cores area. Cut the leads close to the
body of the defective diode; be sure not to cut any etch beneath it.
Bend the leads up vertically from the board. Form the new diode
leads into loops which will fit snugly onto the now vertical stubs
with the diode body flush with the board. Crimp the loops for
mechanical integrity, trim excess wire, then quickly and carefully
spot solder.
DIAGRAM

OF 8/1 Mll-:ORY CURRENT

PATH

THRU CORE

NODE_

G6l0, G6ll, G612 Farity

READ

WRITE

READ

-D-

G22l

WRITE

-f-

G221

G2?8

READ CYCLE

*
Page 4

v~RITE

Tl & T2 CONDUCTIKG wHEN SELECTED

PDP8I-TT-2 (Continued)

CYCLE

-t

PDP8E-TT-2 (Continued)
Y60

"Tell

Y62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . •\' • •

Xi-:

X3/:

Y58 Y56

'--____ L..I____-.-.JII" - DIODE

•

'---------lll

JD \:

I
I
/

I
I
I
/
I
I

Blocks represent IIroups of diode pairs
Diodes ore 0672

,
,,
/

/
/

READ

....

WRITE

---

COMMON NODE

WRITE

EXAMPLE

In this diaqram,the
circuits thru rare
are Rhown with test
pointR indicated
for Y axis,

n~ta'

READ

G610

D
PAGE 5

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Jul

Title

\ Tech Tip
Number PDPSI TTI3
Cross Reference
Rev
0

TABLE OF SI STACK CONNECTOR TERMINALS
Processor Applicability
Author Newbury

All lSI

I I I I I I
1

X or Y X or Y
(OCTAL) DECIMAL
00
0
01
1
02
2
03
3
04
4
05
5
06
6
07
7

Approval W. E. Cummins

EXTERNAL PIN
CONNECTIONS
AD AC
BD BC
AD AC
BF BE
AD AC
BJ BH
AD AC
BL BK
AD AC
BN BM
AD AC
BR BP
AD AC
BT BS
AD AC
BV BU

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

AF
AF
AF
AF
AF
AF
AF
AF

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

AJ
AJ
AJ
AJ
AJ

30
31
32 '
33
34
35
36
37

24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

AL
AL
AL
AL

Page 6

AJ
AJ
AJ

AE
AE
AE
AE
AE
AE

AE
AE
AH
AH
AH

AH
AH
AH
AH
AH

AK
AK
AK
AK
AK
AK
AK

AL
AL

BD
BF
BJ
BL
BN
BR
BT
BV

BE
BH
BK
BM
BP
BS
BU

BD
BF
BJ
BL
BN
BR
BT
BV
BD
BF
BJ
BL
BN
BR
BT
BV

Date 7-31-72

1
X or Y
(OCTAL
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

2
X or Y
DECIMAL
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57

40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

BE
BH
BK
BM
BP
BS
BU

60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67

Be
BE
BH
BK
BM
BP
BS
BU

70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77

EXTERNAL PIN
CONNECTIONS
AN AM BD BC
AN AM BF BE
AN AM BJ BH
AN AM BL BK
AN AM BN BM
AN AM BR BP
AN AM BT BS
AN AM BV BU
AR
AR

AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP

BD
BF
BJ
BL
BN
BR
BT
BV

48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55

AT
AT
AT
AT
AT
AT
AT
AT

AS
AS
AS
AS
AS
AS
AS
AS

BD
BF
BJ
BL
BNBR
BT
BV

56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63

AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV

AU
AU
AU
AU
AU
AU
AU
AU

BD
BF

AR
AR

BL
BN
BR
BT
BV

BC
BE
BH
BK
BM
BP
BS
BU

BE
BH
BK
BM
BP
BS
BU

momoomo
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

18 Bit

36Bit

ITech
Tip
Number PDP8I-TT- 4

EAE ILLEGAL HICROINSTRUCTIONS
Processor Applicability

All

16 Bit

I RJ I I I I I

Author

R. Williams

Approval W. Cummins

Option or Designator
PDP-81

Rev 0
Date 7-31-72

Cross Reference

A customer recentl~ complained of difficulty in getting correct
results when normalizing certain numbers. Both Haindecs ran
so a long hard look was given to the customer's software. The
reason for the failure was the result of combining the instructions MQ LOAD and NORMALIZE.
In the SMALL COMPUTER HANDBOOK it appears that this combination
of instructions is legal, since they are executed at different
event time. The only time they are not legal is when AC bits
~ and 1 are different, which is the key to the whole problem.
As soon as the AC is loaded with this combination of bits
the signal NORM NOT is true and this disqualifies the gate that
AND's it with ID1I. \ihen this happens we never get EAE START
and never even do the NORMALIZE portion at all. This situation
causes the Microinstruction MQL-NMI to be illegal.
Title

Processor Applicability

All

I~:C!~~ PDP8I-TT-5

NOISE ON AC PANEL SWITCH - PDP-8/1

I 8J I I I I I

Author

A. Newbery

Approval

Cummins

Rev

Cross Reference

Date

Radiation from the leads of the AC panel switch on the PDP-8I
causes failures in the Memory ON/OFF Test. The problem was
especially accute on a 24~ volt machine where the usual thyrector
across the switch at the power transformer, and/or at the panel
switch (the most effective location) did not work. Two (2) ECO's
(8I-~~~27 and 704A-~~~~5) have been issued to correct this problem.
ECO 8I-~~~27 adds a switch filter and shielded cable to eliminate
radiated noise. ECO 704A-~~~~5 moves the G8l3 card off the +5 volt
breaker to a position in the power supply less susceptable to RF
noise.

PAGE7 OF

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Jul

1972

Title

Processor Applicability

All

Tech Tip
Number

WIRE RUNS FOR PDP-8I POWER SUPPLY AND CONTROL

I 8~ I I I I I

Author

C. Sweeney

Approval

Rev
Date

Cummins

PDP8I-TT_6
Cross Reference

7-31-72

.• ttl + "' ttl'" 1151

To logic rack.

orange r n IOV
r
+IOF
black
gnd.
-15F
blue
-15V
green

IISrnwhite

gnd.

115

liS

r:-

!E-

M
f-=

~
f0-

f-i

......

I:-

twisted
pair
red and white
149a •

BOTTOM
OF

BA.Y
TWO

115
115

NOTE:
obaerve correct color coding

gre.n:
whiM

-:-

slow
on
__ ..0

blaclt ---00
whit.
rad

fast on
bla~k

red

g~~

c=J
~
0

1016)

twisted Dair red and white. 14 aa.

'" hit.
.-=

832F

III-

....

~1:.
-I!i

179
TOP

OF
BAY

ONE

red
white
bl ack
re d
white

A
r-

liS
gnd.

black
white
red

~+~
com
-15

DC POWF;"R CAALF;"

Page 8

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

mamaoma
Title

All

12Bit

[31

16Bit

0 1 18Bit 0 I

36Bit

IsJ I J I I I

Author

PDP-8L

JTech Tip
Number

BUFFERING OF POWER CLEAR
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Rev

Robert Nunley

Approval W,

Cumm.i n ~

Date

PDP-8L

TTl1

Cross Reference

7-31-72

The.Powe: Clear slgnal run, generated at A25S2 is overloaded beyond
englneerlng specs.
However, because we use the level rather than
transition, this overload is acceptable in most machines.
In the
rest, due to component age and component individual characteristics,
weird unexplainable things might happen with any or all of the
following ~ymptoms.
1.

Intermittent halt when none was programmed (not to be
confused with loss of timing where run is on but there
is no control of the machine) where run is cleared as if
the halt key was actuated.

Intermittent loss of data where one -memory cell
t9 0000.

Intermittent clearing of flags and/or buffers in I/O devices
(not connected to a DMOI).

is changed

If any of these syptoms occur it is .possible that the cause is
power clear run.
If a glitch appears on power clear this
1.

the

is what can happen:

If the glitch appears before TP3 but after TP2 memory control
flops will be cleared and as a result one memory location
will be cleared, but the MB will have the correct data
this time.
TP3 will then set RUN and the program should
resume normal flow (until the zero's are reached again).
If the glitch appears after TP3 the effect is as if the
is pressed.

SS key

Depending on where the glitch occurs between MEM start
and strobe governs whether or not a read is done at all,
or a strobe is generated.

If the glitch appears in the 8L of amplitude and duration
enough to cause any of the above, it will be felt on
the I/O bus and cause the same type intermittent problems.

To buffer Power Clear:
break the Power Clear run at A27S2 but
maintain the other end (could go to D16AI or B13Rl depending on
the vintage of the 8L).
Add
A27S2
to
C27E2
Add
C27J2 to other end of wire deleted in the first step.
Add 220 ohm 1/4W pull up
T hi~

C27J2 to +5V
gives a drive of about 100 load units

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

for the Po~er Clear r un.

PUBLICATION DATE

Ju1

1972

Title

Processor Applicability
All

Tech Tip
Number PDP-8L TT 4t 2

PRINT CORRECTIONS IN 8L

I aLl 1 J I I · I

Author Robert Nunley
Approval W. Cummins

Rev
Date

Cross Reference

7-31-72

There are errors in the 8L print set not in Logic Gating but in
signal names and generation. Two of these errors have been
corrected by ECO's which will be coded lip" therefore will not
be distributed to the field.
The corrections ares
1.

Drawing No. D-BS-8L-~-2 coordinates D-7 direct clear of TSI
is not shobe. but the "0R" function of power Clear + StroDe.
The Signal comes from Inverter MIll at A35Hl. (This gating
was generated by ECO 8L-00045, ECO 8L-00059, ECO 8L-00062.)
Direct Clear of TSI should now be called IIA35Hl.1I

Drawing number D-BS-8L-~-13 coordinates B-6 generation of
IICP Power OK. II The logic works correctly but should be
drawn like this.

6eT

f)-C> .

NoN

S TOP 0 K

Title
All

f' 1'0,",,"1'..
I. N IJ E R T /

I 8LI

·1

Author

t4 q

Tech Tip
Number PDP8/L TTI3

8L ECO' 00045, 00056 ERROR
Processor Applicability

0 l<-

Art Newbury

Rev 0

Approval W. E • Cummins Date

Cross Reference

---

..... -

Another ECO wi11 be generated to effect correction of an error which
exists with respect to ECO's 8L #00045 and 00056. The schematic which is
part of the Speco for 8L 00056. shows correctly that there are three
inputs to the Ml15 which is added in slot C28. The Add/Delete sheet.
however. fails to include the wiring of the TS4 (~) input to C28Bl. The
following Add will resolve the problems
C28Bl to

Page 2

C~4Vl

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

momooma
Title

12 Bit

GJI

16 Bit

18 Bit

3 CYCLE BREAK INTERMITTENT

Processor Applicability
All 18 L I

I I I I I

Author

S. Lamotte
Approval W.E.Cummins

36Bit

Option or Designator

PDP-BL

\ Tech TiPPDP8L-TT-4
Number
Cross Reference
Rev 0
Date Aug 15

PROBLEM:

3 Cycle break devices, with cables over 15ft. in
length, have displayed a problem of intermittently
not setting "Break".
This is caused by "Ext 3 cycle L"
being nOisy at the processor.
This condition brings
up we Set, when it shouldn't be there.

FIX:

Ground "ext 3 cycle L" signal at processor,
A34V2
B34C2

This Tech Tip aaply's only to systems with 3 cycle break
options, and no 1 cycle break devices.

PAG E3 0F

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

momoomD

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

[!)l

16 Bit

0 I

Title PDP8 -M BOUNCE IN CONSOLE KEYS
Processor Applicability

All ISM I

18 Bit

0 I

36Bit

PDPS-M ·

lTech Tip
Number PDP8M-TT-l

Rev 0
J. Blundell
Approval w. Cummins
Date 06/21/72
Author

Option or Designator

Cross Reference

CAUSE:

Some console boards may have the wrong resistor installed
in the switch filter circuit.

CHECK:

ECO S4~9668-~~4 should be installed anyway, but also
check to see that RSI is 15K (brown, green, orange).
Bad boards had SlK (green, brown, orange).
The resistor is· located on the right at the top of
the board. From the right edge count in five I.C.'s
then it is the fourth (4th) resistor.
(Next component
across is another resistor, then a small capacitor).
Also note that although this resistor is called out
correctly in the parts list the circuit schematic in
the drawing set shows it as 1.SK. This is a mistake.
l.SK will not work and an ECO is in progress to correct
this drawing.

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

June 22, 1972

Title

Processor Applicability

All

lTech Tip

Procedure for Adjusting ·8/M Power Supply

I BEl I I I I I

Author

R. Boehm

Approval

Cununins

Number
Rev

Date

PDP8M-TT-2
Cross Reference

07/31/72

Due to the locations of pots for voltage adjustments (under
transformer) it is necessary to remove and dismantle power
supply. This should be done by the following procedure.
NOTE:

Turn OFF power.

1. Remove four (4) screws from underneath 8/M.
2. Slide power supply out through back of 8/M being careful
not to scrape wires and connectors.
3. Remove plug from front end of heat sink (see drawing).
4. Remove 6 screws (3 per side) that hold power supply
circuit card (see drawing).
5. Remove circuit card.

6. Replace plug that was removed in Step 3.
7. Turn on power and start program.
8. Adjust voltages (see drawing).
9. DO NOT leave power ON for more than 15 minutes with power
supply outside of 8/M. This is due to overheating.

10. Replace power supply in reverse of removal.

Procedure for Adjusting 81M Power Supply (Continued)
VOLTAGE
ADJUSTMENT

PDP8M-TT-2
VOLTAGE
ADJUSTMENTS
UNDER
TRANSFORMER

+lSV

KP
Plu

SCREWS TO BE
REMOVED IN
STEP 4

::'Fuse

Fuse _

SCREWS TO BE
REMOVED IN
STEP 4

PLUG IN STEP 3
UNDER HERE
SIDE VIEW

PLUGS TO BE
IN
STEP 3 AND
REPLACED IN
STEP 6

UJ~ ____ REMOVED

SCREWS TO BE REMOVED
IN STEP 4

Page -3-

mamaoma
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12Bit

lliJ I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

PDP-8M

Tech Tip
PROCEDURE FOR ADJUSTING eM POWER SUPPLY (Contin. ' Number PDP8M-TT- 2
Processor Applicability

All

0 I

16Bit

Option or Designator

J8M I I I I I

Author

Rev

R. Boehm

Approval

Cummins

Date

Cross Reference

07/31I72

VOLTAGE
ADJUSTMENT

VOLTAGE
ADJUSTMENTS
UNDER
TRANSFORMER

+lSV

KP
Plu

0
fj
SCREWS TO BE
REMOVED IN
STEP 4

PAGE 3

0
:='Fuse

PAGE REVISION

SCREWS TO BE
REMOVED IN
STEP 4

Fuse _

~
A

PLUG IN STEP 3
UNDER HERE

PUBLICATION DATE

October 1972

Tech Tip
Number PDP8M-'M'-2
~------~----~--~~~--~----------------------------~~~-r--~--~------~
-~'
Processor Applicability
Author R. Boehm
Rev 0
Cross Reference
All
Approval
Title

PROCEDURE FOR ADJUSTING 81M POWER SUPPLY (CON'T)

SIDE VIEW

PLUGS '1'0 BE

v~~

____ REMOVED IN

STEP 3 AND
REPLACED IN
STEP 6

SCREWS '1'0 BE REMOVED
IN STEP 4

Tech Tip
Number PDP8M-TT-3
Cross Reference
Rev 0

Title PDP8/M and 8/F PROGRAMMERS CONSOLE
All

Processor Applicability

Au~or

Approval

J. Blundell
Date

Some systems have been seen in house that go into RUN when
the examine or deposit keys are used.
Investigation of the problem suggests it is caused by haise
pickup on the wires going to the 22f timing capacitors from
the one-slots added by the ECO 5409668-004.
If you experience the problem on the field try moving the
capacitors so that they are physically positioned between
the timing resistors and the 74123 one slot itself, before
you spend any time investigating in more detail.
ECO is in progress at this time to make this an official
production change.

DIGITAL

EQUIPMENT

CORPORATION

momoamo
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

!!JI

16 Bit

18 Bit

0 I

36Bit

All IBM

I I I I J I

PDP-8M

Tech Tip
Number PDPB/M-TT-4

PDP8/M POWER SUPPLY
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Rev 0
J. Blundell
Approval F. Purcell
Date 09/14/72
Author

Cross Reference

There exists some confusion on the field with ordering spare
parts for the PDP8/M power supply due to the designation H740
used in the drawing set.
The PDP8/M SUPPLY IS NOT AN H740.
Originally, there were several flavours of the H740 (A,B,C, etc)
but this led to confusion and the letter designations were dropped
for the computer supplies (8M, 8F and 11/05).
The H740 designation has been dropped entirely.
spares you must order as follows:

If you need

Regulator Board
Transformer
Chassis
AC Harness
DC Harness
Bracket (6 required)
Screw (12 required)
Washer #6 (12 required)

54-09728 (Rev. C or later)
16-10601-02
74-09376
70-08537
70-08675
74-09375
90-06020-1
90-06633

The last three items may be important to you if you return a
regulator board with the support brackets on it, since a new
board has no brackets.
The most likely semiconductor you may need are:
15-10705
15-10706

GPS A05

Transformer

GPS ASS

Transformer

11-10714

Diode Bridge

NSS 3514

15-10928

SCR

C32AX135

15-10899

SCR

C32BX179

200V peak
inverse, 20 amp
forward current.
+5 crowbar for
Rev. C
+5 crowbar for
Rev. C

Plus, for the Rev. C or D supplies onlY1 (Rev. B uses normal
cartridge fuses).
5 amp
15 amp

pico Fuse
pico Fuse

PAGE 5

PAGE REVISION

12-05747
12-10929

PUBLICATION DATE

October 1972

Title

Wiring Error in Thermostat Circuit

All

Processor Applicability

IBM

I 8FI I I I

Author

C. Showers
Approval F. Purcell

Rev

Tech Tip
Number

PDP8/M-TT-S

Cross Reference

Date 12/1/72

PROBLEM:
Some of the early 8M's shipped (up to serial #2100 approx.)
may have had Pins 2 and 6 on PI (the plug going to the transformers)
reversed.
SYMPTOM:
110 volt machines:

Unplugging thermostat does not power down

system.
220 volt machines: Circuit breake~ may trip, or Power Supply
transformer may start smoking.

CURE:
Next call check thermostat operation and correct w1r1ng if
necessary.
(Note: 220 volt systems are okay, since the problem
is seen and corrected in production when they blow up.)
WARNING:

The exact details of the wiring error are not confirmed.
The symptoms are as stated, and it was a blO wire swap,
but it may have been two other pins. Any details either
confirming the above pin numbers, or correcting them would
be appreciated by PDP8 Product Support.
(Jeff Blundell,
21-4. )

D IGIT A L

E GU IP M E NT

page -6-

COR PORATION

- "'"

FIELD SER'nCE TECHNICAL MANUAL

momooma
Title

12 Bit

Q91

16 Bit

18 Bit

36Bit

Processor Applicability
ISH ISF

I I I

Author

,Jeff Blundell

PDPSM

FIT OF REGULATOR BOARD IN NE\<\1 SM/8F CHASSIS

All

Option or Designator

Rev

ITech Tip
Number

PDP8H-T'r -6
Cross Reference

Approval Frank PurcelPate 03/2S / 73

Star ting in May, some shipments of the new PDP8M chassis will be
made, leading to a comp1ete changeover to the new chassis by ,July
or August.
You will find it much easier to work on, especially
in the power supply area, 'Nhich is now available behind a removable
service panel at the re ar.

XFMR~

Fi\N S

However, there is one problem you
should be aware of.
When the 54-9728
regulator board is manufactured it
st.arts life as a board measuring
approximately 6~" X 12".
This should
be eventually trimmed to its final
size of 5.05" X 10.5", thus removing
the crop marks on the etch.
You will
~ind many of the boards in your spares
are oversize, with the crop marks still
vis ible at th e corners, and these will
not fit in the ne\v chassis, as dimension
I A I
in the qrawing will not -tolerate
a board wider than about 5.10.

Regulator Board
54-9728
1\ Fan
TOP VIEW

"";6

SIDE VIEW

Customers will not be impressed if
you have to file or hacksaw a new
board to fit in their machines, so
check y our boards carefully and trim
them in the office before calling on
a customer with power problems in a
new styl e 8M or SF.

.J,
Cover
Omnibus

54-9728
Board

The Field Se:::-Ilice stockr(!) am and depot repair have been wax"ned, and
will purge their stock during the coming months, but you should
check yours now, before you get: caught.
JB/mt

NOTE:

PAGE 7

See Sales Updat e Vol. 4 Number 17 for better pictures with
dimensions.

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

March 1973

Title

All

USING PROGRAMMERS CONSOLE WITH EXTENDER BOARDS
Processor Applicability
Rev
Authorpaul Gardner

ISM I

I I I

Approval

~~.c

01 'In

c'I All Date

Tech Tip
Number PDP 8M-TT-7
Cross Reference

25 Sept. 17 3

It is not necessary to remove the bezel and associated hardware
when troubleshooting in order to temporarily add a programmers
console to a PDP 8M equipped with only the operators panel.
If you add a 15" length of blue wire to pin DB2 of a W987 quad
extender, and terminate the wire with a 90-07917-0 fast on connector,
the extender can be plugged into slot 1 (in front of the M8330) with
the blue wire supplying -15 volts to enable the switches and LED's.
Not e:

The "panel lock" switch will not be operative when
working this way.

SW switch must be UP on the operators panel to allow
the programmers panel SW switch to function.

Page 8

MODEL ITR"~~RI TRANSfORWER
~~
JUMPIRS
fTIOI-iTOTIOI-iA
&57~-1 TlOI~-TI01-1 TlOI-, TO TIOI 'Z~

,.....
r-f

...

B
n:I

III
tJ

tI)

0.,

16575 - 5 TlOI·3-TI01-1 TlOI-! TOTIOI-1!A

16575- & TIOI-3-Tl01-e TlO'-1 TO TlOI·IA
TIOI-Z 10 TIOIJZA

~
PBII

~ Hfil

...

o
c

o
a.

..:I_
III c::
III 0
0 H
tI) +l
~

r-f
tJ

8
~

oa>

o
p::
CiI'O

Oa>
::s

CilC::
::z:: OM
E-4+1

c::

P:: 0

r-f
r-f

:>0 -

.t:

H::

-OUT

. +OUT

210\1
rr' Z5 (': 1
-4,-5,-7

~
.

I
- +SENSjOUTPUT

-SENSE

tJ ~
til 0

«...

~ ~

OUTPUT 8
.5V
1.5A
.5V
1.5A
15\1
\.5A
15V
1.5A
15V
1.5A
10V
1.5A
10\1
1.5A

OEC_SPEC_·
IZ·03185-1
12-03185-2
12 ·03185'3
12·03185·4
12' 3185-5
12·03185-6
12'03185 ' 71

tJ 0
P:: ril

~
....,

CI)

';:

It:-i

-5

. -a~

::z:: tJ

R6
5 II KI%FILIooI

0
II<
2N4356

.
P82

-OUT

6575 7
6575 .6
6575 5
6575 4
6575-3
6515-2
6575-1
I MODEL

3.3K 1.5K 2 .2K
3.3K I ,)K Z.Z K
3.3K 2 .7K 2.2K
2.H 2.7K 1.2K
3.3K 2.71< 2.21<
2.7K
1.51<

PB I

5601\
560.1"1.
i.2 K
i.2 K
1.2K

(pez PB I I PB2

RII

RIZ

7.87K IK
7.87K I K
7.S7K 4.64K
4.64K 4.641<
7.B7K4.64K

P-& I

Pet
RI3

MODEL
OUTPUT A
6575-1 10V, !.5A
6575- 2 15V 1.5A
6575-3 ZOV
'.5A
6575-4 15V 1.5A
16575' 5 20v 1.5A
6575-6 20V 1.5A
~ c.?0v . 1. 5A

W.t

R2 S.I.T.

...

.i :-a.

o tJ
til

-CG
~

~
.t!
..

RI6 S.I.1.

l!)

1'CZ'
I\

t.~

~
~

PB2
PARTS
LIST FOR
THIS B01.RO
P-50438-514

0
Z

~
0

PB2_4~JIO~~
-.

82 JIOI - 9
-7~5

I )

l'
l

RI3 1% FILM
150UF
SEE TABLE
CR5 25V
FOR VALUE
MH69
51<
OUTPUT 8
t VOLTAGE
CW ADJUST

S'4

--_ .. ==-=-=== .. "'I

'lr~:'ENSE""\-:"
+OUT,

0
150UFl.+ ,
RI3 I
FILM 25V
SEE TABLE
FOR VALUE
RI45K
:
OUTPUT A
I
VOLTAGE
PBI,.JIO I-6
CW ADJUST
-9 '
S
~
.. B

P8]""

III til
OM c::
IU OM

II<
PBI
PARTS LIST FOR
THIS BOARD
P-50438-513
RIZ
' -~5EE TABLE
FOR VALUE S

CR5
MH69 t'

til

R6 ,% F'LM
5.IIK

JIOI-I

MODEL~575'6

6
CR 7

I
~~
>-,
:3

It<

f--

_~ TlOI-3 -TIOI-'

.... .!

fl.
III

..J
c(

.9- ... 1

o
~
W
o
>
a:

.t:

til

::i

Z
l:

::s

III

6575

E
GI

TlOI:
T-60196 IPBIC~'

E-4
E-4

.;;;
CD

fll6 S.I.T.

, TlOI·1 10 TIOHA
6575 - Z TIOI-4-TlOI·, T.0'-2 TO TIOI·ZA

-+cz

~
::l

Fq
l'

I III

1'\

.....
....
~

10Z
-

>
W

a::
QI02

PB2 -1

t"ISC-'JJIOI-'Y

2N3232
NOTES ·
I. RESISTOR WATTAGE .5 WATT UNLlSS OTHERWI5E
Z.ALL POTENTIOMETERS ARE WIREWOUNO .
3. RESISTORS ABOVE Z WATTS ARE WIREWOUND .
4. RESISTOR TOLERANCE I (QMP :!: 10 % j WIRE WOUND
5.IF REMOTE SENSINC, 15 NOT USED
CONNECT 4 TO 5 , 6 TO 7, 8 TO 9, &.
10 TO .. .
6. S. I_T -INDICATES SEL ECT IN TEST .

I~·

«Co

I NDI(ATED.

,O%,;UNLESS OTHERWISE

~pri/)~a b~

INDICATED

p,,"m;ssion of

J)e./~t>'I)

Inc..
Ph.ilad~ IpLiA 3 3J /fA.

W
C)

Title
All
y

- ... . . ....

POWER CORD LENGTH

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

Author

H. Long

Approval D. Zereski

Rev

Tech Tip
Number PWR SUP-TT-2
0
Cross Reference

Date 9-14-72

In order to obtain U.L. Approval for our systems, we must
reduce the length of the power codr from 25 feet to 15 feet
(external to cabinet).
Henceforth, please inform customers desiring physical
installation data that the standard lenght of power cord is
fifteen (15) feet.
/mt
I

DRAWING ERRORS IN 54-09728 and 54-09728YA
/Tech Tip
SCHEMATIC AND PARTS LIST.
Number PWR SUP-TT-3
Processor Applicability
Cross Reference
Author
Rev 0
Jeff Blundell
All
II/.
Approval Frank PurcelPate 11/20/72
\SMISF 05'n~1

Title

I I

ECO 5409728-6A field retrofits Rev. B and Rev C supplies
with a new type crowbar zener if the supply has a history
of blowing fuses.
However, no drawing change is officially called out to the
schematic, since engineering feels that creating a Rev. B2
and Cl will add more confusion than we have right now.
If you have a supply that bJ.ows its +5 fuse (15 Amp pico
fuse DEC Part Number 12-10929), then implement this ECO
by changing D12 to an 11-11205 (5.7 v.olt 2% zener diode)
AND MARK UP THE SCHEMATIC AND PARTS LIST TO REFLECT THE
CHANGE~

P.S. The DEC Part Number for the other fuse (10 amp) is
12-10929-01.

Rev. A

November 1972

Page -4-

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

mamaama
Title

All

la l s

12 Bit

Gll

16 Bit

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Author
Approval

PP67

Tech Tip

PP67A/B TYPESETTING PUNCH

Option or Designator .

Number

Rev

John Gleeson
W

('llmmin~

Date

PP67-TT-l
Cross Reference

7-31-72

INTRODUCTION:
The PP67 punch is an adaptation of either the Teletype BRPEll punch
or the BRPEla punch, the BRPEll being an 8 level punch and the
BRPE18 a 6 level punch.
Both punches are originally built to operate at 50 characters/second, but are modified by DEC, to operate at
110 characters/second. The addition of a DEC assembly (part number
70-5095-control assembly) converts the punch to a PP67 (6 or 8 level
dependent on the uS'e required).
PERTINENT DOCUMENTS:
PA60, PA61, PP67 Prints; DEC-08-17TA-D, BRPE Punch Manual - 215B and
1154B.
CONTROL SWITCH:
On top of the punch is a four (4) position switch.
have the following significance:

The four positions

"AVAILABLE" - in this position switching on or off of the punch
motor is under processor control. On the side of the punch is
an adjustable micro-switch operated by an arm which rests on the
tape spool. When the spool is reduced to a certain diameter
"Tape Low"), dependent on the setting of the micro-switch, the arm
operates the micro-switch and signals a PUNCH NOT AVAILABLE
condition which can be gated into the processor using an lOT
instruction.
"STOP WHEN DONE"- in this position simulates a "TAPE LOW" condition.
Since the Typesetting Program only checks for availability before
commencing to punch, it would be possible to commence a "take" punch
out just before the tape low condition and then run out of tape if
the "take" was a long one.
If a monitor should notice that this
condition may occur shortly, he can switch the punch from "available"
to "Stop When Done" while a tape is being punched which would allow .
the "take" to be finished, but then prevent any further "takes"
from being routed to this punch.
"CONTINUOUS" - in this position the punch motor is turned ON but the
punch is inhibited from processor control, PUNCH NOT AVIALABLE
condition being signalled.
"OFF" - in this condition, the punch motor is turned OFF and the
PUNCH NOT AVAILABLE condition is signalled.

PAGE

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title

PP67A/B TYPESETTING PUNCH

I
8's

Processor Applicability

All

I I I I I I
NOTE:

Author

John Gleeson

Approval

Bill Cununins Date

Rev

Tech Tip
Number PP67-TT-I
Cross Reference
0

7-31-72

On the side of the punch is a toggle switch which
can be used to switch on the motor irrespective of
the position of the switch on top of the punch.
This switch is for maintenance purposes only and
it is recommended that the customer be advised to use switch on
top of the punch when replacing tape in the punch,
since if the switch is left in the "Available"
position, a "take" could still be routed to the
punch and lost if the customer is in the process
of changing tape.

THEORY OF OPERATION
Control Circuit (See Diagram 1)
Point A, the junction of R3, R4 is at -3V. Assuming the switch
in the "Available" position, before the "MOTOR START" signal is
sent to the punch, point B is also at -3V hence the transistor
is cut off and there is no volt drop applied across the wheelock
relay. The SCR in the motor circuit has no control voltage
applied to it and is therefore turned "off" (see note 1). When
a MOTOR START is sent to the punch, point B goes to ground, the
transistor turns on and the wheelock relay operates, closing
point D. As the first half cycle of the 110 volt supply builds
up across RI/R2 a voltage develops at point C which is applied
as a control voltage to the SCR. The SCR turns "on" and current
flows in the motor circuit driving the motor. As the first half
cycle finishes, the anode voltage of the SCR reduces to zero,
hence, the SCR turns off, but the second half cycle again develops
a control voltage at Point C hence the SCR turns on again. Thus
while the wheelock switch is operated the motor runs. When the
MOTOR START signal is removed, the transistor cuts off~ the wheelock
switch opens and hence no further control voltage can be applied to
the SCR. The SCR therefore turns off ' and remains off until the next
MOTOR START signal is applied.
While the punch has sufficient tape in it, point F is at approximately

-3.4 volts, R5 being connected in series with a 470 ohm resistor
in the interface (Diagram 2), hence in this condition PUNCH AVAILABLE
is signalled via pin 21 of the amp plug. When the TAPE LOW switch
operates, a ground is signalled. The condition is also signalled by
turning the punch switch to STOP WHEN DONE, CONTINUOUS or OFF.
In
the CONTINUOUS position, though, a ground is also applied to the
transistor, point B, hence the motor runs continuously.
Operation of the toggle switch provides a direct supply to the motor,
hence, the motor runs continuously irrespective of the position of
the punch switch.
In the "OFF" condition an SCR has a high resistance in both directions
(expamle 100,000 ohm), the gate to
Ca thOde-o;I_ Anode
cathode being equivalent to a small
diode. Providing the anode voltage
Gate
is positive with respect to the
(example
IV)
is
applied to the
cathode, if a small positive voltage
Page -2-

momoama
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16Bit

18 Bit

36Bit

Author

I I I I I I

John Gleeson

Approval W

Cumm tns

PP67

Tech Tip
Number PP67-TT-l

PP67A/B TYPESETTING PUNCHES (Continued)
Processor Applicability

All sl
8'

Option or Designator

Rev

0
Date 7-31-72

Cross Reference

gate, the forward resistance of the SCR will be greatly reduced
and current will flow through the SCR.
Once current is flowing,
the SCR can only by turned off by removing the anode voltage.
Punch Solenoids

(Dee Diagram 3)

Punch solenoids are driven from W040 solenoid drivers.
One side
of each solenoid is taken to -30V, the other side being taken to
a W040.
When a solenoid driver is selected, it lifts the discrete
solenoid feed from -30V to ground, thus energizing the punch solenoi~.
In order that the solenoid drives are only driven at the
correct point in the punch cycle, a reluctance pick-up situated on
the brass disc forward of the motor shaft provides an output which
is developed across a lK 1/4 watt resistor with an 0.01 uf capacitor
in parallel, in the punch interface, to supply a half enable input,
to gate through the respective SELECT PUNCH level.
The point in
the punch cycle at which the output from the reluctance pick-up is
provided can be varied by means of the "range-finder" (timing scale)
situated at the front of the punch above the brass disc.
This
variation is provided to compensate for lengths of cable, signal
delay, etc.
The diode across the solenoid is used for damping and the resistor
is used to limit the current through the solenoid.
Adjustments:
All mechanical adjustments for the punch are detailed in the BRPE
Technical Manual.
Once these adjustments are made correctly, two (2)
further checks need to be made:

Punching a series of alternate rubouts and tape feeds, hang a
scope probe on the feed from the solenoid driver, at the punch
solenoid, checking each solenoid in turn.
The waveform should
be as below:
The "g1inch" should be positioned at the trailing edge of
the sawtooth waveform (see below).

GND

-30V - - - - -

I.... 4.5ms ......

PAGE3

PAGE REVISION 0

+-"Glitchll
BAD

GOOD
,
PUBLICATION DATE

,July 1972

Title

Q'~

I I
I I I I I

__ .

Tech Tip
Number PP67-TT-l

PP67A/B TYPESETTING PUNCH
Processor Applicability

All

.. _ , -.

Author

J. Gleeson

Approval

Cummins

Rev

Cross Reference

Date 7-31-72

This can be achieved by slackening the two screws clamping
the punch solenoid and adjusting the solenoid until the
"glitch" is in the correct position. Make sure that when
making this adjustment, the solenoid is moved squarely in
the vertical direction.
If tilted, the armature may slip
out of the blocking pawl (see Diagram on page 13 of BRPE .
Manual Bulletin 2l5B).
If small "glitch" is unobtainable,
check the mechanical adjustments again, and, only as a
last resort, adjust the tension on the solenoid armature
spring.
2) Punching alternate lis and ~'s, slacken the screw
holding the range finder and move the slide in one direction
until punching beings to deteriorate: Note the position on
the scale, then move the slide in the opposite direction
until punching begins to deteriorate again and note the
position on the slide. Set the range-finder at the midway
point between the two positions and tighten the screw.
NOTE 1:

If the scope probe is hung on the common feed at
the solenoid, the waveform will look like

NOTE 2:

To check the feed hole solenoid, the program will
have to contain a stall so that the solenoid is
de-energized between punching of characters. The
following program would be suitable for running
while checking all solenoids:
2~~/76~4

6314
72~~
6~26
6~21
52~4
222~

SR = ~2~~
LOAD ADD
SRS-II=Punch NO
START

52~6
7~4~
52~3

Page -4-

momoamB
Title

All
HI!=:

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16 Bit

18 Bit

36Bit

PP67A/B TYPESETTING PUNCH (Continued)

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Author

J. Gleeson

Approval

('nmmin!=:

Option or Designator

PP67

tTech Tip
PP67-TT-l
Number
Cross Reference
Rev 0

Date 7-31-72

""'\I~" 6~o
s~c> ...

WK''''' "'ONt

CO....,"'N", 0",-:'

·CFr

\\ I,
F

/
/

DIAGRAM 1 - PUNCH CONTROL

PAGE 5

PAGE REVISION

(Refer to Punch Control
Schematic 7005095-0-1)

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title

All

8's

Tech Tip
Number PP67-TT-l

PP67A/B TYPESETTING PUNCH (Continued)

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Author

Rev

J. Gleeson

Approval W. Cununins

Date

Cross Reference

7-31-72

PR~\

'----- -I~"

Rt~'s.1'oQS M~ ~5Sl
b'Q.bE~ ARE

lew

'N9t

-30'1

•

'lit

l7
•

I~~--------~

~E:l\4"TIVKE:

t--....- - ,

"\Cot-uP

-..

Page -6-

mamaoma
Title

I
8'5
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

12 Bit

16 Bit

18 Bit

36Bit

PP67A/B TELETYPE PUNCH (Continued)
Processor Appl icability

I I I

J I

Author

John Gleeson

Approval

Cununins

Rev
Date

Option or Designator

PP67

\ Tech Tip PP67-TT-l
Number
Cross Reference
0

7-31-72

DIAGRAM 4 - W990/AMP PLUG INTERCONNECTIONS
W990

AMP PLUG

FUNCTION

+10 V

-ISV

GROUND

11 and 20

D
E

HOLE J1
HOLE 1

HOLE 2

FEED HOLE

HOLE 3

HOLE 4

HOLE 5

HOLE 6

HOLE 7

MOTOR START

AVAILABLE

S
T

GROUND
SELECTED TIMING

12
24

GROUND

-30V SUPPLY IN INTERFACE

PAGE 7

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title

All
8's

Tech Tip

BRPE PUNCHES (PP67A,B,C,D)

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Number PP67-TT-2

Author

John Gleeson

Approval

C'mmni ns

Rev

Cross Reference

Date 7-31-72

For correct operation at 110 characters/second on SO/60Hz systems,
the following Motor/Gear sets are used:

60 hz 115V (Motor Speed - 3600 r.p.m.)
DEC #

TTY#
Motor Pulley
Motor Drive Gear
Belt

Part of
modification
kit, TTY
# 143044

171190(44 teeth)
143052(24 teeth)
143055

The motor used is a model LMU3, with a 60 hz thermostatic
swith TTY #122249, DEC #29-11148.
b)

50 hz 115V and 230V (Motor SEeed
Motor Pulley
Motor Drive Gear
Belt

3000 r. E. m.)

147627(33 teeth)
147626(15 teeth)
195448

N/
N/A
N/A

Part of
modification
kit, TTY
#147624

The LMU3 motor is also used for 50 hz systems, the changing
of the gear set compensates for running the .motor at 5/6 the
normal speed (due to frequency).
The supply for the punch is
taken from a step-down transformer on 230V systems.
The
thermostatic switch used is a 50 hz switch TTY #193781,
DEC #29-16808.
50/60 hz motors
The LMU3 motoris asynchronous motor, no manual variation of the
speed being possible, hence, the requirement for different gear
sets for 50/60 hz operation.
Some punches, however, have been
equipped with a series governed 50/60 hz motor which can be used
on either system with only minor changes.
This is achieved by a
"Governor" on the back end of the motor which can be regulated
to compensate for different frequencies.
The motor runs at a
constant 3600 r.p.m., using a 60 hz gear set.
When the motor
is run on 50 hz, which would give a speed of 3000 r.p.m., the
"Governor" is varied by means of a screw in the "Governor".
By
using a tuning fork tuned to a motor speed of 3600 r.p.m.,bring the
motor speed back up to 3600 r.p.m.
Hence, the only change required
when switching the punch between different systems is to adjust the
"Governor" to give a speed of 3600 r.p.m.
The method is ex~la~ned in
BRPE Technical Manual Bulletin 295B pages 10, 11 of the "PrInCIples
of Operation" section and pages 6 and 7 of the "Adjustments" section.
The Thermostatic switch used, however, must be the one for the
system frequency that the punch is being run on.
TOOLS
DEC #
TTY #
Tuning Fork
29-16114
104986

Page -8-

.....,

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

mamaama
Title
All

12 Bit

GIl

16 Bit

18 Bit

368it

R I!,:I

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

ITech
Tip PP67-TT-3
Number

Author MacKenzie/Gleeson Rev
Approval W. Cununins

PP67

TUNGSTEN CARBIDE DIE BLOCK ASSEMBLIES

Option or Designator

Cross Reference

Date 7-31-72

The Maynard stockroom will soon have available both 6 and 8 level
tungsten carbide die block assemblies for the BRPE punch.
These die blocks and pins have a life of something in excess of
15 times that of the conventional die blocks. They will also
allow the user to punch other types of tape such as mylar or
aluminum with no problems. Of course, the more abrasive tapes
will increase the wear factor, but these blocks are built for
punching them.
Th~se

are highly precision devices and at no time should anyone
attempt to disassemble the die block. The vendor is the only one
capable of doing this. If any problems are encountered, simply
return it to Maynard for repair.
The die blocks are etched with digitals name-block number and pin
size. Thus you would see: Digital-6EE. The 6 means it was block
number 6. The EE is the pin size. The vendor has agreed to make
all blocks and pins the same size.
When installing these blocks do not use the punch pin retaining
plate. This is not necessary for the operation of the punch.
It is recommended that all contract machines have the tungsten
carbide die blocks installed when the conventional blocks wear out.
All old die blocks should be returned to Maynard for credit.
They will also be offered for sale to anyone interested in purchasing
them.
The part numbers and selling prices are as follows :
Description

DEC No.

Prices

6 level adv. feed w/pins
8 level ctr. feed w/pins

29-17~14
29-l7~l5
29-1742~

$ 430.00

Code pin
Feed Pin
NOTE:

PAGE 9

29-17421

450.00
18.00
30.00

THESE BLOCKS SHOULD ONLY BE INSTALLED WHEN THE OLD ONE
WEARS OUT.

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title
All
8's

TROUBLESHOOTING THE PP67A/B MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUITITech Tip
Number PP67-TT-4
Cross Reference
Processor Applicability
Rev 0
Au~o~asmussen/Tinkham

I I I I I I

Approval

Cununins

Date 7-31-72

During normal typesetting operation, the rotary switch
on the top of the punch is in the available position.
If the punch fails to work correctly, this may be an
indication of a faulty motor control circuit. This
circuit is located inside the punch cover on top of
the motor.
The PP67A/B motor control circuit is quite easy to troubleshoot with the following technical tip.
There are two main troubles that occur in the control
circuit~y.
The first is the punch motor never turns on
This is usually a bad transistor. The second trouble
is the punch motor once on, will never turn off. This is
a bad SCR in most cases. This procedure can only be used
in the case of the punch never turning on.
Using Figure 1, if the punch does not turn on properly,
you can find the trouble using a jumper wire.
1)

Turn onf/on switch (on side of punch near the motor)
to ON position.
If motor runs okay, go on to Step 2,
if not, check 110 volts in motor or ON/OFF switch.

Turn OFF/ON switch to OFF position. Turn the rotary
switch on top of punch to the continuous position
and leave it there for the remainder of this procedure.
Turn computer on (to supply -15V).
If punch runs okay
in this position, trouble is in rotary switch, cable,
or computer interface (PA60/6l or PA68A).
If the motor
did not start, go to step #3.

Using jumper wire, short across SCR (D6) (points A to B),
cathode to anode.
If motor turns on, go on to step 4,
if not, check for bad bridge return (DI-D4 or D7).

using jumper wire, short across relay contact, (points
C to D).
If motor turns on, go to step 5, if not,
check for bad SCR (gate).

using jumper wire connector from cathode of D5 (Points
E to F), to GND, if punch motor turns on, go to step 6,
if not, check for bad relay or no-15V supply.

Using jumper wire, short across transistor (Ql) emitter
to collector, (points G to H).
If punch motor turns on,
replace bad transistor or check R3R4 voltage divider.
If punch motor does not turn on, go to step #7.

Page 10

mBmDDmDrF_IE_LD~S~E~R_VI_CE~T~E~CH_N_IC~A~L~M_AN_U~AL~
12Bit

16Bit

18Bit

36Bit

PP67

TROUBLESHO?TING THE PP67A/B MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT l~ech Tip PP67-TT-4

Title

umber

(rnnT; ""or'!

All
8's

Option or Designator

Processor Applicability

I I I I i I
7)

Author

Rasmussen/Tinkham Rev

Approval W. Cummins

Date

ftf

Cross Reference

7-31-72

Using jumper wire, connect the emitter of the transistor to
ground (points G to F).
If the punch turns on, check for
a broken wire from the emitter to the rotary switch, a broken
ground connection to the rotary switch, or a faulty rotary
switch.
If the punch does not turn on, the problem is not
within the punch motor control circuit.

One other problem found in the punch control circuit is resistors
Rl and R2 (47 ohm) burnt.
This was caused by the SCR having an
open cathode. When the relay contact closed, 110 volts is dropped
ac.ross Rl and R2 and if SCR fails to fire, Rl and R2 will burn up.
For replacement part numbers for any of the above mentioned items,
refer to punch control circuit schematics D-CS-7005095-0-1, Revision

PAGEll

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title

~gR~rfiuU~ TING THE PP67A/B MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT

Tech Tip

Number PP67-TT-4

OTOR

110 Volt
Supply

ON/OFF
SWITCH

•
DIODE
BRIDGE

AVAILABLE

STOP WHEN DON~
CONTINUOUS
OFF

TAPE
LOW

SCR C20B
R5
l.SK

MOTOR
START

-lSV

...

RELAY

---+--+......... ........_ - - - - -..~~-----___4~
AMP
PLUG
FIGURE 1

SCR

DIODE
PACK

Page -12

mamaamo
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

ooT

16 Bit

PP8I
18 Bit

36 Bit

Tech Tip PP8I-TT-1
Number
Cross Reference
0

PP81 SYNCRONIZATION PROBLEMS
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Author Art Fuller

Rev

Approval w. Cummins
Date 7-31-72
\
\
If erratic puncn operation suggests the possibility of the logic for
syncronization being at fault, the following procedure will guide you
in making a determination. The procedure for mechanical syncronization
in the Roytron maintenance manual may also be helpful.

All lSI \

Signal SYNC PUN at pin F on the W033 connector at the rear of the punch
(or H28V2 - M7l0) should hold at +2 volts with punch power off. With
power on, the signal should be as shown below •
.....- - - 9.5 m sec. - - -......~1'----9.5 m sec ---~.
+4 VOLTS _ _

+2 VOLTS _ _

GROUND __

If this signal is not as described, the following steps are suggested.

1) Check to see that +5 volts is present at pin V of the W033 connector
at the rear of the punch.
2) Disconnect the w033 connector. There are two identical coils on the
front left of the punch which should be checked; readings of about
500 ohms should be obtained from both pin F to V and pin F to ground.
+5 VOLTS

PIN V

RED

PIN F

SYNC PUN

SYNC
COIL

GENERATOR
COIL

3) The gap between the coil head and core wheel should be checked; a

piece of paper tape may be used as a reasonable gauge for checking
the clearance.

continued on
page 6

PAGE 1

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title

Processor Applicability

All

Tech Tip

PPBI SYNCRONIZATION PROBLEMS (Continued)

I 8 II I I I I I

Author Art Fuller
Approval w. Cwmnins

Number

Rev
Date

PP8I-TT-l
Cross Reference

7-31-72

4) If the previous steps fail to suggest a solution, it is possible that
the coil core may have become demagnetized. Proceed as followsl
a) Turn off all power.
b) Remove red wire from pin V and black wire from pin F.
c) Note that PDP-B and PDP-BI require opposite polarization in this
step: For PDP-BI, make temporary connections of the red wire to
ground, pin C and the black wire to -30 volts, pin D. For PDP-a,
make temporary connections of the black wire to ground, pin C'
and the red wire to -30 volts, pin D.
d) Bring up power momentarily, t 'hen shut down; current flow thru the
coil will remagnetize the core.
e) The 30 volt circuit does not include a bleeder reSistor; as a
result a charge will remain on the 30 volt line for some time. To
avoid the possibility of discharging it thru the logic, it is
suggested that the 30 volt supply be disconnected from the PCBl
at the terminal strip on the rear panel before proceeding.
f) The coil leads can now be removed from terminals C and 0 and
returned to their original positions, red to V and black to F.
g) Reconnect the 30 volt supply lead to the rear of the PCBI and
recheCk the SYNC PUN output again.
h) If the SYNC PUN signal remains below an acceptable level it may be
that the coil assembly is defective. If placing a screwdriver
blade against the exposed core end causes a significant rise in
output level, it is an indication that the assembly should be
replaced.
Arthur Fuller

Page 2

momDDma

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16 Bit

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

Option or Designator
PR81

Tech Tip
PR81 Steps with Power Up and Start
Number PR8I-TT-l
Cross Reference
Processor Applicability
Rev 0
Author
Chuck Sweeney
All I 811
Approval w r".".,,;"'I.!=: Date 7-31-72

Title

I I I I I

The logic by which tape is moved one character position during power
up and by START is explained as follows. The circuit design of the
A and B flip-flops is such that they come up in the' state. This
condition generates STOP ENABLE which will set the ENABLE flip-flop
because STOP COMPLETE is present. STOP COMPLETE is generated 40 msec
after the INITIALIZE pluse which zeros the ENABLE flip-flop. ENABLE
(1) qualified the clock which pulses a cycle of the A & B flip flops
in the usual manner to step a character which is read into the reader
buffer but not into the AC.
Title

Processor Applicability

All

M7l5 and G90S Adjustments PRSI (not PC04)

I 8~ I I I I I

Rev

Author

C. Sweeney
Approval B. Cummins

Date

Tech Tip PR8I-TT-2
Number
Cross Reference
0

7-31-72

With the reader FEED switch depressed, pulses at H27U2 should be at
intervals of 1.67 msec. The lower pot on the M7l5 should be adjusted
for correction.
Load the following test program:
6,14

52,4

7"2

6~11
52~2

,,~~

7004

22,7

7~'1
7~'3

52~1

With the program running and no tape in the reader, check to see that
the sprocket wheel is not stepping. If it is stepping that indicates the
probability that the feed hole gain of the G908 is set too low; a clockwise adjustment of the pot on the G908 should correct this. Insert a
ones/zeros tape in the reader. If the reader does not move tape, that
indicates the probability that the feed hole gain of the G908 is set too
high; a computer-clockwise adjustment of the pot on the G908 should correct
this. The proper adjustment for that pot is midway between the two
failure conditions.
Once the G908 is adjusted correctly the M7l5 adjustment can be continued.
With the program running, the required signal at H27U2 is 3.5 msec between
the first and second pulses in the group of three. The upper pot on the
M7l5 should be adjusted for correction.

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Jul

1972

Processor Applicability

All

PR8I HIGH SPEED READER TEST ERRORS

Title

lSI

I I I I J I

Au~or

Tech Tip
Number

C. Sweeney

Approval

W. Cummins

0
7-31-72

Rev
Date

PRBI-TT-3
Cross Reference
-----...".

Maindec 08-D2FC-Part 2 will fail with an indication of error when
actually there is none. The constant, M377, in location ,,2, should
be changed to ,,_, to eliminate the problem.
If the system includes an AXOB option, there will be an additional
problem in that the test includes an AXOB lOT instruction 6377 at
location _3_5. The contents of location ,3,5 should be an NOP-7",.
The later program 08-D2GC has eliminated this problem,

Processor Applicability
All

ITech Tip
Number

PRSI MODULE AND MAINDEC REVISIONS

Title

181 I I I I I I

Rev 0
Chuck Sweeney
Approval W. Cummins
Date 7-31-72
Au~r

PRBI-TT-4
Cross Reference

EC08I-00008 documents the use of specific revision M705 and M715
modules in the PR8I. There are only two combinations which
are acceptable.
M705
Revision

M715
Revision

ECO 81-00008

Maindec

Not installed

08-D2FC

Installed

08-D2GC

Page 2

mamaama
Title

12 Bit

(ill

16 Bit

18 Bit

36 Bit

Option or Designator
PR68

-1 Tech TiPPR6 8A-TT-l

G900 PRO BL D 1S

~
8'

All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

Number

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Author

Approval W.
.. - . . _. -

Oeb a rge
E.

Rev

Cummins Date

.~ ---

Cross Reference

7-31-72...

Revision C boards, and some reV1S1on B, have a basic defect in that
the trim pot is wired into the circuit incorrectly. These problems
were identified by Tom Gibson and Norm Howe and are detailed in the
schematic below.

-------------r---------------......,...-

-15

--,---------------------------~--- - 15

180

_ _.l.---L____...I-__-...JL--____-...JL--__~__

CORRECT

GND.

__....L..____' - -__--L_ _ _ _...L-_ _ _ _ _....L..-_--'_

INCORRECT CIRCUIT

CIRCUIT

G900 - REV B

Reworking of revision C boards involves the cutting of etch (Fig. 1)
and the installation of jumpers (Fig. 2).
Revision B boards can be repaired by simply connecting the trim pot
leads to the proper split lug (see Fig. 3 next page).

G900

Etch side

FIGURE 2

FIGURE I

/
PAGE

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Jul

1972

GND.

Title

_ _ _

___

JTech-Tip PR68 -TT-1

G900 PROBLEMS (CONTINUED)
Processor Applicability

All

-- -

8'S

PI'IOTO CELL LEADS

I I
I

Author

D. Debarge

Approval

W. E. Cumm i n !Date

G900 INSTALLED
IN PR68 SLOT

DATA

Rev

Cross Reference

7-31-72

··
·
I
I

CHANNEL

7
I

G900 INPUT PIN

Number

, . U

feed

IJ
-5

(/I

BIAS RESISTOR
- OHMS-

~O'~~B"b~~Efu~ ~
Ik

R23

Each

bOK

represents a resistor

A = I!SOO ohm.
B = 10k ohm.

G900

,-_T_R_IM_P_O_T_--,I

:~
GREEN

RED

FIGURE

Revision F boards will be released shortly and will incorporate the
final scheme of compensating bias resistors. The resistor scheme (which
is shown above) should be implemented in the field on all older boards.
Revision A
B

All bias resistors 10K ohms.
All bias resistors changed except R23 at input pin U.
Some defective because of trim pot miswiring (see over).
C
All were defective - trim pot miswired - can be reworked
as detailed on previous page)
D
Correction to revision C but made improperly - not released.
E - Revision D corrected - R23 still 10K.
F
All known problems corrected - R23 changed to 15K.

Page -2-

mamODma
8'

12 Bit

SET-UP PROCEDURE

Title

All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

16Bit

18 Bit

I I I I I I

36Bit

PR68

\ Tech Tip PAGS -TT-2
Number
Cross Reference
0

Author

J. Gleeson

Approval

W.E.Cummins Date 7-31-72

Rev

I~Nb

kt Gi..e

kDJ
~ll).

(CONTINUED)

Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

I
I

,
I

I
I

~t\.)

I~ .DeE

~o~E

Section 4
Paqe 4

(continued)

rAb'CS~

f'AbO~

Repeat for the other pot using Data Hole 3 (A28J; PA60A or B14P;
PA68A).
A comparison between Data Hole 0 and Data Hole 5 (A28V;
PA60A or B13V; PA68A) may be made to check for skew.
When the margins have been set up satisfactorily, using a short
piece of tape check that the control sees "out of tape" as the
tape runs out.
Slight re-adjustment of the G900 may be necessary
but do not move too far from the 40/60 setting if method 1 used.
Recheck the adjustments if this cannot be obtained .
Also check
that the tape switch is wired to simulate the "out of tape" condition, by lifting the arm up.
MIXED TAPE LEVEL SYSTEMS
Some systems have the requirement to be able to read both 6 and 8
level tape.
Where both tapes are advanced feed hole, the procedure
is the same as described above except that the check for skew should
be made between hole 0 and hole 7 (A27P; PA60A or B13J; PA68A).
Where the 8 level tape is center feed hole, it has been found to be
better, where possible, to reserve a reader for reading 8 level tape
only.
If this is not practical, the readers should be set up as for
6 level tape and then marginal re-adjustment of the sprocket wheel
made, together with re-margining of the pots, to accommodate both tapes.
When all readers have been set up satisfactorily, do a final check,
using either the Typesetting Configuration Maindec 08-D2HB or the
TCSE.

PAGE

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE July 1972

---

Title

SET-UP PROCEDURE (CONTINUED)
Processor Applicability

All
H'S"

Author

I I I I I I

J. Gleeson

Approval

IS-n.

Tech Tipp-~~e -TT-2
Number
Cross Reference
0

Rev

W.E.Cummins Date 7-31-72

2~w

MO'l1\ 'LE C,LA fI\P
CONIIIEC-roP..

DIAGRAM 1

J-

[

,ME

-,,
zp
.J

Ce.Ll..

e.L()c..~

DIAGRAM 2

\.\GH1' ~'W\ --'-'0...1

~~~--~~-----------=~~

DIAGRAM 3

Page -6-

",o~'b-oowN WE'C\Wr
tQ L~ "E.L

......... if\t'E

c..u IbE

momaoma

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

~~~~~------~~------~-r------~PR68
12 Bit [i]
16 Bit
18 Bit
36 Bit

SET-UP PROCEDURE FOR THE PR68A TYPESETTING READER Tech Tip PR68 -TT-2

Title

Number

Processor Applicability
All

Option or Designator

8'S

I I I I I I

Cross Reference

Rev 0

Author

J. Gleeson

Approval

W. E. Cumm i n $.)ate 7-31-72

Before commencing the set-up procedure check that the G900 modules
in the reader are modified to revision F level as detailed in TYPESETTING
TECH MANUAL SECTION 14, Pages 1 and 2.
If they are not, the G900's
must be brought up to date before attempting any adjustments.
STATIC ADJUSTMENTS
1.
Diagram I
- Measure the voltage across the reader lamp.
This
should be 10V.
If it is not, slacken the clamp
connector on the 7.5 ohm resistor in the reader and
move the clamp until 10V is obtained. Tighten the
clamp, then recheck voltage.
If cables are over
150' the -15 volt and ground lines must have dual
wires in the cable.
2.

Diagram II

- Release the screw holding the 6 level guide and if
the reader is to be used for 8 level, drop the guide
to its lowest position and tighten the screw.
If
the reader is to be used for 6 level, move the guide
up until the guide surface is flush with the surface
of the cell block.
Tighten the screw.
Take a short piece of tape, 6 or 8 level appropriate
to the reader use, and place it in the reader.
Adjust
the cell block, with the two screws shown, so that
the tape lies flat across the sprocket wheel and the
~ ell block surface.
Tighten the screws.
Place 3 thicknesses of tape between the tape bed
and tape hold-down weight and tighten the screw that
connects it to the back plate. The weight should
now be secured.

Diagram III - Rotate the lamp so that the filament produces an
even beam of light and casts no shadow, from the
bulb's seam, over the apertures.
(Note:
inspect
the bulb for filament sag, if present replace the
bulb}. Adjust the condensing lens so that the flat
portion is parallel with the cell block.
Loosen
the two set screws on the bracket assembly and move
it forward or backward to make the light beam cut
across the right hand edge of the apertures.

PAGE

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Ju1

1972

- ~

ITe~hTiP

~ -

SET-UP PROCEDURE (CONTINUED)

Title

All

- - ..-

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Diagram IV

Diagram V

Author
Approval

PR68 -TT-2

Number

J. Gleeson

Rev

Cross Reference

W.E.Cummins Date 7-31-72

Take a short piece of tape with a rub-out code perforated about half way along the tape and place it
in the reader.
Release the two allen set screws
in the sprocket wheel and, holding the tape taut
across the cell block and wheel, move the sprocket
wheel laterally so that the holes in the tape are
centered over the photo cell apertures.
Be sure
that the tape is not curled up against the back plate.
Partially tighten one of the screws.
- Select the required reader via thePA60 control by
loading the following porgram:

7604 LAS
6312 RSC
7402 HLT

Load ADD 0, set the reader number in SR bits 8-11,
then press START .
Release the screw in the wheel and keeping the
lateral position fixed, rotate the wheel axially
until the leading edge of the tape holes is just
touching the right hand edge of the light beam.
Tighten the allen set screws in the wheel.
6.

Diagram VI

- Put the spring arm down and ch~ck that the straight
part of the fingers are horizontal and just touching
the wheel.
Careful use of long-nosed pliers may be
used to achieve this.
Also check from above that
the fingers are centered over the sprockets on the
whee 1.

RUNNING ADJUSTMENTS
When all preliminary adjustments have been made, the reader should
be margined. There are two methods of doing this:
1)

Using a short program (or Typeset Configuration Test Program 10)
read a lIs and 0's tape loop.
Observe the AC for data and swing
the pots on the G900's from the extreme of picking up bits to the
extreme of losing bits, counting the number of full turns.
Set
the pots at 40% back from the point of picking up; i.e., if 10
turns obtained, set the pot 4 turns from picking up.
It is likely
that when checking bits 1, 2, 3, 4, the feed hole will be picked
up first, causing the program to hang up on the flag.
This is
the extreme of that direction.
A minimum of 6 turns should be
obtained on both pots.

Reading a l's and 0's loop, and using a scope, hang one probe
on A29J; PA60A (hole 0) or BISP (PA68A) and the other probe on
A24J(PA60A), B12E (PA68A) and observe the relationship between
the data and "strobe". Adjust the pot and if necessary the
wheel to obtain timing as shown below.

Page -4-

"." '"

mamaoma
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

18Bit

36 Bit

I I I I I I

PR68

SET-UP PROCEDURE (CONTINUED)
Processor Applicability

All .1
8'S

16Bit

Option or Designator

Author

J . Gleeson

Approval

W. E .Cummins

Rev

Date

Tech Tip PR68 -TT-2
Number
Cross Reference
0

7-31-72

DIAGRAM 4
o

LlfoHi lIIeft ""

-0- - - -

DIAGRAM 5

•

DIAGRAM 6
PAGE

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title

READER INTERRUPT WITH CSI
Processor Applicability

All

8's

I I
I I I I I

Tech Tip
Number

Rev ,
0
P. Bezeredi
Approval W. E. Cumminpate 7-31-72
Author

PR6B-TT-3
Cross Reference

On CSI Systems, the reader interrupt has been disabled
in order for the CSI Program to run. On most systems
CSI does this by taping a pin on the module which
generates INTER REO for the reader, but on some systems
this is hard wired in. This tape or wire must be
removed in order that the System Exerciser and all DEC
MAINdecs can be run.

Page -8-

momODma
Title

All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

(]

16Bit

18 Bit

36Bit

Author

I I I I I I

PR68

lTech Tip PR68-TT-4
Number

PR68A, PR68B COVER BOX PROBLEM
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Rev

P.Tinkham

Approval W.E.Cummins

Date

Cross Reference

7-31-72

PROBLEM:

Improper mounting of the top cover box on PR68A and
PR68B readers.
Insufficient clearance between the cover
box and the mounting plate for the Osram Bulb may cause
a short circuit from -IS volts to ground.
The threaded
standoffs used to mount the cover box are not of correct
lengths.
Specified length of these standoffs is 1 3/8
inches.
However, it has been discovered their actual
length varies from 1 5/16 inches to 1 3/8 inches.

SOLUTION:

Increase the length of the threaded standoffs to achieve
a reasonable amount of clearance between the cover box
and the Osram Bulb mounting plate.
There are two
suitable methods of resolving the problem.
1)

Add washers as necessary behind the standoffs
to effectively increase their length.

Replace the existing standoffs with same of correct
length (1 3/8 inches).

PARTS LIST
Part No.
None

Item No.
27

Drawing No.
MA-E-PR68A-O-l

MA-E-PR68A-O-l

NOne

MA-E-PR68A-O-l

None

NOTE:

Eith?l Washer

PAGE

Description
Plain Washer(Medium)
5/16 0.0 X 5/32 1.0
External Tooth Lock
Washer, #6 Hole Set
Threaded Standoff #6
32 X 1 3/8 Lg

(item 27 or 28) may be used.

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title

I
a's
All

lTech Tip
Num ber PR68-TT-S
Cross Reference
Rev
0

SET UP PROCEDURE FOR THE PR68B READER
Processor Applicability

Author

I I I I I I

John Gleeson
Date 7-31-72
Approval w. Cummins

All adjustments for the PR68B reader are the same as for the PR68A
with the exception of the following:
1)

Using a piece of tape with a rub-out perforated in it, adjust
the sprocket wheel axially so that the Data Holes on tape are
positioned directly over the photo cell apertures, then move
marginally either side to obtain best margins by either method
described in the PA68A Tech Tip. The reason for the difference
in Data Hole positioning as compared to the PR68A is that in
positive logic interfaces the strobe occurs earlier.

In the PR68B there is only one amplifier module, a G908.

Using the scope method for margining, the points to look at are:
Hole
PA68F
PA63

BllE2
B27E2

I
I

Hole 5

Hole 7

Strobe

BUJ 1

BUC 1
B28Cl

B13Ul
C8Ul

B28Jl

tt o\.E

Ne "o\.£

NO. ~CI\.C.

I
~",l:>

_ _ _ _'"

~-'b - _ . . . I

Page -10-

mamaama r-F__IE_LD--;:::::S::;"IE_RV_IC_E-=T:-rEC_H_NI_CA=-L-r-M_AN_U_AL---I
12 Bit
Title

16 Bit

18 Bit

36 Bit

Processor Applicability

I I I I
8's
I I I

PR68

G930 - USED IN PR68D READER

All

Option or Designator

Author

J. Gleeson

Approval

Cummins

Rev
Date

Tech Tip
Number PR68-TT-6
Cross Reference
0

7-31-72

The PA63 provides a user with a "NON-TORN-TAPE-ALLOTTING" system
(NTTA) by the simple addition of one G930 module to each reader
in the system. The customer's use of this option is the same as
described in the PA60C Tech Tip so this description will be confined to the logic theory.
Theory of Operation - See Diagram 1
Initial Conditions:
a)

Point "A" is HIGH.

Point "c" is HIGH, therefore, "0" is LOW, turning on transistor
Q2 and lighting the lamp.

Point "0" being LOW, point "F" is HIGH, turning on transistor
Ql and hence holding point "G" at GND.

The flip flop is in the "0" state, hence point "B" is LOW.

Point "G" being "LOW", the clock input to the flip flop is HIGH.

Operation:

When the switch on the reader is pressed, a LOW is applied to
points "A" and "C".

Point "0" goes HIGH, cutting off transistor Q2, thus extinguishing
the lamp.

Point "F" goes low, cutting off transistor Ql and allowing point
"G" (Bus) to follow the level of SEL RDR XX Hi the bus being tied
to this level in the PA63 interface. Assuming this reader not
program selected at this stage, point "G" remains LOW.

Point "A" provides a LOW through chips El and E2 at point "C" which
is fed back to point A thus "remembering" the operation of the
switch.

When this. reader is program selected, point "G" goes "High" but
has no effect on the flip flop since the clock input "H" is
negative going. The tape in this reader is then processed.

When tape processing has been completed, the program deselects the
reader, thus point "G" goes LOW. This provides a positive going
clock pulse to the flip flop setting .it to the "1" state.

Point "B" goes HIGH, point "C" therefore goes HIGH and point "0"

LOW.

Q2 is turned on, lighting the lamp and Ql is turn on

point "G" to ground.
PAGE REVISION
0
PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title

All

8's

lTech
Tip
Number

G930 - USED IN PR68D READER (Continued)
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I
8)

Author

Rev

J. Gleeson

Approval W

Cummi n!':!

Date

0
7-31-72

PR68-TT-6
Cross Reference

Point "D" going LOW resets the flip flop at point "J" and
point "c" being HIGH provides a feedback to point "A" to
re-establish initial conditions.

Inhibit Facility:
When installed, this option can be disabled at any time by throwing
a switch, mounted in the PA63, to the "OFF" position.
PR68DA Reader:
When this option is not installed, the readers have the designation
PR68DA. The following modifications are made to the reader.
(See
print PR68-D-2):
1)

Momentary switch replaced with ON/OFF switch.

56 OHM resistor added from B04F2 to A04V1.

Also the jumper providing +5V to the NTTA switch in the PA63 is
disconnected from the +SV line and taped down in the power supply.
If this option is field fitted, the switch must be changed: The
resistor removed: a G930 inserted in slot B04 in each reader in
the system. Also the NTTA switch in the PA63 must be rewired to
+5V.
f'l~
~---

~-------------- -I$~

L---~--+-------~~~----------4---J---~-----r--------L---~wb

Pin F = input from reader switch
Pin H = output to indicator lamp
Pin J, Bus = tied to SEL RDR XX H in PA63

Page -12-

DIAGRAM 1 - THEORY OF OPERATION

(Refer to G930 schematic
for component values, etc.)

mamaama
Title
All

8'5

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12Bit ~

16Bit

0 I

BCOlH READER CABLE MISWIRED
Processor Applicability
Author
Approval

I I I I I I

18Bit

0 1

36Bit

PR68

ITech Tip
Number PR68-TT-7
Cross Reference
Rev 0

J. Gleeson
W. Cummins

Option or Designator

Date 7-31-72

There is a possibility that some BCOlH cables used with PR68D/DA
Readers may have reached the Field incorrectly wired. There is
an 0.1 MFD 100 volt capacitor on the M908 connector at the control
end of the cable. This capacitor is supposed to be wired from
SEL RDR XXH (Pin V1) to ground (pin Tl). However, some cables
have been found with this capacitor errantly wired from SEL RED XXH.
(pin VI) to +30 volts (Pin 51 or Ul). On systems with PR68D Readers
(NTTA) the problem may show up as an inability to select a reader
even after repeated attempts at pressing the reader select switch.
On systems with PR68D readers (Non NTTA) the problem may show up as
intermittent reader selection errors caused by the noise induced
from +30 volt line. ' The cure is to simply rewire the capacitor
correctly from Pin VI to pin T1. It is recommended that all BCOlH
reader cables be checked and corrected, if necessary.
Title
All
8's

ITech Tip
CLARIFICATION AND CORRECTION OF TYPESETTING
Number PR68-TT-8
ECO's
Processor Applicability
Cross Reference
Rev
Author
a
F. Miller
Approval W. Cummins Date 7-31-72

I I I I I I
PA63-00012:
1)
2)

Do not delete B28Dl to B28F2.
If not already present, add the following to 6/8 level switch.
a) Add 122 AWG 51 -C
(red/wht) to B28Dl
b) Add #22 AWG 51 -N/O (brn/wht) to C08C2
c) Add #22 AWG 51 -N/C (blu/wht) to B2lVl

PR68D-00015A:

(PR6BD-00015A takes precedence over PR6BO-0001S)

Item 16 and 21, sheet 3 of 6 are for PR68D only
(Non-NTTA)
1)

Add #22 AWG (gry/blk) wire between rocker switch, N/C position
and A2 on W023A connector card in slot BOI.

Remove wire jumper on A2 W023A connector card and add lK 1/4W
resistor.
Again, this is only for PR68DA Readers.

PAGE13

PAGE REVISION a

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title 91a~!fica~fon

[con :inu4'!n

All

8'5

Tech Tip
Number

and Correction of Typesetting ECO's

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Author

F. Miller

Approval

Cummins

Rev
Date

PR68-TT-8
Cross Reference

7-31-72

Possible M710 Problems:
When punch is activated and the 5 second delay times out, the first
character is punched. The 5 second delay may be cleared again,
punching a character every 5 seconds.
This is caused by etch
layout on M710 Rev. F.
Field Solution:
Add .01 mfd/.OOV cap to A07 V2 to gnd on PA68F and A30 V2 to gnd
on PA63.
ECO's are being prepared to cover the deficient areas.

Title

All

8's

Tech Tip

INFORMATION: LENS FOR PC04/PR6BD/DA READERS

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Author

P. Bezeredi

Approval

Cummins

Number

Rev
Date

PR68-TT- 9
Cross Reference

7-31-72

Problem:
The lens for the PC04 Reader (1 1/16 inches long) was
assigned that same part number (74-4989) as the lens
for the PR68 Typesetting Reader (1 3/16 inches long).
Text:
Each lens now has its own part number.

numbers when ordering:

Part

74-4989-$J
74-4989-1
NOTE:

Description
Lens, 1 1/16in. long
Lens, 1 3/16in. long

Use the following
Used On
PC04
PR68 (A,B,C,D,DA)

This Tech Tip replaces Tech Tip labeled "Short
Lens on PR68A/PR68B" Section 4, Page 14, which
is obsolete.

Page -14-

momaama
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16Bit

18 Bit

36Bit

Processor Applicability

I I I I I

PR68
Tech Tip
Number P R68 - TT - 1 0

PR68A MODIFICATION

All ;1
8'5

Option or Designator

Author R.
Approval F.

B0 eh m
Miller

Rev

Cross Reference

Date 10/1/73

Phenolic Block (Photocell Assy)P/N2~15961 can no longer be ordered.
If a new photo cell assembly is needed order Kit PIN 29-20672.
The
new photocell assembly requires modification of the PR68A interface
cable by replacing the reader end with a modified M978B or M9780
module.
This module is supplied with the kit which also includes
the new photocell assembly PIN 70-09382, cable clamps and hardware,
and necessary procedures and specifications.
THIS IS A RETROFIT
but should only be replaced when a new photocell is needed, or when
system is due a P.M.
.
If a modified PR68A is in need of repair you only need to order the
part that is bad, not another kit.
All part numbers are included with
specifications in the kit.
An ECO to the PR68 is forthcoming on this
change.

II PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

mDmDDmD

12Bit

ex I

16Bit

0 I

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

Processor Applicability

PT08

Tech Tip
Number

Author
Approval

Option or Designator

PT08 - OPTION SELECTION JUMPERS

Title
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

Cross Reference

Rev

Cummins

Date

PT08-TT-l

7-31-72

Diagrams on the three pages that folloK describe options and set up of
the W706 modules used in PT08's .
Special Notes:
1.

For best results the W706 should be jumpered for
a 1/2 stop
bit less than the transmitting device is transmitting.
This
allows a half bit time to get back in sync if there is a slight
timing mis-match between the PT08's clock and the device sending
to the W706.

The 'NO RUN OPEN' option may be used in special applications
where it is not desirable to get continual flag interrupts
if the W706's input is open.
(TTY unplugged, VT06 with power
off, etc.)
The option prevents the receiver from starting
to receive a second character until the stop bit (mark) has
been received from the first character.
The 'NO RUN OPEN'
option requires at least 1.5 stop bits to function properly.

Another special application feature is available on W706's
that have etch revision D.
Clearing the receive flag may be
accomplished by either lOP2 or IOP4.
The factory standard
is IOP2.

In all cases the W707 must be jumpered for the full
stop bits required by the receiving device.

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

number of

July 1972

Title
All

\ Tech Tip

PTOa - OPTION SELECTION JUMPERS
Processor Applicability

I 8 I aslaIlaL\ I I

Author

Robert Shelley

Rev

Number
0

Approval Bill Cummins Date 7-31-72

W707 TRANSMITTER

c-f4

,•
,,
I

(

5 BIT CODE:
8 BIT CODE:

Insert J4; Remove J5
Insert J5; Remove J4

1.0 STOP BIT: INSERT J2, J3, J6; REMOVE J1
1.5 STOP BITS:INSERT J6; REMOVE J1, J2, J3
2.0 STOP BITS: INSERT J1; REMOVE J2; J3, J6

Page 2

PT08-TT-1
Cross Reference

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit
Title
All

16Bit

18Bit

36Bit

I a I a S\ 8 II aLI I I

PT08

0
Tech Tip
Number

PT08 - OPTION SELECTION JUMPERS
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Author

Bob Shelley

Approval

Bill Cununins Date 7-31-72

\\706 ETCH REV.

CS REV.

Cross Reference

Rev

PT08-TT-1

--wr 0 0

~
I

5 B IT COD E:
8 BIT CODE:

I~ SERT J 3, J 4;
I~S E RT J1, J2;

RnlOVE J 1, J 2
RHlO\,E J3, J4

~O RU~ OPEN:
INSERT J6, J9; REMOVE J5, J7, J8
0.5 STOP BITS: Set up jumpers for 1.0 stop bits a nd
insert a jumper between pins 9 and 10 of E5.
1 . 0 S TOP BIT S: INS E RT J 5 and J 6; REM 0 V E J 7, J 8, J 9
1.5 STOP BITS: e'i SERT J7 and J8; REt-lO VE J5, J6, J9
2.0 STOP BITS: INSERT J6 a nd J8; RE~lO\,E J5, J7, J9
Use insulated ~ire for J9

PAGE 3

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title
All

PTO 8 -

OPTION SELECTION JUMPERS

Processor Applicability

Rev

R. Shelley

Aumor

Approval

Date

Tech TippT08-TT-1
Number
Cross Reference
0

7-31-72

W706 ETCH REV. 0 CS REV . B

oTP3

I E3 I

£5

I E2- I
:no~

I I E4JII ] T~5
0--_

£6

E .8

-if-if-

--t:+- 0
~O

4#-0

oTPI

mlf

7 !~I Ell

EIO . ]

~/1~1 EI3

EI2.

~-~
hI
..... ~ '" TP6

~l'~ lEIS I I EI4

-*"
~ -(:)l-

.., ''''I

...sJ\ ~"

EJ8

]

EI1

Elb

5 BIT CODE: INSERT J3, J4; REMOVE Jl, J2
8 BIT CODE: INSERT Jl, J2; REMOVE J3, J4
NO RUN OPEN: INSERT J6, J 9; REMOVE J5 , J7, J8
0.5 STOP BITS : SET UP JUMPERS for 1.0 STOP BITS and
IN SERT a jumper between pins 1 & 2 of E14
1.0 STOP BITS : INSERT J5, J6;REMOVE J7, J8, J9
1.5 STOP BITS: INSERT J 7 , J8;REMOVE J 5, J6, J9
2.0 STOP BITS: INSERT J6, J8;REMOVEJ5, J7, J9
Clear Flag - Factory Standard:
Insert JlO; Remove Jll
Clear Flag - Special Applications:
Insert Jll; Remove JlO

Page 4

momoomo
Title

All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

PT08

16Bit

18 Bit

36Bit

Tech Tip P 08

PT08 MODIFICATION

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Option or Designator

Number

Author

W. Cummins

Approval

Cummins

Rev
Date

-TT-

Cross Reference

7-31-72

Past policy has kept the field from modifying a PT08 to a PT08F or PT08FX.
Now, however, it has been found relatively easy to modify a PT08 to a
PT08F.
The following procedures are included to enable the change.
The printed dircuit revision must be C to implement this change.
Add the following
to convert a

PT08B to a PT08BF
location

PT08C to a PT08CF
location

Jumper

A40 to B20

A4D to B20

Jumper

BIO to B2E

BID to B2E

Jumper

A200 to B180

Jumper

B170 to B18E

modem cable
PIN 70-5717

WSll.

B3 & B19
Bl & B17

W602

A4 & A20

These changes apply to only those PT08's with a receive clock in A16 or
A32 and a transmit clock in B04 or B20.
To change a PT08 to a PT08X the following must be done (the printed
circuit 500 3980 must be exposed to allow et ch cut s and it must be
Rev. C) .

Remove R40l

A16
B4

PT08C
A32
B20

Add R40S

B16

B32

Add W708

B12

B28

Cut etch

BlSV

B3l V

PT08B

Changes

B160
B12S
B120
B12J
B12V
B12L
B12F
B12P

Jumper
Jumper
Jumper
Jumper
Jumper
Jumper
Jumper
Jumper

*NOTE:

Left half same as

PAGE 5

B12E
to
to BISS
BSO
to
to AlSJ
BlSV
to
to AISF
to BlSJ
to BSU

B320
B28S
B280
B28J
B28V
B28L
B28F
B28P

to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to

B28E
B3lS
B2l0
A3lJ
B3lV
A3lF
B3lJ
B210

PT~8B.

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

PT08 MODIFICATIONS (Continued)

Title

All

Processor Applicability

I I

Author
Approval

w.
w.

Cummins
Cummins

Rev
Date

Tech Tip PT08-TT-2
Number
Cross Reference

7-31-72

Do the following when a W709 is to be supplied with the PT08X:
Add W709
Cut Etch
Delete
Add
Add
Add

Title

PT08B B4
B04D
B16D
B16D
B04D
B04J

to
to
to
to
to

PT08C B20

B05D
B12E
B04V
B12E
B03J

B20D
B32D
B32D
B20D
B20J

to
to
to
to
to

\Tech Tip
Number

DATA PHONE INSTALLATIONS WITH PT08
Processor Applicability

All

8' s 112

I I I I I I

Author

R. Howington

Approval

Cmnm;n~

B21D
B28E
B20V
B28E
A19J

Rev
Date

0
7-31-72

PT08-TT-3
Cross Reference

It is essential that these factors be determined:
The module of the Data-Phone set with which the customer will
be operating at the other end of the data-line must be determined so that compatibility of both stations can be assured.
The telephone company can verify compatibility between various
models.
The
set
The
you

BAUD rate must be known. The customer's BAUD rate must be
the same as the BAUD rate at the other end of the data-line.
customer will usually have this information available for
or can obtain it.

The character code must be known. In effect this means that for
intelligible data to be sent and received by the customer, he
must know what type of character code the system at the other end
of the data-line transmits and receives. The customer should
normally have this information for you.
The lOT Device Code of the PT08 for the Data~Phone must be known.
This code is normally one of the following: 11 & 12, 40 & 41,
42 & 43, 44 & 45, 46 & 47. It should be noted that the first
device code is usually for the receiver protion of the PT08 and
the second device code is usually for the transmitter portion of
the PT08. This is not to be taken as the final word on this
arrangement, but merely as an example. This should be checked out
thoroughly before trying to check out the PT08.
The PT08 clocks must be set so that the Data-Phone will be operated
at the correct BAUD rate. If the PT08 contains R401 clocks, the
way to determine the setting for the clocks is as follows:
Page 6

mamaamD
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL
MANUAL
...

PT08
12 Bit

16Bit

18Bit

36Bit

DATA PHONE INSTALLATIONS WITH PT08

All

Processor Applicability

8's1121

Option or Designator

Author

Approval

Time
Example:

Rev

R. Howington

Cununins

Tech Tip
Number

?T08-TT-3

Cross Reference

Date

BAUDlX 2

For a rate of 300 BAUD, the output of the
clocks should be set for a ulse every 1.66ms.
Time

1
300 X 2
1.66 msec

If'the PT08 has a crystal clock, there is no adjustment for it.
The logic for the PT08 is somewhat different for a crystal clock
control; therefore, if it is desired to know the pulse rate of
the clock, the following formulas may prove helpful:
Freq.
Freq.

= BAUD
=

X 128 (if a w709 is used)
BAUD X
8 (if no W709 is used)

W709 is used when frequency is less than 4K BAUD.
After determining the settings for the clocks, they both must
be set to the same rate (if they are R40l's.)
Once the clocks have been set up the Data-Phone test can be
run. The program write-up calls for a jumper from B03E to
B03Pi however, this does not allow the connecting cables to
be tested.
For best test results and most complete checkout,
pin 2 and 3 of the 25 pin Cannon Plug should be jumpered together
and the program run.
(Do not connect the jumper from B03E to B03P).
The cable is wired as follows:
25 Pin
W023
Cannon
Color
Black
Red

Pin 1
P~n

~reen

P~n

Wh~te

P~n

Brown

P~n

3
20
7

C
E
P
K
C

Signal
Ground
Data
Data
Data Term. Ready (+lOV)
Ground

Transm~t

Rece~ved

The indications that the program is working correctly are that the
program will cycle and the AC will be stepping. This program simply
transmits data and reads back the same data and compares it to see
if it is correct.
Normally this is as much as DEC is required to test, but it may be
advantageous to go one step further and try transmitting and
receiving data to and from the station at the other end of the data
line.
o
July 1972
PUBLICATION DATE
PAGE REVISION
PAGE 7

Title
All
R's

DATA PHONE INSTALLATIONS WITH PT08
Processor Applicability

1121 I I I I I

Author

R. Howington

Approval

tAl

Cummins

Rev
Date

Tech Tip
Number PT08-TT-3
Cross Reference
0

7-31-72

The following is a program which will allow the use of the console
teletype to send and receive data over the Data-Phone line to a
remote teletype.
Loc:

200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207

/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/

6031
5211
6036
6046
6YY6
6041
5205
6YY1

210
211
212
213
214

/ 5207

/ 6XXl
/ 5200
/ 6XX6

/ 5203

XX = lOT Code for Receiver, in PT08.
YY

= lOT

Code for Transmitter, in
PT08.

This program will loop, waiting for data from the remote teletype
or the console teletype. Anything typed on either will be printed
on both.
If this test runs correctly, the installation and check out of the
system should now be complete.

Page 8

mamDDmo
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

(iJ1

12 Bit

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 I

RFOB OPERATION ON PDP-BL
Processor Applicability

All I BLI

Author
w. Freeman
Approval W C'nmmin!':

36Bit

Option or Designator
RF08

\Tech Tip
Number RF08-TT-l
Cross Reference
Rev SJ
Date 7-31-72

Certain software routines can cause DRL's in the PDP-8L computer
after the installation of RF08 ECO 0019. If this problem is
evident, the installation of RF08 ECO 0029 will correct the
problem.

All

Processor Applicability

I I I I

Author

C. Cline

Approval

Cummins

Tech Tip RF08-TT-2
Number
Cross Reference
Rev 0

HARDWARE PROBLEMS EXISTING WITH RF08 and RS08

Title

Date

In the near future ECO's will be issued to correct the following list
of problems:
1)

When doing a cross disk transfer, address zero on track zero of the
extended disk is not accessed and all data is placed in its proper
address plus one.
However, if the beginning of the transfer is at
zero on track zero of the extended disk, the transfer is normal.

When doing a write with WLS ~ set as the EMA increments from 7 to 10,
17 to 20, 37 to 40, a spike is generated on the interrupt line
causing an undefined interrupt.

When deselecting and then reselecting an extended disk unit within
150 us, a false PCA s~gnal is generated.
If an LMAP occurs during
this time after reselection of the extended disk, the 256 us delay
is inhibited and ORE is immediately set.
This problem can be
exhibited by running Random Track Address Test on an extended disk.

Problems with motor stopping long after installation caused by Rl
of the motor control:
Rl is passing current as long as the motor
is running; therefore, developing excessive heat leading to an
eventual breakdown.

Carl Cline/January 1971

PAGEl

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title

Processor Applicability
All

Tech Tip RF08-TT-3
Number

RF08 SYNC ADJUSTMENT

I I I I I

181 I

Author

C. Cline

Approval

Cummins

Rev
Date

Cross Reference

7-31-72

Problem:
During address test of disk data, the first 17 addresses
may genera~e errors.
The errors are due to photo sync and LDMP
no~ occurr1ng at the same time.
This forces the disk control to
wa1t ~6 w~rds rat~er than setting ORE immediately.
The present
solut10n 1S to adJust photo sync to 110 microseconds.
This problem is more apparent on POP~12
to 125 tis.

Title

RF08

(Disk)

Processor Applicability
All

and may have to be adjusted

Author

C. Cline

Rev

Tech
Tip RF08-TT-4
Number
Cross Reference
0

I I I

Approval
w. Cummins Date
18E 8I18LI
The quality of a disk surface can be altered by a build up of dirt or by
handling of the entire eisk assembly.
This condition can be detected in
time to save the surface from eventual destruction and long down times.

The detection of dirt can generally be confirmed with the use of a scope.
The following method should be used:
A)
B)
e)

D)
E)

Sync scope "on 1 ine" .
Set time/cent. to 5 ms.
Set volts/cent. to .2V (using XIO probe).
Place probe on RS08 location A02, pin T.
One of the following sketches .should be observed.

.. ..

jt
I

i
1," i'i
t, ,

jt1

I
i'

f,'
!

F)
G)

The first ske:tch indicates a good surface. only minor dips will
be observed in a revolution.
The second sketch indicates that the surface is dirty and has
started scoring the surface.
The display on the scope will have
sharp jagged decreases in amplitude.
Where a good surface will
have a minor and more gentle.decrea5~ and increase.
This procedure should be repeated on all timing tracks (three)
and on randomly selected data tracks.

page 2

momDamB
Title
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

RFOa (Disk)

0 I

18 Bit

0 I

Author

C. Cline

Approval

Cummins

RF08

\ Tech Tip
Number RF08-TT-4
Cross Reference
Rev
0

(Continued)

Processor Applicability

lad arlaLI I

16 Bit

36Bit

Option or Designator

Date

7-31-72

This method will give you the general condition of the surface, however,
if the diagnostic still gives error on a specific track and address this
problem should be confirmed before replacing disk.
Only a minor adjustment may be required to correct the problem.
In order to look at one word on my data track use the following method:
A)
B)
C)

F)
G)
H)

Load Disk Data
Load Address 201
Start desired track in SR
Continue desired address in SR
Continue desired data in SR
Continue desired data in SR (usually all ones)
Continue 7001 in SR
This will read and write in the desired location.
Halt Program
Load 200
Start 7201
This will read only the location ' selected previously; it may
be necessary to put SR bit 3 to inhibit errors.
Now with channel one, sync on ADC negative location B21 pin N
in RF08.
With channel two, and scope on alternate look at output of
data amp in RS08 location AI2T.
You will now observe the data being retrieved for the
desired word.
If the decrease in amplitude is not catastrophic you may
adjust it until there is a sliced output.
(RS08 B12D and E)

If PM's are performed on equipment, it is a good idea
change in track amplitude from the previous PM.

PAGE 3

PAGE REVISION

to monitor any

PUBLICATION DATE July 1972

Title

Tech Tip
Number RF08-TT-S

RFOB TIMING TRACK WRITER

All

Processor Applicability

laElallaLI

I I

Author
Approval

w.
w.

Kochman
Cummins

Cross Reference

Rev

0
Date 7-31-72

New RF08 TTWs have a coarse adjustment
switch. To use the new pot:
pot instead of the 50 - 60 cycle
1)

Title

Ad'
JUl,!stthtehe gap
coarse
ar ad.justment pot while per f arming step 2
unt
ea IS approximately 2 msee.

Adjust the fine ad'u
until the gap area J l'sstm en t pot while performing step 2
50 o - 550 usee,

Tech Tip
Number RFOS-TT-6

NOTES ON RFOB TUNING PROCEDURE

All

.Find the middle position on the fine adjustment pot.
Press write and e xamln
. e gap area.

Processor Applicability

J I I I I I

Author
Approval

w.
w.

Freeman
Cummins

Rev

0
Date 7-31-72

Cross Reference

Use RF08 Disk Data Maindec 08-DSEA. When random errors occur on one or' two tracks,
it is better to run the data patterns on a selected track rather than run the entire
40-minute test. This may be done by loading address ~2~1 and starting with the switch
register set to the desired track; now load address ~2~~ and start with 6~~~ in the
switch register. The program will exercise the selected track with all data patterns
and then jump to the incremental word count test (random data) exercise all tracks
randomly, then return to the selected test track.
The selection of a specific track for testing makes adjustment procedures more
efficient because the program can loop through the complete test in a few minutes.
The effect of a slice control or amplifier adjustment can be observed very quickly,
especially on the single track, but also on the other tracks as well.

Title
All

OHM METER TESTING OF DISK HEADS IN RF/RSOB-DF32

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Page 4

Author

Rev

Freeman
Approval W. CUI)1l111n s

Date

Tech Tip
Num~

0
7-31-72

RF08-TT-7
Cross Reference

DF32-TT-7

mamaDma
Title
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16 Bit

18 Bit

0 I

RFoa
36 Bit

0
Tech Tip

G285/G286 REVISIONS FOR USE IN RS08
Processor Applicability

I aIL I I I I I

Number

Author

Steve Gradie

Approval

._--".

Option or Designator

Cummins

Rev 0
Date

7-31-72

RFOa-TT-a
Cross Reference
--

Early revision G28S's and G286's must be modified for proper operation
in an RS08. The components shown on the component-side view drawings
below must be the values and part numbers as indicated. Either module,
so modified, will function properly in a DF32 or DS32.
These changes will bring the G28S to circuit revision A level as
specified in ECO G285-00001 and the G286 to circuit revision B level
as specified in ECO G286-00001. It should be noted that the revision
level printed on the boa;r d is the "etch" revision level and differs
from the "circuit schematic" revision level.
Steve Gradie

June 1969

22 mfd - 35 vdc
"al 47mfd20 vdc)
22mfd-~vdc

(was 47mfd20vdc)

4.7K ohms

l.-Jl=l=*;J;;;;*~~ii;I~ 1/2 watt - 5%
(were 2.2K)

-=2~U~~~f;;;;;;~p;~H 65348 transistorl
(wer. 3638 B)

10...

G285
PAGE 5

G286
PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE Jul

June 1969
1972

Title

Processor Applicability

J8 I I I I I J J

All

AC POWER TO RF08/RS08
Author

B. Freeman

Approval

Cummins

Tech Tip RF08-TT-9
Number
Cross Reference
0

Rev
Date

7-31-72

It is imperative that the AC power supplied to the RF~8/RS~8 be connected in proper
phase relationship. Improper phasing or lack of a high quality ground can cause random,
unexplainable errors in the processing of disk data. Refer to "AC" Power Specifications
for Computer Installation" for an explanation of proper AC power wiring. Check with a
scope for a signal on the white AC lead at the RS08 control; there should be none. A
check at the RS~8 motor fuse terminal should produce a 60-cycle sine wave. If these
indications are reversed, it is an indication of phase reversal which must be corrected.

Title

B163 MODULES IN RF08
Processor Applicability

All 181

Author

I I I I I I

Approval

w.
w.

Tech Tip
Number RFOB-TT-10
Cross Reference
0

Moroney

Rev

Cummins

Date 7-31-72

The following slots in the RF08 were designed for B163 modules
initially:
A23, A24, B3, B4, B7, B8, B25, B26, 07, 08; ECO RF08-00005 specifies
that S123's should be installed instead. This is not a field retrofit
ECO. The B163's will operate just as satisfactorily as the S123's.

Title
All

Tech Tip
Number RF08-TT-11
Cross Reference

RF08 Disk Data
Processor Applicability

Author

Approval

Problem:

RFOB disk data does not verifg that IOT 6603 (DMAR)
clears the AC.

Correction:

Make the following changes to OB-D5EB.

Page -6_

Location

Change to

3174
3175
3176
3177

7440
7402
7200
5756

Sgmbo1ic
SZA
HLT/ERROR
CLA
JMP I READ

momaoma
Title

A~I

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

[JI

16Bit

18 Bit

36Bit

Option or Designator

RF08

0
Tech Tip
Number

"INCR MB" on Linc-8 with RF08's
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

Rev

Author
Approval

I-f

T.nn

RFOB-TT-l6
Cross Reference

Date 0 9 I 1 4 I 7 2

On Linc-B's with RF08's installed, if problems are encountered
with "INCR MB" being loaded down, check that the 3V clamp in
the RFOB is removed.
Signal Name

From

-3V Clamp

C08V

C125

Delete
x

Imt

IPAGE 9

1\ PAGE REVISION

o II PUBLICATION DATE

September] 972

mamaoma
Title

12 Bit

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 I

36Bit

I I I I I I

ApprovalBill Cummins

Option or Designator
RK08

ITech
Tip
Number

RK08 SECTOR TRANSDUCER ADJUSTMENT
Processor Applicability
Author Schults/Herbener

All
8's

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

Rev
0
6/01/72
Date

RK08-TT-l
Cross Reference

The Pertec Manual, Chapter 6, Section B, does not say to remove the
head alignment adapter before proceeding with the sector transducer
alignment. DEC Maintenance Manual for RK8, Chapter 6.13.1, paragraph
4, carefully spells this out.

Disk systems set up inadvertently with the head adapter installed when
doing sector transducer alignments will be incompatible with other
systems.
/mt

Title
All
S's

1Tech Tip
Number RK08-TT-2
Cross Reference
Rev 0

RK08 MAINDEC PROBLEM

Processor Applicability

Author

I I I I I I

Approval W. Cummins

R. Boehm

Date 06/21/72

ECO #9 for the RK08 causes test 16 of the RK8 disk and control
instruction test (Maindec-08-D5JB-D) to fail.
As a temporary fix change location
to reflect this.

27~

~232.

There is an MCN

/mt

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

November 1972

Title

Tech Tip
Number RK08-TT-3

PA/WD MODULE INCOMPATIBILITY
Processor Applicability

Au~or

Cross Reference

Rev 0

Ralph Boehm

Approval

The PA/WD module in the RKOI Drives made by CMD have 33K OHM
resistors installed for R2 and R3. The same module made by
PERTEC have 5.6K OHM resistors for R2 and R3. The PERTEC
module will work in all RKOI drives. The CMD module, ident~
ified by the letters CMD etched on the module and the gold
fingers, will only work in the CMD drives.
Pertec changed the resistor values because the early rev~s~on
boards (CMD) would randomly generate spikes and cause errors.
By changing the resistors R2 and R3 on the CMD PA/WD to
S.6K OHM the module will work in all RKOI drives. R2 and R2
are located between the two heat sinks.
Title

All

Cross Talk in CA Register

8's

Processor Applicability

I I I I

Au~or

Approval

'Rr.horr

C:hollov

F. Purcell

Date

Rev

Tech Tip
Number RK08-TT-4
Cross Reference
0

11/20/72

Occasionally the M206 modules used in the Current Address
register (CA~~-CAll) and Word Count register (WC~~-WCll) do
not ripple through properly when incremented (example:
incrementing from 5777 to 6000). This is caused by crosstalk between jumper-lugs or etch runs on the M206. (Failure
rate - once in 16 to 20 hours) •
Replacing the M206's in RK08 B03, B04, BOB and B09 with
M216's will correct this problem.
ECO #RK08-00012 reflects this change.

Page -2-

mamaama
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

18 Bit

36Bit

II I I I I I I

8's

RKOS

Tech Tip
Number RK08-TT-S
Cross Reference
0

2.88 MHz CRYSTAL AVAILABILITY
Processor Applicability

All

16 Bit

Option or Designator

Author

Rev
Chuck Sweeney
Approval Frank Purcell Date 01/24/73

At present, all Crystal values between 1 to l ' MHz are classified
under stock number 18-05501.
Unfortunately, the 2.S8 MHz crystal used in the RK,8 was never
assigned a discrete number~ such as lS-OSSOl-XX.
This situation has since been corrected, and Field Service Stockroom
in Maynard will carry the required crystal.
For reference, the parts needed on the M40s are as follows:
2.88MHz Crystal 18-05501-08
(Northern Engineering Labs, model NE-6A)
100

NOTE:

H VIH-lOO Choke

16-00633

lSMMF 100V vapacitor

10-02608

DEC currently stocks a 2.88 MHz Crystal under the number
18-10694-03. This crystal cannot be used in this application.

/mt

Tech Tip
Number

Title
All

Processor Applicability

J. Stewart
Approval B

On the PA/WD board in the
prevent the ~esistor from
It is possible that rough
cause faults, as has been

PAGE 3

Rev

Author

PAGE REVISION

RKO 8-TT - 6
Cross Reference

Date

RKOI resistors are crimped or bent to
sitting on the board after soldering.
handling will break these resistors, and
seen on some system.

PUBLICATION DATE

January 1973

mDIiDmD
Title

[]I

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

C. Cline

Author

Approval W. Cummins

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Author

Approval

W. Cummins

Freeman

7-31-72

Processor Applicability
All lSI

I I I I I I

Author

Cross Reference

7-31-72

DF32-TT-7

ITech Tip
Number

RS08-TA TRACK WRITER PROBLEM

Title

B. Freeman

Approval W. Cummins

Rev

RFOS-TT-2

I~-:~a!~ RS08-TT-2

Rev
Date

RS08
Tech Tip
Number RS08-TT-l
Cross Reference
0

Rev
Date

Option or Designator

36Bit

OHM METER TESTING OF DISK HEADS IN RF /RS08-DF32

Title
All

12 Bit

HARDWARE PROBLEMS EXISTING WITH RFOS AND RSOS

All

FIELD SERVICE TeCHNICAL MANUAL

RS08-TT-3
Cross Reference

Date 7-31-72

A problem has been encountered in the use of the Rs~8-TA Timing Track Writer. If, after
the timing tracks have been recorded, errors indicating a parity error are encountered
when running the Disk Data Maindec, the Track A pulses may have been recorded
improperly. This can be verified by syncing on a failing address and checking pin
B"9D in the RS{38. If the thirteenth pulse occurs within a shorter time interval than
the other twelve, the timing track writer has written the track improperly. The
problem can be remedied by re-routing wires in the RS~8-TA. The wires on the output
of the Track C wri~ers must be moved away from those on the Track A writers. The
wires on A2lK thru A2IR, and B2lK thru B2lR should be moved away from the wires which
run from the logic blocks to the metal plate on which the switches are mounted.
Title

Processor Applicability

All

Tech Tip
Number RS08-TT-4

RS08 CLEANING KITS FOR DM1 SURFACES

I 8I1 I I . I . I I

Author

C. Cline

Approval

Cummins

Rev
Date

Cross Reference

7-31-72

[!vII cleaning ktts are now available to the field.
Each RS~8 I<:it
(sui tcase) sh:mld contain two 1>11 cleaning I<:i ts along with its
present complement of paraphernalia. Each time a 1>11 disl<: is cleaned
discard the used Il<11 kit completely and order a new one.

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Jul

1972

Title

lTech Tip
Number RSOB-TT-S

RS08 CLEANING PROCEDURE FOR DMl SURFACES
Processor Applicability

All lSI

I I I I I I

Author

C. Cline

Approval

Cummins

Rev

Cross Reference

Date 7-31-72

In future RS¢B disk units there will be two kinds of surfaces used.
One will be the original Techmet surface which is silver and highly
polished. The second is a new surface, OMI, generally a dark blue
and/or yellowish color. Variations in color and spots need not be
of concern.
With the phasing in of a new disK, an entirely new cleaning
procedure was developed.
Its purpose is to resist corrosion and
lubricate the surface. Each disk kit (suitcase) will be supplied
with enough DEC cleaning fluid and lint free towels to clean one
OMl surface.
NOTE. This cleaning fluid is to be used only on the
DMl surfaces, continue using current procedure on
Techmet surface.
The DMl cleaning procedure is as follows.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Use special DEC cleaning only on DMl disks.
Mount the disk on a spin stand • . Apply DBC cleaner to a clean
lap towel and wipe the surface of the disk. Use the clean side
of the towel to wipe the disk surface dry.
Apply DEC cleaner on disk surface. Let a thin layer of the
solution stand on the disk surface~
After the solvent completely evaporates, take another clean lab
towel and start buffing the surface, using clean sides of the
towels after every few strokes.
Continue buffing using new towels whenever necessary until there
is no dark spot or stain on the disK surface.
Wipe the edges of the disk. The disk is now ready to be mounted
on the hub.
After mounting the disk, slowly turn it by hand.
If it feels hard to turn, remove the disk and rebuff with dry
towels. If the disk is properly buffed, the heads will not stiCK
to the disk • .
Reassembly of the disk is exactly as before.
NOTE. If the disk surface has not been buffed satisfactorily
the excess DEC cleaner can get collected on the Ferrite
pads. When reassembling the diSk units the heads must be
cleaned and examined in the usual manner.

Page -2-

mamaoma
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

(i]

16 Bit

18 Bit

36 Bit

I I I I I I I

Author

Approval

H. Lona

Josbacher

RS08

SENSITIVE TIMING TRACK CABLES
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Rev

Tech Tip
Number RS08-TT-6
Cross Reference
0

Date 09/20/72

Most timing track cables are sensitive to pressure or sharp
bends. This shows up by securing the cable by hand or bending
the cable while the disk is being exercised, "Hardware Errors"
will result. Such errors are only of momentary nature and occur
at the instant the pressure is applied. There is no after effect
and this phenomenon is not observed under normal operating conditions.
/mt
Title
All
X

LEAKS AROUND ABSOLUTE FILTERS
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

Author

J. Kilkenney

Approval

Cummins

Rev

Tech Tip
RS08-TT-7
Number
Cross Reference
0

Date 09/20/72

When replacing the absolute filter, check to see that the
rubber strip at the top of the filter makes a good seal
with the filter top cover.
If it does not, remove the rubber strips from the old filter
and replace in the bottom of the filter holder, so that the
new filter will be higher in the filter holder and so provide
a good air tight seal.
/mt

IPAGE 3

II PAGE REVISION

I PUBLICATION DATE

September

1922

momDDmo
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

[i)

16 Bit

0 1 18 Bit 0 -,

36 Bit

TeOl

Tech Tip
Number TCOI TT-l
Cross Reference

TCOI DECTape Information
Processor Applicability

l SE I I I I I I

All

Option or Designator

Rev 0
Craiq Showers
Date 7-31-72
Approval w. Cummins
Author

In TCOI DECtape library system tape it DEC-OS-SUCO-UB, the "Escape"
program can cause two undeterminable locations of Rim Loader to be
destroyed. This problem has been corrected on tapes now being
issued.
Field Solutions:
1.
2.

Recopy Escape program frOm known good tape.
Reload Rim Loader after running "Escape" routine.

ERROR IN TCOl B 15IC EXERCISER MAINDEC-OS-D3BB-D

Title

Processor Applicability

/:\11

I8 I I I I I I

Author
Approval

Tech Tip
Number

Rev

Cummins

Date

TCOl-TT-2
Cross Reference

6/6/72

The error condition affects the write/read test starting at location
0204 with test pattern 6 selected.
Test pattern 6 is a 7070 pattern that is written on the DECtape, then
read back to the processor and verified. The error causes the program
to execute test pattern 6 only once, then the program selects test
pattern 5 (0707) erroneously.
Error printouts could then occur for both test patterns.
testing of test pattern 6 can be made.

No significant

To correct error change location 4642 from 5630 JMP I GNPATS
to 5636 JMP I GNPAT6.

Title

Tech Tip
Number TCOl-TT-3

ADJUSTMENTS FOR DECTAPE SYSTEMS - Family of S
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I I
All

PAGE 1

Cross Reference

Author

Robert Nunley

Rev

Approval

F. Purcell

/;2/D("/ 1.:J.

PAGE REVISION

Date

PUBLICATION DATE

CPL
TU56-TT-9

December 1972

mamaama
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit ~

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

36 Bit

0
Tech Tip
Number

TC08 - Installing G829
Processor Applicability

All ISEI

Option or Designator
TC08

Author

Rill

Approval

When installing the GS29 for ECO
a l~ amp fuse.

['nmmin~

Cummins

Rev 0
Date 7-31-72

TC~8-~~~14,

TC08 TT-l
Cross Reference

the module requires

Tech Tip
ADJUSTMENT OF GSSS (READ/WRITE AMPLIFIER
TCOS TT-2
Number
MODULE) TC08
Cross
Reference
Processor Applicability
Rev 0
AuthorCharles Sweeney
All lSI I
Date
7-31-72
Approval r&1 f'l1mmi n ~

Title

I I I I I

Due to lack of sufficient documentation, some confusion has developed
over how to field-adjust this module.
The modules are set up, in Maynard, by applying a 1 mv sine wave to
input pins DZ and EZi R7 is then adjusted for a symetrical (e.g. SO/50)
square wave at output pins U2 and V2.
Should it become necessary to field-adjust this module, the following
alternate procedure may be used:
1)

Refer to Section 6.4 (Head Output Check) of the TU56
Maintenance Manual or Section 4.4 of the TUSS Maintenance
Manual to determine if the read head is capable of
developing the proper read signals.

Install the module to be adjusted in slot A18 of TC08
(Timing Track).

With the transport selected, observe the waveform at
pins A1SU2 and A18V2 and adjust R7, if necessary,to
obtain a symetrical square wave (a scope loop subroutine
such as Test 210 of the DEC tape Basic Exerciser may be
used for this purpose).

NOTE: Due to the differences of the input signals used (e.g. 1 mv as
compared with 10 mv) this method is not as accurate as the one
used in Maynard; but it will provide satisfactory results in
regards to field use.

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Ju1

1972

DECTAPE TRANSPORT CABLES

Title

Processor Applicability

All

lSI ISL ISE

I I I

C. Sweeney

Author

W• CUDUUJ.ns
.

Approval

Rev
Date

Tech Tip
TCOS-TT-3
Number
Cross Reference
0

6/6/72

To connect a TCOS DEC tape control to a TU56:

TCOS
TC08

A24
A, B19

CABLE TYPE

CONNECT FROM
TU56
TU56

A06
A, B10

70-6223*
74-5152-1

A06
A, B10

BC02X-3
74-5152-1

AOS
A, B02

70-6223*
74-5152-1

AOS

74-5151
74-5152-1

To connect a TU56 to a TU56:
TU56
TU56

A07
A, B11

TU56
TU5S

To connect a TU56 to a TU55:
TU56
TU56

A07
A, B11

TUSS
TUSS

To connect a TC08 to a TUS5:
TCOS
TCOS

A24

A, B19

TU5S
TUS5

A, B02

To connect a TC01 DECtape control to a TUS6:
TC01
TC01

C32
C , D19

TUS6
TU56

A06

A, B10

70-6223*
74-5152-1

To connect a TC01 to a TU5S:
TC01
TC01

C32
C , D19

TU5S
TU55

AOS

A, B02

74-5151-1
74-5152-1

TO connect a TUSS to a TU56:
TU55
TU55

A06

A, B03

TU56
TU56

A, B10

70-6223*
74-5152-1

A05
A, B02

74-5151-1
74-5152-1

A06

To connect a TU55 to a TU55:
TU55
TU55

A06
A, Bo3

70-6223

Page 2

CAUTION:

TU55
TUS5

It is possible to install this cable
backwards; see noteon cable terminator to
insure cable is installed properly.

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

momoama
Title

[Xl

16 Bit

18 Bit

36 Bit

Processor Applicability

la laI laE 18L

Author

I I I

Bob Nunley

TC08

PLACEMENT FOR TCOa

MODULE

All

12 Bit

Option or Designator

Rev

Tech Tip
Number TC08-TT-4
Cross Reference

Approval Frank Purcell Date 07/31/72

The following is a table of module placement for TCOB.
A
I.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
7.
8.
9.
10.
II.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
lB.
19.
20.
2I.
22.
23.
24.
25.
2G.

G82l
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
M16l
M206
Ml17
Mll3
MIll
Ml13
M302
M627
M602
G888
W032
G888
G888
M502
M633
Cable
Cable
Cable

GB2l
MG23/MG33*
M623/M633*
MG23/M633*
MG23/MG33*
Mlll
M207
Ml13
M206
M627
MIlS
Ml17
M20G
M206
Ml13
MG02
G888
W032
G888
G8790
M633
WOOS

M100/M10l*
M100/M10l*
M100/M10l*
Ml02/M103*
M102/MI03*
MIll
M207
M12l
M206
M12l
Ml13
MllS
Mlll
M206
Ml13
M627
MIll
M228

Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
Cable
M16l
M207
M12l
Ml19
M206
M627
M602
M307
M40l
M302
M602
M22B

*Listed TC08N/TC08P for different busses.
A02-A06 & 002-006 = I/O connectors
A19 - (Wo32) Data Cable to Transport
A24 - Command Cable to Transport
A2S - Indicators - status . A, unit select, etc.
A26 - Indicators - MC, Write, etc.

Cables

NOTE:

M663 in A23 and B22 are not changed as polarity of IO bus is
changed.

PAGE 3

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

December 1972

Title

ADJUSTMENTS FOR DEC TAPE SYSTEMS - Family of 8
Processor Applicability

All

I I I
I I I I

Rev

Tech Tip TC08-TT-5
Number
Cross Reference
0

Author

Robert Nunley

Approval

Frank Purce11)ate 12/06/72

CPL
TU56-TT-9

Page -4-

momDamB

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16 Bit

18Bit

36Bit

All

,I I I I I I I

S's

tTech Tip
Number

Cummins

Date

TC58-TT-1
Cross Reference

Rev

Author
Approval

TCS8

Title MAGNETIC TAPE CONTROLS TCSS, TCS9
Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

06/06172

The EOF character while reading gets stored in memory location specified by the
initial address.

A recent ECO change which informs the program that the selected magnetic tape
unit is settl ing down is DRied with the illegal status bit (Bit 3). This added
st~tus inf~rmation is present only during the transport settling period after the
drIve was Instruct~d to stop. (TU2D settling time - 5 ms) Ref: PDP-8/1 Handbook, Pages 177 and 178. (PDP-8 ECO #279).

The TC58 extended memory field is loaded by the MTGO command in which AC Bits 6,
7, 8, are loaded in the data field bits 0, I, 2, respectively.

Under certain long data blocks using a nine track system, the CRC character and
LPCC character may be identical and equal to the end of fi .le code. A space reverse
command will consider the LPCC and CRC character as an EOF thus causing tape shut
down procedures. This will be corrected in the near future.

Remember if a record is written in even parity mode (BCD), a zero character will
contain no bit in the parity channel. If two consecutive characters contain zeros,
the control may begin shut down procedures.

Title

CHECKING 9 CHANNEL TCSS MAG TAPE SYSTEM
Processor Applicability

All

18' 5

I I I I I I I

Author
Approval

Freeman

Cummins

t Tech Tip TCSS-TT-2
Number
Cross Reference
Rev 0
Date 06-06-72

When checking for data errors on a 9 channel TCS8 system, it is necessary
to run Tess Instruction Test 1 (Maindec 08-D9DB) and TCS8 Instruction
Test 2 (Maindec 08-D9EA) because the eRe data is checked onlt with these
maindecs; it is not checked by Maindec 08-D9FA TCS8 Data Reliability Test
(9 track). The CRe is calculated and written on tape by hardware in the
TCS8 control. No hardware checks are made on the CRC. therefore, the
CRC must be checked by software during a read operation.

IPAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

June 21, 1972

Title

Processor Applicability

All

Tech Tip TC58-TT-3

ERROR IN TC58 RANDOM EXERCISER

I 8 I 8~ I I I I

Author

R. Nunley

Approval

w. Cummins

Number -.

Rev
Date

Cross Reference

7-31-72

There is a deficiency in the TC58 Random Exerciser (Maindec-08-D9CC)
that causes symptoms which may be interpreted as a TC58 hardware
failure because the erid-of-tape (EOT) can be missed and the
program will continue until the tape runs off the reel.
This can
happen because the interrupt handling routine does not check for
EOT while doing an
end-of-file (EOF).
During EOF a TC58 interrupt
causes its status register to be read, but all bits, except the
one representing EOF, are masked out.
Any function causing an
interrupt from the TC58, other than an EOF, will therefore be
missed.
The following patch entered manually, after the Maindec
has been read into core, will allow recognition of EOT while
doing an EOF.
Address
3326
3340
3341
3342
3343
3344
3345
3346
3347
3350
3351
3352
3353
3354

Page -2-

New Contents
4340
0
7300
6706
6712
0353
7650
5740
1354
3500
3430
574 a
0040
3101

Enter
CCA CLL
Read Status
Clear Status
Mask for EOT
SNA SZA - EOT?
Not EOT So Leave
(Set Up to
(Enter EOT
(Routines
Go to EOT routines

mamaoma
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

(K]

18 Bit

0 I

36 Bit

1 sl

I I I I I

Author

Tech Tip
Number TC58-TT-4

Cummins

Cross Reference

Rev 0

Fred Doll

Approval W.

TCS8

TCS8, TC59 Drive Function Timer
Processor Applicability

All

J 16 Bit 0 I

Option or Designator

Date

11/03/72

TC59-TT-l
IS Bit Manual

Drive Function Timer MAINDEC-9-D4CC, 8-D9BA, 15-D4CC and earlier
versions may hang in the bad tape test after installing ECO
TC59-14 or TC5S-09. To correct, change the following locations
which are about 100 locations prior to the bad tape test.
MAINDEC

ADDRESS

OLD CONTENTS

NEW CONTENTS

g-D4CC

2367

15-D4CC

2273

SOD9BA

2705

LAC !-WR BUF-l
203501
LAC/WRBUF-l
203415
TAD K3777
1063

LAC/WRBUF+BLENTH-IO
203604
LAC/WRBUF+BLENTH-IO
203511
TAD K6515
1067

PAGE

3--

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

November 1972

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

mamBO!a

12 Bit

[ill

16 Bit

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

Processor Applicability

All laEI

I I I

Author

Ken Quinn

Approval

Cummins

Rev
Date

TD8E

TDSE DECTape Formatter

Title

Option or Designator

Tech Tip
TDSE TT-l
Number
Cross Reference
0

7-31-72

It is possible to get intermittent mark timing errors when using
DEC-SE-EUZB-PB DECtape formatter. The problem is corrected in
DEC-8E-EUZC-PB, and this tape should be used. A temporary fix is
to change location 1600 of the formatter from 11~~ ~n 7?nn
Title TAPE RUNAWAY

All

Processor Applicability

ISElsMlsFI

I I I

Author

Ken Quinn

Approval

w. Cummins

Rev

Tech Tip
Number TDSE-TT-2
Cross Reference
0

Date 10/30/72

Due to the effect of circuit delays in the M868 and the TU56, a
tape runaway may be observed on unit 1, 3, 5, or 7 while running
the TD8E DECtape Diagnostic (MAINDECSE-D3AB). This is caused by
an instruction sequence of:
A.

SDLC (AlII's)
CAF

SDLC (All l's)
SDLC (All f1's)

To Correct MAINDEC-8E-D3AB toggle in the following patch after the
program has been loaded:
Address

Change To
1365
6400
1364
6777

f1314
f1365
f1405

p'564

A new MAINDEC will be available in the Programy Library in the near
future. The new MAINDEC number is MAINDEC-OS-DHTDA-A, and it will
incorporate all previous MCN's.
Because the circuit delays may cause this type of a program, a drive
should always be stopped by clearing the Stop/Go flip-flop (AC Bit 2)
before clearing the unit flip-flop.

IPAGE 1

II PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

October 1972

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

mamaama
Title

12 Bit

16 Bit

18 Bit

36 Bit

Processor Applicability

Author

C. Sweeney

Approval

Cunnnins

TR02

0
Tech Tip
Num~r

Illegal Inter-record Gap Characters (Continued)

All

Option or Designator

TR02-TT-l

Rev 0
Date

Cross Reference

06/06/72

])2.

'\:F-=2==---_ _ ¢

GAP

o;,P

I R. G

r----

l.2.

wR. Sc:'T (..) H
W R. SET <-Ii»

Fe.

_1<_2.-

,Nlr Po

r -- - I
A21 I
I

L ___

])1

If!

INIT

I
I

-1

AlE:.

TR¢2-

P/l-. -

c;.AP

So?

of'"1

raje..
FUNCTION

.-.

---

COfllTROL

-IVII¢2.
1V)1¢3
INITIAL-Ire

1<.1

+-311'

IL _ _ _
A/6
_ _ _ JI

1'111/1
AI

>CJ~U.:.;..I_ _ _ (/)

81-

A¢8

- --

-"iR<;iSZ - P/IV-

I
TI={ ¢2. - P/N (

3
4

of'
PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Jul

o-f

2
~

IN I T

Title

All

INCOMPATIBILITY BETWEEN OLD AND NEW REVISION
Author
Approval

Chuck Sweeney

Rev

Tech Tip
Number

TR02-TT-2

Cross Reference

Frank Purce1Pate 07/31/72

TU28-TT-1 (CPL

mamoama

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

TR02
12 Bit

16Bit

18Bit

36Bit

0
\ Tech Tip

Title ILLEGAL INTER RECORD GAP CHARACTERS
Processor Applicability
All :\

8's

I I I I

Option or Designator

Number

Author

C. Sweeney

Approval

Cummins

Rev 0
Date

TR02-TT-1
Cross Reference

7-31-72

Problem - During a normal READ operation, if the program is such
that the computer HALTs after reading a record of data; and the
computer START key is depressed at this time; a full character frame
of bits may be written on tape.
This condition occurs when the computer START key is depressed:
because:
a)

The computer originated signal )NITIALIZE enters the TR02
interface and derives a signal called ~ INIT BL: the latter
signal resets the R/W flip-flop (amoung others).
In the
reset state, the R/W flip-flop indi~ates a WRITE function
to the PEC transport.

The same INITIALIZE signal leaves the TR02 interface as a
pulse called REMOTE RESET:
this REMOTE RESET signal is
used in the PEC transport to generate a GRS (General Reset)
pulse that clears all control flip-flops and the WRITE
buffers.
1)

If the TR02 R/W flip-flop is reset and a WRITE LOCK
ring is on the tape supply reel when a GRS occurs, a
character will be written on tape within the InterRecord Gap.

Solution - The way to correct this problem is to isolate the effects
of INITIALIZE from the R/W flip-flop.
Two things are necessary to effect the solution:
replacement of the
M216 at TR02 location Al4 with an M206. and related wiring changes
in the area of Al4 to allow the new module to operate correctly.
MODULE:

Replace M216 in TR02 location Al4 with an
on which the tabs FFI and FF2 are jumpered
to the K2 tabs; this allows isolation of FFO reset
line from the other FF's on the board; the output
F2 (~ INIT A L) on the MIll at location A08 is
quite capable of handling the additional loads of
FFI and FF2.
.

M~06

WIRING:

Because of the layout of the M206, the logic positions
of FFO and FFI must be reversed (see interface print
TR02-NP-3); (it is desired that the DIRECT CLEAR
input of FFO (AI of M206) be controlled by the signals
~ REWIND L and ~ WR LD L; provision must also be
made for 0 REWIND L to be able to "force" an ~
INIT A L)
The following diagrams depict the exact nature of the change.
PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION 0

PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title

I
8's
All

Illegal Inter-record Gap Characters (Continued)
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Author

C. Sweeney

Approval

Cummins

Rev
Date

Tech Tip

Number TR02-TT",l

Cross Reference

6/6/72

Add/Delete Scheme
SIGNAL NAME

RUN

0 WR SET (1) H
Al6N2
0 READ L

Al4EI
Al4F2
Al0T2

0 READ/WRITE (1) H
A17F2
Al6N2
0 READ/WRITE (1) H
AllCl
0 REMOTE RESET L
0 REMOTE RESET L

Al7E2

Al4H2

A14D 1
Al4F 2

A17F2

B20JI

AIOM2
AllC 1

AllPI
- A24K2
AIlC I
-

AlIBI
AlIBI
A08V I

0 WR LD L
A16R2

0 REMOTE RESET L
AllCI
0 WR SET (1) H
A16N2

0 READ L
0 READ/WRITE

(1)

A17F2
A16N2
0 WR SET (1) H

D664 DIODE

Page 2

X
X

A24K2
All Bl

A16R2

A08E2

Al6P2
A08Vl
Al4H2
A14Dl

A06Kl
AIlC 1
Al7H2
A16N2

AIOT2

A14F I

A14El
A14F2

A17E2
A17F2

B20Jl
AIOM2

A16N2
Al4EI

CATHODE AT AllAl;
( ANODE
AT A06KI

(

AllPl
A12J2

0 REMOTE RESET L

DEL

Al7H2
Al6N2
Al4J2

Al4H2
A08E2

Allel

ADD

X
X

momaamo

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

1iJ1

16 Bit

18 Bit

36Bit

Option or Designator

TR05

Tech Tip
Number TR05-TT-l
Cross Reference
Rev 0
Author Sweeney/MacLeod
M302-TT-l
Date 11/20/72
Approval F. Purce 11

Title RINGING ON M302 OUTPUT
All

8's

Processor Applicability

l I I I I I

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

November 1972

CPJ....

momDDma
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

KJI

16 Bit ~

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

Processor Applicability

t~ litIS I

Author

I I I J I

Approval

TYPESET SOFTWARE

Tech Tip TYPSET
Number SFTWRE-TT-9
Cross Reference

TYPESETTING BOOTST.RAP LOADERS

All

Rev

Option or Designator

Cummins

Date

7-31-72

The bootstrap loaders for both 552 and TC01 have been translated
so that bootstrap tapes can be prepared easily on site with any
TTS perforator. A sequential typing of the following characters
will punch a tape with the indicated octal codes and the result
will be a bootstrap loader tape.
552 Bootstrap Loader (Disk and Non-Disk Systems)
OCTAL
J

J
8

SPACE BAND

1¢
22

15
16
¢7
26

EN SPACE
U
U

J
8
U
N
U

ADD THIN
J
8
7

ADD THIN
EN SPACE

15
11
35

PF-Il-1

J
U

8
S
N
U

15
12

3¢

ADD THIN

J
8

26
15
13

EM SPACE

TAPE FEED
EN SPACE
7
A
J
U

THIN

15
16

PF-IM

¢5

15
17

U
PF-~

26
16

J
U

¢5
37

EM
F

QUAD RIGHT

TAPE FEED
TAPE FEED

'5
26
16

¢~

35
17

'626
16
fA1

ADD THIN

J
8

26
16

I
D
U
A

J
U
E

3¢

EN SPACE

'235

U
U

16
16

2¢
¢¢

¢¢
12
35
17
¢1

26
16

SPACE

13
32

¢¢

¢¢
26
16

S
J
U

RETURN

2g1

THIN

¢1

EN SPACE
7

¢2

J
U

26
16

¢7

21
¢1
1¢

QUAD LEFT

15
33

ADD THIN

J
U

26
15

II PAGE REVISION

26
16

ADD THIN
RETURN
TAPE FEED
TAPE FEED

16
11
26

22
16

3¢

EN SPACE
7
THIN

N
U

IPAG E18

ELEVATE
QUAD LEFT

ADD THIN

26
16
¢4

J
U

ADD THIN

1¢

15
15
35
16
16

D
U

8
8

SPACE BAND

I
F

26
16

26
16
'3

17
14
32
17

THIN
SP BAND
J
U

SP BAND

RETURN

TAPE FEED
TAPE FEED

I
S
J

26
16
14

35
17
12
26
16

26
16

7
I

2¢

17
14
32
15

SPACE BAND

1¢

l',¢
¢¢

II PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Title

Processor Applicability

All

Tech Tip TYPSET

TYPESETTING BOOTSTRAP LOADERS (Continued)
Author

~'s

Rev

Approval

J
7
I
F

OCTAE,
26

7
SPACE BAND

14
32
17

1¢
26

SPACE BAND
EN SPACE
7

1¢
35

I
J

ADD THIN

D
U

$
J

8
S

26
22

16
¢7
26

Date

Bootstrap Loader
16
E
EM SPACE
13
EN SPACE
7
J
26
8
15
A
8
15
J
J
26
U
U
16
3
8
15
J
J
26
U
8
15
I
U
16
J
D
22
U
U
16
ELEVATE
S
12
EN SPACE
J
7
26
8
15
ADD THIN
7
17
J
N
U

THIN

¢3
26
16

14
26
16
¢4

35
17

SPACE BAND
RETURN
TAPE FEED
TAPE FEED
J
U

ADO THIN
RETURN
TAPE FEED
TAPE FEED

¢5

26
16
¢¢

32
16

J
U

ELEVATE

¢4

J
U
A

26
16

EM SPACE
QUAD RIGHT
TAPE FEED
TAPE FEED

J
U

26
16

2¢

J
U

¢¢

THIN
RETURN
TAPE FEED
TAPE FEED

¢1

13
36
12
¢¢
26

!6¢
26
16

QUAD LEFT

THIN

SPACE DAND

¢6

33
16
¢1
26
16

167

31
1/1

91¢
26
16
1¢
2¢
¢¢

¢¢
26
16
11

2{6

¢!6

¢¢
26
16

J
U

EM SPACE

J
U

¢6

PF-LM

TAPE FEED

J
U

16
¢1

TAPE FEED

ADD THIN
TAPE FEED

33
16
13

¢2

TAPE FEED
QUAD LEFT

8
EM SPACE

7-31-72

3¢

Cross Reference

11
26
16

3¢

THIN

TC~l

16
¢1
26

N
U

Number

3¢

¢¢
26
16
13

¢¢

17
14

I
F

SPACE BAND

1¢

Page 19

momooma

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16 Bit

LJ I

18 Bit

36Bit

Option or Designator
TYPESET SOFTWARE

Tech Tip TYPESET
ERROR HALTS IN DEC TYPESETTING SOFTWARE
Numbe~FTWRE-TT-14
Processor Applicability
Cross Reference
Rev A
Author R. Hartz
All 18
Approval G. Chaisson Date 5/23/73

Title

I I I I I I

HOT METAL SYSTEMS
PROGRAM TITLE

LOCATION

Basic Bands
Basic No-Bands

AC CONTENTS

REASON

1577

Not pertinent

Memory error halt

554

Not pertinent

Memory error halt

Disk System Bands
(TC01)

0611
5204

Illegal Character
Disk Error Halt

Disk System No-Bands
(TCOl)

0611
5204

Illegal Character
Disk Error Halt

Disk Wires tripper
Bands (TCOl)

512
1376
2576
4316

Not
Not
Not
Not

Disk Wires tripper
No-Bands (TCOl)

612
1163
4321

Not pertinent
Not pertinent
Not pertinent

Memory error halt
Memory error halt
Disk error halt

Dectape Bands
(TC01)

0611
5171

Status B. Reg.

Illegal Character
DECtape Error Halt

DEC-tape No-Bands
(TC01)

0611
5171

Status B Reg.

Illegal Character
DEC tape Error Halt

DECtape Wires tripper
Bands (TC¢l)

612
1376
2576
4573

Not pertinent
Not pertinent
Not pertinent
Stat. Reg.B.

Memory error halt
Memory error halt
Programmer use halt
DEC tape error halt

DECtape Wirestripper
NO-Bands (TCOl)

612
1163
4572

Not pertinent
Not pertinent
Stat. Req.B.

pertinent
pertinent
pertinent
pertinent

Memory error halt
Memory error halt
Programmer use halt
Disk error halt

Memory error halt
Memory error halt
_ DEC tape error ha 1 t

COLD TYPE PROGRAMS
Fototronic 12~~ & TXT
Disk System
(TCOl)

I PAGE 450F

537

II PAGE REVISION

Stat Reg. B.

Dectape error halt

Not pertinent
Not pertinent

Disk error halt
Memory Error halt

II PUBLICATION DATE

May 1973

Tech Tip TypESET
(Cont'
)
TYPESETTING
SOFTWARE
Number SFTWRE-TT-14
ERROR HALTS IN DEC
Cross Reference
Rev A
Processor Applicability
Author R. Hartz
All \
5/23 /73
Approval G. Chaisson Date
8\
\

Title

I I

COLD TYPE PROGRAMS (Cont1nued)
PROGRAM TITLE

LOCATION

AC CONTENTS

REASON

Stat. Reg. B

DECtape error halt

Not pertinent

Memory error halt

Stat. Reg. B

DECtape error halt

Not pertinent
Not pertinent
Not pertinent

Disk error halt
Programmer use halt
Programmer use halt

Stat. Reg. B

DEC tape

44/67
4417

Not pertinent
Not pertinent

Programmer use halt
Programmer use halt

Linofi1m (TC01) Disk

544
726
3/6/64
3575

Stat. Reg. B
Not pertinent
Not pertinent
Not pertinent

DECtape error halt
Programmer use halt
Disk error halt
Memory error halt

Linofi1m Non-Disk

544
726
3/645

Stat. Reg. B
Not pertinent
Not pertinent

DECtape error halt
Programmer use halt
Memory error halt

560 (TC01) Disk

555
3/6/64
3/664
4364
4415

Stat. Reg. B
Not pertinent
Not pertinent
Not pertinent
Not pertinent

DECtape error halt
Disk error halt
Memory error halt
Programmer use halt
Programmer use halt

555

3/66/6
4364
4415

Stat. Reg. B
Not pertinent
Not pertinent
Not pertinent

DECtape error halt
Memory error halt
Programmer use halt
Programmer use halt

513 (TC01) Disk

555
3/6/64
3/656
4407
4417

Stat. Reg. B
Not pertinent
Not pertinent
Not pertinent
Not pertinent

DECtape error halt
Disk error halt
Memory error halt
Programmer use halt
Programmer use halt

513 (TC01) Non-Disk

555
3.06.0
44/67
4417

Stat. Reg. B
Not pertinent
Not pertinent
Not pertinent

DECtape error halt
Memory error halt
Programmer use halt
prog~ammer use halt

Fototronic 12/6/6 & TXT
(TCOl) Non-Disc

537
3512

713 Display Ad (TC01)
Disk System

54/6
3/6/64
44.06
4416

713 Display Ad NonDisk TC01

560

TCOl Non-Disk

54,

Page 46

erro~

halt

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

momooma

12 Bit

Ii)

16 Bit

18 Bit

TitleERROR HALTS IN DEC TYPESETTING SOFTWARE
Processor Applicability
Author R. Hartz
All \ 8\
ApprovalG. Chaisson
\
\
\
\

36 Bit

Option or Designator
TYPESET SOFTWARE

0
-1 Tech Tip TYPESET

NumbeISFTWRE-TT-14
Cross Reference
Rev A
Date 5/23/73

COLD TYPE PROGRAMS (continued)
PROGRAM TITLE

LOCATION

AC CONTENTS

REASON

Classified Ad II
Storage

1."43

Disc status
Not pertinent

Disc error halt
Illegal TTY command
in class ad storage
mode

Disc status
Status B reg.

Disc error halt
DEC tape error

Jl351

Compugraphic 9Jl."Jl
Class Ad III version
No.3 (713 display
used)
Display Exec.Prog.
Field Jl

DECtape bootstrap
error
Core patch halt SW=
JlJlJl%
Disk error at start
Disk illegal sub.
sector
Dectape error(AC=
status B)
Disk transfer error
Disk full error

741Jl
7422
%232
2113
2535
1737
3627

Class Executive Program
741Jl
Field ."

7422

%
%

."232
2135

254%

1741

I PAGE 4 OF

II PAGE REVISION A

DECtape bootstrap
error
Core patch halt
SW=OOOO
Disk error at start
Disk illegal subsector
Dectape error (AC=
status B)
Disk transfer error

~ PUBLICATION DATE

May 73

Title

ERROR HALTS IN DEC TYPES
Processor Applicability

All

1 81

I I I

Author R. Hartz
Approval G. Chaisson

Rev
Date

Tech Tip TYPESET
Number SFTWRE-TT-14
Cross Reference
A

5/23/73

COLD TYPE PROGRAMS (continued)
PROGRAM TITLE

LOCATION

Updating Program
Field 1

1221

AC CONTENTS

REASON
Disk header area
full
Disk failure on read

2l~

Initializing Program
Field 1

Disk compare error
Disk failure on wrib

Translating Program
Field 1

Ad found in class
Disk full error
Sad ad on dectape

1
1

Kill program
Field 1
List Program
Field 1
Edit Prograr,1
Field 1

~345

Disk failure on read

~213

Disk failure on read

210
537

Disk failure
Disk full error

255
307

Disk failure
Disk full error

332

Disk failure

210

Disk failure

243

Disk failure

Proof program
Field 1

210

Disk failure

Size command
Field 1

243

Disk failure

Sort program
Field 1
1

Run Count Update
Field 1
Skip Key Update
Field 1
Dump Program
Field 1

DIGITAL

EQUIPMENT

CORPORATION

Page 48

mamaomo
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

Q!I

18 Bit

0 I

36Bit

TYPESET SOFTWARE

Tech Tip TYPESET
ERROR HALTS IN DEC TYPESETTING SOFTWARE (Con't INumber SFTWRE-TT-14
Processor Applicability

All

16 Bit

Option or Designator

I8 I I I J I I

Rev

Author

R. Hartz
Approval G. Chaisson

Cross Reference

Date 5/23 /73

AUXILIARY PROGRAMS
PROGRAM TITLE

LOCATION

Disk Termination

6311
6365

Stat. Reg. B
Not pertinent

DECtape error halt
Disk error halt

6112
5546
7444
7554

Stat. Reg. B
Not pertinent
Stat. Reg. B
Not pertinent

DECtape error halt
Disk error halt
DECtape error halt
Disk error halt

674

Stat. Reg. B
Not pertinent

DECtape error halt
Disk error halt

1252
1534

Zero
Stat .. Reg. B
Not pertinent

Insertion error
DECtape error halt
Disk error halt

Not pertinent

Disk error halt

TRMBLK (TC01Non-Disk)

6322

Stat. Reg. B

DECtape error halt

SYSLOD (TC01Non-Disk

7443

Stat. Reg. B

DECtape error halt

PA'rCHB (TCOINon-Disk

674

Stat. Reg. B

DECtape error halt

EDTSYS (TCOINon-Disk

1523

Stat. Reg. B

DECtape error halt

ZSTATS (TCOlNon-Disk

250

Stat. Reg. B

DECtape error halt

UPDATE (TC01Non-Disk

327

Not pertinent

Operation done halt

COPSYS (TCOlNon-Disk

212
314

Not pertinent
Not pertinent
Stat. Reg. B

Programmer use halt
Comparison error halt
DECtape error halt

PSTATS (TC01Non"Disk

323

Stat. Reg. B

DECtape error halt

(Teal)

Disk System Loader
(TC01)

TC01 - Disk Patcher
TCOI - Disk Dictionary Editor
TC01-Disk Zero
Production Stats

IPAGE

4 9

AC CONTENTS

303

II PAGE REVISION

" PUBLICATION DATE

REASON

May

1973

Title

ERROR HALTS IN DEC TYPESETTING SOFTWARE (Cont)
Processor Applicability

All

I IB J
I I I I

Author

-R. Hartz
Approval G. Chaisson

Rev
Date

Tech Tip TYPESET
Number SFTWRE-TT-14
Cross Reference
0

02/02/73

AUXILIARY PROGRAMS (Continued)
PROGRAM TITLE

LOCATION

AC CONTENTS

REASON

DSKTRM (552 Disk

6314
6367

Stat. Reg. B
Not pertinent

DECtape error halt
Disk error halt

TRMBLK (552 NonDisk)

6325

Stat. Reg. B

DECtape error halt

DSKLOD (552 Disk)

7450
7544
5546
6123

Stat. Reg. B
Not pertinent
Not pertinent
Not pertinent

DECtape error halt
Disk error halt
Disk error halt
DECtape error halt

SYSLOD (552 NonDisk)

7447

Stat. Reg. B

DECtape error halt

PATCHB (552 Disk)

734
755

Stat. Reg. B
Unit Number

DEC tape error halt
DEC tape error halt

PATCHB (5 2 NonDisk)

734
755

Stat. Reg. B
Unit number

DECtape error halt
DECtape block error

EDTSYS (552 Disk)

1252
1724

Not pertinent
Stat. Reg. B

Storage error halt
DECtape error halt

EDTSYS (552 NonDisk)

1252
1724

Not pertinent
Stat. Reg. B

Storage error halt
DECtape error halt

ZTATS (552 Disk)

Not pertinent

Disk error halt

ZSTATS (552 NonDisk)

254

Stat. Reg. B

DECtape error halt

UPDATE (552 Disk)

327
353
742

Not pertinent Operation done halt
Address of err. Various errors
DECtape block error
Unit Number

UPDATE (552 NonDisk)

204
327
353
741

Not pertinent
Not pertinent
Addr. of error
unit number

Programmer use halt
Operation done halt
Various errors
DECtape block error

COPSYS (552 Disk)

212
345
356

Not pertinent
Not pertinent
Stat. Reg. B

Programmer use halt
Comparison error
DECtape error halt

DIGITAL

EQUIPMENT

CORPORATION

Page

momoomo
Title

All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit []

16 Bit

['1

18 Bit

0 I

36 Bit

Option or Designator

TYPESET SOFTWARE

Tech Tip TYPESET
ERROR HALTS IN DEC TYPESETTING SOFTWARE (Contin'd Number Software-TT-14
Processor Applicability
Cross Reference
Rev
Author
0
R Hartz
8
Approval G. Chaisson Date 02/02/73
1

I I I I I

PROGRAM TITLE
PSTATS

(552 Disk)

STOCK EDITOR

LOCATION

AC CONTENTS

233

Not pertinent

Disk error halt

770
2172

Addr. of err.
Stat. Reg. B

Various errors
DECtape errors halt

Title

PHOTON PACESETTER INPUT TAPES
Processor Applicability
Author
All
J. Gleeson
Approval G. Chaisson
8's1111

I I I I I

REASON

Tech Tip
Number
Rev
Date

TYPSET
SFTWRE-TT 15
Cross Reference

02/02/7~

Introduction
The purpose of this Tech Tip is to enable the user to
read computer output tapes accepted by the Pacesetter
series of Photo composition machines.
An understanding
of the code structure is helpful when trying to differentiate between bad output due to Pacesetter malfunction
or bad output due to the Typeset 8/11 system malfunction.

Tape Format
The Pacesetter uses the TTS code structure.
Commands
consist of a bell code followed by an alpha-numeric
character and up to four (4) digits containing the paramet.ers of the command.
Not all of the Pacesetter functions will be listed in the
table since they are not all necessary in computer-mode.

IPAGE

II PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

February 1973

Title
All

8's

PHOTON PACESETTER INPUT TAPES (Continued)
Processor Applicability

hll I I I I I
3.

Author

Approval G.

Function Codes (*

Chaisson

Date 02/02/73

Bell Code)

Function

Rev

J. Gleeson

Tech Tip TYPSET
Number SFTWRE TT 15
Cross Reference

Flag Code

Type Face

Line Length

Point Size

Leading

Add Lead

No Flash (next character)
Cancel Flash (Until EOL or "Allow
Flash" )
Allow Flash
Zero width (Next Character)
Supercase Characters
Quad Right
One Unit Space
Kern (~ unit for each code)
Stop

Followed By
1 digit for
Typeface 1-8
4 digiti 2 for
picas, 2 for
points
2 digit; for
sizes 05-72
3 digits; ~ pts
of lead 0-255
3 digits; ~ pts
of lead 0-255

*u
*~

*y
*q
*1
*m
*T.F.

Desired Character
Desired Character

Spacing
In addition to the EM, EN and THIN and ONE UNIT space noted
above, there are four (4) other sizes of fixed spacing used.

three (3) larger spaces (undefined at this stage) called
by *7 *8 *9.

unit space called by *5

Quadded/Justified Lines
All justified lines and Quad Right Lines will be ended with a
Quad Left and Return (33,20).
Spacing necessary to justify
the line will be included in the line. Quad Left and Quad
Center Lines will end the same but will not output the spacing
on the right hand side.

DIGITAL

EQUIPMENT

CORPORATION

Page -5 2..

CPL

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

mamaomD
Title

16 Bit

18 Bit

36Bit

TYPESET
SOFTWARE

Tech Tip TYPSET
Number SFTWRE-TT-1S
Cross Reference
Rev 0
Date 02/02/73

PHOTON PACESETTER INPUT TAPES (Continued)
Processor Applicability

All

8's1111

12 Bit

Option or Designator

Author

I I

J. Gleeson

Approval G. Chaisson

Example

••

••• •••
• ••
•• ••• •••••
•• •• • • • •• • • ••• •
• ••• • •• ••••• • • • • •
•••• ••• •• • • • ••••••
•
•••••
•• ••••
• •••••••
•• ••••••
••• •
e

I PAGE

•

000

I 3

.2..

o •

o e 0

S-

000

• • ·- - - - -

I ~. '1

I~e,+-

Type Face #8

*t8

Line Length 11.6 pica

Point Size 10 points

*p10

Leading

Shift N - Unshift

Interword Spacing-EM plus One unit

Quad Left, Return

II PAGE REVISION

1106

*v021

points
0

II PUBLICATION DATE

February J..973

•• •

o=F I~

J...,.t\ ~

10~

-0

momoamo
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

Qql

16 Bit

18 Bit

rnl

TU20
36Bit ~

MAG TAPE, TU20/TYPE TRANSPORTS REPLACEMF.NT
PINCH ROLLERS
Processor Applicability
Author

All ;1
8's

Approval

Cummins

Option or Designator

Date

lTe~h Tip
Number

TU20-TT-l
Cross Refer~nl!e

Rev

06-06-72

When ordering replacement Pinch Roller assemblies for 580,
TU20 or 545, you will be supplied with the type that are
on the TU30.
This roller is identical, except for a "lip"
which will cause it to rotate continually when power is
applied.
This feature improves start/stop timing, and reduces tape
damage and end play problems of the roller and bearings.
The 3030 rollers do work (field tested by Field Service).
The .004" gap remains the same. Because of the superior
characteristics of this roller, we are stocking only the
1030 Pinch Rollers.
Title
All

Tech Tip
Number TU20-TT""2

MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT TU20, TU20A
Processor Applicability

Cross Reference

Rev

Author
Approval

CPL

Date

The drive function time program and specifications have been
specified for a seven track system. These values are subject
to change with a nine track drive due to head gap spacing.
The revised specifications have been provided to Production
Engineering and will be available soon.

TU20 manual specified rewind time as less than 3ms, should
read 3 minutes.

The reason for supplying the read and write shutdown delay
values in the TU20 specification and in PDP-8! Handbook, page
181 and 183, is to define the manimum time elapses, the drive
begins to decelerate and will be given the necessary time to
settle down (5 minutes).

NOTE:

PAGE 1

Continue mode of operation is allowable on the same drive
even if a change of direction is given. The control automatically stops the drive and changes direction.

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Jul

CPL
Title

Processor Applicability
A;

Tech Tip
Number TU20-TT-

TU20 Pulse ~ermination
-

I I I I I I I

Author Joe Godbout
Approval W. Cummins

Cross Reference

Rev 0
Date

06-06-72

It has been found that the optimum termination for the RECORD
DATA pulse on the TU20, for a multiple transport system, would
be one terminator on the first transport on the bus, and one
terminator on the last transport on the bus. Currently each
transport is equipped with the terminator.
In all future systems only the first and last transports on the
bus will be terminated.
Title

Tech Tip
Number

ADJUSTMENT OF G084 in TU20
Processor Applicability

;" I I I I I I I

Author
Approval W. Cummins

Rev

0
Date 08/17/72

TU20-TT-4
Cross Reference

New GOB4's may require adjustment in the field. G084 adjustment will
be required in transports which have heads replaced.
DO NOT RETURN THESE MODULES TO THE PLANT.
DO NOT ADJUST THEM ACCORDING TO THE MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Write a tape of all ones at 556 BPI, odd parity.
Look at pins on each G084 module.
Adjust each G084 output to 1.8 volts.
Run all applicable tests and check for errors.
Optimization may be necessary since the brand of tape will
affect amplitude.

Page

momoamB t--F_IE_LD~S~E_RV_IC_E~T:--r-EC_H_NI_CA___L__M_A_NU_A-=--iL
12 Bit
Title
All

16 Bit

-I

18 Bit

0 I

36 Bit

18 181

I 8d I I I

PAGE 1

TU25
Tech Tip
Number

Rev

Author

Option or Designator

INCOMPATIBILITY BETWEEN OLD AND NEW REVISION
REEL SERVO BOARDS IN PEe TRANSPORTS
Processor Applicability

CPL

Chuck Sweeney
0
Approval Frank Purcell Date 07/31/72

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

TU25-TT-l
Cross Reference

TU28-TT-l

July 1972

CP1-

mOmDDma

12 Bit

16 Bit

18 Bit

36 Bit

Incompat.ibility Between Old and New Revision
Reel Servo Boards in PEC Transports
Processor Applicability
Author C. Sweeney

Title
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

I 81 81 18L I I I I

Option or Designator
TU28

!8J

Rev

Tech Tip
Number TU28-TT-l
Cross Reference
0

ApprovalFrank Purcell Date 07/31/72

At present there are three different revision Reel Servo Boards
in use. They are:
a)

1¢¢129-¢1:

Used on earlier module with potentiometer controlled
tape tension arms~ it cannot be used in place of the
following boards:

1¢¢9l3-¢1:

Used in later models with potentiometer controlled
tape tension arms~ it cannot be used on units with
photo-sensing control of tape tension arms~ it can
be used as a replacement for the l¢¢129-¢l after
the following wiring change on the PEC unit:
ADD:

J20l pin 18 to J202 pin 20

1¢¢9l3-¢lE: Used on models with photo-sensing control of tape
tension (it has two additional lOOK OHM pots on it,
set back from the +SV and -5V pots, for controlling
the response of the photo amplifiers) ~ it can be
used as a replacement for (b) by setting the two
lOOK OHMs before installing the board~ it can also
be used in place of (a) by setting both lOOK OHM
pots to 5K OHMs and adding a jumper between J20l
pin 18 and J202 pin 20.

Failure to follow the above directions when installing a revision
1009l3-01E in older transports may cause the Reel Servo amplifiers
to be overdriven and fuse F20l to blow (SCR may also be damaged.)
Once the pots have been adjusted to 5K OHMs, apply a coating of
pot dope to set them.
This can be incorporated in the PDP-8/81/8L Tech Tip Notebook.

Title
All

CAPSTAN MOTOR BRUSH WEAR (Tu22/25/28)
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I
IPAGE 1

Author

Sweeney

Approval F. Purcell

II PAGE REVISION .

lTech Tip
Number TU28-TT-2
Cross Reference
Rev 0
TU22-TT-3
Date 11/20/72

II PUBLICATI.--=O-=-N:. . D:=-A_T_E_-.!:!N~ov..:::..e~mb~€;;.:r--=1;;.;;;9..:.7_2_ _

CPL

mamaama

Processor Applicability

lSI

I srl I I I

C~STAN

Title
All

12 Bit

16Bit

18Bit

I I I

PAGE 1

I I

TU25
Tech Tip
Number

Rev
Chuck Sweeney
0
Approval Frank Purcell Date 07/31/72
Author

MOTOR BRUSH WEAR (TU22/25/28)

Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

36 Bit ~

INCOMPATIBILITY BETWEEN OLD AND NEW REVISION
REEL SERVO BOARDS IN PEC TRANSPORTS

Title
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

Author

Approval F. Purcell

PAGE REVISION

Rev

Chuck Sweeney

Date

Cross Reference

TU2S-TT-l

Tech Tip
Number TU2S-TT-2
Cross Reference
0

11/20/72

PUBLICATION DATE

TU2S-TT-l

TU22rTT-3

November 1972

(,PT

momaama
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

(8)1

16 Bit

18 Bit

Processor Applicability

I I I

Author E. Luttig
Approval

Cummins

TU55

36Bit ~

Compatability TU55's

All
8's;1

Option or Designator

Rev
Date

Tech Tip
Number TU55-TT-l
Cross Referente
0

6/7/72

Write enable compatability with TUSS's.
There are approximately one hundred and fifty (150) TU56's in
the field containing the "B" revision "Switch Control Panel"
(assembly 70-06222). Transports containing these control
panels will have difficulty enabling the "Write" function if
connection in any of the following system configurations.

A TCOI or TC02 control, a TUS6 w/B Rev. Switch Control
Panels and more than two (2) TUSS's.

A TCOl or TC02 control, a TUS6 w/B Rev. Switch Control

Panels and more than one additional TU56 w/C Rev. Switch
Panels.

An additional problem will be generated if the RI07 modules
in slot BII of the TUSS's have been replaced by Sl07 modules
in which case a TUS6 w/B Rev. Switch Control Panels will not
operate reliably in conjunction with any TUSS's.
If any of these circumstances occur the problem
may be resolved by replacing Rev. B panels by
Rev. C Panels.

NOTE:

C Revision panels are direct replacements for B
revision panels.

/mt

IPAGE 1

II PAGE

REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

CPL
Title
All

Tech Tip
Number TUSS-TT- 2
Cross Reference
Rev 0

TUSS INFORMATION
Processor Applicability
!
I

I I I I I I

Author
Approval

W. Cummins

Date 6/6/72

Problem I

When a TU55 is set to
when other transports
creeps about 3/4" per
other transport, TU56
observed only on TC¢a

unit a (¢) tape creep is evident
in the system are being used. Tape
hour running DECTREX on one (1)
or TU55. This problem has been
controller.

Causel

When Status A or the TC~a changes value, under program
control, unit ¢ is selected momentarily causing the select
line for unit ¢ (a) to "glitch". This glitch appears at
the two And gates, at location B¢6 in the TU55, and is
Anded with the Forward (F~l) and reverse (REV) signals
causing the Direction F/F at B¢a to toggle as the FWD/REV
bit in the Status A register is changing.
"
Because direction is toggling and Brake Enable is true
and delay (0) is true, the two solenoid drivers at B12R
and S cause the left and right brakes to toggle. Because
there is uneven tape tenSion, the tape creeps as the
brakes are turned on and o~f.

Fixe

Install a 0664 diode as follows,
B06F

14""--0

B0 8 J

This diode prevents the Direction F/F from changing states
when Motion (¢) is true.
This fix in no way hampers operation of . the manual switches
that wind "or rewind tape.
This can be incorporated in the PDP-a/8I/8L Tech Tip Notebook

Pag e 2

CPt

momDomo

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16 Bit

[gJ1

18 Bit

[8]1

Option or Designator
TU56

36Bit

Tech Tip TU56-TT-l
TU56 MOTORS FROM DIFFERENT VENDORS NOT
Number
COMPATIBLE
Processor Applicability
Cross Reference
Author Don Herbener
Rev
0
Approval Bill Cummins Date 06/01/72

Title

~I I I I I I I

There are two (2) primary vendors of motors for the TU56. ELINCO
supplies two types of motors; one is a gray color, the second type
is a gold color motor. Any of the above are acceptable. Another
vendor, Ashland, was tried and supplied a black motor. These
motors should not have been released to the field; if any are noticed,
they should be replaced.
Motors may be mixed with a transport but not within a drive. If a
motor has to be replaced it should be ordered by vendor name as well
as by part number.
Black Motors from MOTRONICS are good.
TU56 SWITCH FAILURES

Title

~II

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

Author

Derek Oldham

Approval Harold Long

Rev

Tech Tip TU56-TT-2
Number
Cross Reference
0

Date 06/06/72

Problem "write Enable" switches failing soon after installation.
Correction: Clean the switches with freon or isopropyl alcohol.
G847 MODULE --- ECO #6

Title

~II I

Tech TiPTU56-TT-3
Number
Cross Reference
0

Processor Applicability

Author

I I I I I I

Approval Bill Cummins Date 06/1/72

Harry Drab

Rev

The transistors called out in the module ECO referenced above
have two (2) possible pin configurations and can be inserted
backwards.
The transistors in question are DEC part numbers l5l~7~5 and
l5l~7~6.
The two (2) presently accepted sources are Motorola
(MPSA~5 and MPSA55, respectively), and General Electric (GPSA~5
and GPSASS, again, respectively). The pin configurations for
the Motorola and G.E. transistors are shown at the end of this
memo. Noto that the flattened part of the transistor cannot be
used as a reference when the transistor is inserted.
BOTTOM
VIEW

/mt
IPAGE 1

Motorola-MPS

II PAGE REVISION

GE - GPS

II PUBLICATION DATE

June 1972

Title
All

Tech Tip
Number TU56-TT- 4

TU56 INTERMITTENT ERRORS
Processor Applicability
\S \SI\SE\SL\lS\11\12

Author

B. Nunley

Approval

w. Cummins

Rev
Date

Cross Reference

6/6/72

There are numerous reports of intermittent errors (timing, mark track,
parity or data) on TU56.
The resultant investigation led to numerous
possibilities for the cause of these errors.
Not every TU56 exhibits
the errors at t'his time, but the potential is present for all of them.
The most probable cause is poor grounding technique.
Grounds are
made through painted surfaces and me~hanical mountings.
This Tech
Tip will give temporary methods to cure the problems until ECO's are
generated.
Do things in this order:
1)

Clean guides and head.
Disassemble the guides and clean the
wear plate, its spring and their respective slots.
Check
for correct assembly of wear plate and spring.

Make sure all electrical adjustments are set correctly.

Ground the front panel by running a 30 gauge termipoint jumper
from pin C2 in an unused slot in the B row, to one of the screws
holding the slide to the right side of the front panel.

These three steps should cure the random problems; however, there is
the final step if they did not:
1)

Remove the TU56 from the cabinet.

Remove the G848 modules and cut the etch going to pin AC2 and to
pin BC2.

Run a jumper from a common point of the two c~pacitors in the 725
to the ground lug on the back of the 725 power supply where the
logic power comes in.

Remove one screw from each surface on the power supply and scrape
the paint from under it, then replace the screw tightly.
Do
this also for the AC recepticals on the 725.

If the problem persists, you probably have a skew problem which must
be corrected by deskewing the guides or the head or both.

Page -2-

CPL

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

mamaama

12 Bit

Gil

16 Bit ~

18 Bit ~

36 Bit

Processor Applicability
Is ISE lSI ISL

11511~

Au~or

TU56

(g)

Title TU56 INTERMITTENT ERROR (Continued)
All

Option or Designator

Robert Nunley

Tech TiPTU56-TT-4
Number
Cross Reference
0

Rev

12 Approval Frank Purce11Date 07/31/72

Motor slow to come up to speed:
If you have a motor which seems to have a slow dirve in one direction,
the cause may not be a bad motor.
This motor exerts a force of
about 60 inch/ounces, therefore any undue binding because of misalignment
of hubs and guides can cuase the motor to appear to be bad.
To check,
run a full reel of tape onto the forward reel watching the inside
edges of the spool to see that there is some clearance between the
spool interior sides and the tape edges.
If this clearance is not
present, the tape will ride up one side or the other, indicating a
misalignment which can cause the drag.
Do the same in the reverse
direction.
If, in either direction, there is the build up on the
edge remove that hub and adjust it so that there is clearance between
the tape and sppols.
For information only:
The drag may also be caused by the bushings or spring mounted on the
motor shaft.
These bushings are there to give a balancing drag and
to prevent the tape from creeping to the full reel when no motion
is ordered either in local or remote. The bushings are oil impregnated
and no cleaning of them should be attempted.
If after all else fails
to eliminate the slow motor and you feel you must replace the motor
also replace the bushings and spring. So with each motor (12-9602)
order also the following:
Bushing 12-9926

2 each

Spring 12-9917 1 each
Connector Pins 12-9370 4 each
Also check for loose connections in the motor mate-n-lock connectors.

Title

DECTAPE TRANSPORT CABLES
Processor Applicability

All

I SIlsLlsEI

Title

C. Sweeney

Approval

W. Cummins

Tech Tip
Number TU56-TT- 6

Compatabi1ity TUSSiS
Processor Applicability

All
X

I I I

Author

CPL
\ Tech Tip
Number TU56-TT- S
0
Cross Referen~
Rev
TCOB-TT-3
Date 6/6/72

I I
IPAGE 3

I I I

Author

E. Luttig

Approval

W. Cummins

/I PAGE REVISION

Rev
Date

6/7/72

II PUBLICATION DATE

Cross Reference
TU55-TT-l

July 1972

Title

Tech Tip
Number TU56-TT-7

TU56 PROBLEMS
Processor Applicability

Author
Approval

Rev

Cross Reference

Date

Investigating the following four areas can save you much
time when investigating problem reports involving slow
turn around and/or up to speed discrepancies.
A.

Dry bushings in anti-creep clutch.
1.

The bushings, part number 12-09926, are ordered as
oil impregnated. In the past one order of bushings
was received which were plain brass, not oil impregnated. It appears that a few (approx. 100) of these
were installed in TU56's before the error was caught.
These plain brass bushings are easy to spot.
a.

They will not have any oily film on their surface.

In appearance they will be very shiny and will have
grooves worn into the surface of the bushing that
contacts the hub.

Solution: Replace with new bushings which are oil
impregnated. The new oil impregnated bushing will
have many small black pits in its surface.

Incorrect size of springs (DEC Part Number 12-09917) used
in the anti-creep clutch.
1.

The easy way to check for this problem is to first make
sure that both bushings in the anti-creep clutch assembly
are oil impregnated.
a.

With the anti-creep clutch installed and the hub
correctly installed (use gauge) put the RemoteLocal-Off switch to the Local position allowing
motor time to get up to speed and then turn switch
to "Off". If the hub comes to an abrupt stop, less
than two revolutions, you may have an oversize spring.
The part of the spring that is most critical is the
tip that fits into the lock ring in the mounting surface of the motor.
If you do not have a new spring
it is possible to bend this tip slightly, effectively
reducing its length. Do not attempt to bend the
spring material too much as it will fracture.

Hub Set Screws
1.

If, for any reason, you remove a plastic reel hub from a
DECtape transport replace the set screws with new ones
and be sure that the set screws are DEC Part #90-08382-10. - ,
NO OTHER TYPE WILL CORRECTLY HOLD THE HUB!

Page -4-

mamaDma
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

(!II

16 Bit

18Bit

0 I

36Bit

Author

All ISEI

fie
('!

Wallack/

Rev

"'h",~."..". ........

Approval W. Cununins

Date

VC8E

VC8E-Lab 8E - USE AND MODIFICATION

Processor Applicability

Option or Designator

Tech TipVC8E TTI1
Number
Cross Reference
0

7-31-72

On many occasions customers do not purchase a scope from DEC to go
with their VC8E: The following information is an attempt to aid in
getting the customers system up and running.
(Notei modifications
to standard DEC modules to accommodate a customers scope are no
longer DEC's responsibility.)
The VC8E display controller was designed to accommodate the VR14,
Tektronix 602 and the RMS03 scopes.
However, with certain modifications the VC8E can interface to many other scope and plotters as
well. The following guidelines must be taken into consideration
before attempting to control a scope that has not been specified by
DEC.
A.

Intensification Pulse
1.

Pulse width - the VC8E can supply a 1 usec pulse width.
However, to avoid reflection on long cables, a 200 nsec rise
time (fall time if negative) is incorporated into the pulse
width. Therefore, the width is defined from the start of
the pulse to the completion.

+-'1."

Z.V

--.I

Many scopes other than the ones mentioned above require
longer pulse widths.
As an example, some storage scopes
require approximately a 5 to 6 usec pulse width. The VC8E
cannot accommodate such scopes unlessthe.user changes the 1
use cpu 1 s e g en e r at 0 r ( 0 n M86 9 ) t 0 a 1 a r g e r val u e . T his
would require changing the capacitor (M869 C23) to another
value which is appropriate to the user's application.
All
scope manuals should define pulse width.
(Calculation of
the new value of C23 should be done using the Fairchild 9601
IC spec sheet.)
2. Polarity - The VC8E contain provisions to change the polarity
of the output signal by a switch on the M869 module.
Improper
value of the intensify polarity will result in signal blanking
at the wrong times.
(Retraces may be seen).

(PAGE 1

II PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

July 1972

Voltage - the VC8E can generate pulse voltages from +4V to -2V.
It can also. with the removal and addition of certain jumpers
(WI & W2) on the M885 module. generate a +4V to -lOY voltage
swing.
However, one should note that the rise and fall times
will be greater.
In many cases, the intensify pulse input
requirements to various scopes are 0 to IV.
An external adjustment on the scope or a special attenuating network would
have to be used.
This is the user's responsibility and must
be considered before attempting to interface.
As in the case
of the Tektronix 602, DEC sells a VM03 kit which includes
mounting hardware, and attenuating resistors and capacitors.
The Tektronix 602 has provisions in its circuitry for the
addition of external components.
However, this may not be
true of other scopes.

....--....

X and Y Outputs

Voltage - the voltages generated by the X and Y outputs of
the VC8E are + and -5 va Its.
"Thi s cannot be modified. II
The user must have external attenuators or an internal scope
gain adjustment.
One must also note that many scopes call
for only positive voltage swings.
However, usually an off~et
position can be adjusted to correct input polarity problems.
(This adjustment must be internal to the scope.)

Settling time (control) - the VC8E is a scope control and
not a D/A converter.
The settling time from maximum deflection
full scale step is 4 usec.
Many scopes have faster settling
times than 4 usec.
The user in this case should use the
internal delay set by the option at its minimum value (6 usec).

Settling time (scope). - scope settling t~mes may vary from
I usec to 50 usec.
The VC8E was designed for the VRl4 and
Tektronix 602 (with VM03 option) as stated previously.
A
done flag will occur when either scope has reached its
settling time, internally timed on the VC8E (20 usee for the
VRl4 and 6 usec for Tektronix 602).
However, all scopes
differ somewhat in settling times.
The user must determine
if the VC8E time delay is adequate for his scope.
For slow
scopes, in excess of 20 usee, software delays may be incorporated in his system or the user may change the 20 usec
delay circuit by adding a larger capacitor for C24 on the
M869 and determining the value from the 9601 spec sheet.

Drive
Careful selection of cabling should be used.
The X and Y outputs
are capable of driving loads greater than lK in parallel with
.5000 pf of capacitance.
That is, 100 ft. of cable at SO pf/ft.

External Controls
The VRl4 has a 2 channel input whereby the user can select a
channel by setting a bit in the status register.
This signal is
usually not used by other scopes.
However. the user may be
able to use it as a pen up, pen down capability on an XY plotter.
The output signal is zero to +5 volts with a 10 rna source at
+5V ~nd a 30 rna sink current at ground.
This bit can also be
as a signal for partially controlling a storage scope.

Page 2

(

Ground Logic
The analog signals that are p~esent at the output of the VC8E
are the analog voltages, the analog ground and the logic ground
(shield).
When using differential inputs, the analog voltage
and analog gnd must be used.
When using single ended inputs
use only the analog voltage and logic gnd.
At no time connect
the analog gnd to the system ground.
In other words, beware
of ground loops.

VC8E Restrictions
It can only

The VC8E cannot control storage scopes fully.
plot points.

The VC8E can use two different rOT device codes 05 and 15.

Maximum of 2 VC8E controller in I system.

The responsibility to interface to various scopes will rest with
the customer.
Following these quidelines will enable the user to
accomplish this successfully.

Page 3

momaoma

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16 Bit

18 Bit

Title

Extraneous Light Pen Interrupt

All

Processor Applicability

Author

I I I I I I

Approval

lSI

36Bit

Rev

Option or Designator
vcaI

Tech Tip
Number vc a I -TT_l
Cross Reference
0

W. Cummins Date 7-31-72

If a vcaI is installed without the 370 Light Pen, it is necessary
that D03V2 be grounded. If this point is allowed to float extraneous
interrupts will occur when instructions 6054 and 6064 are ~enerated.
Another source of this problem is faulty assembly of the M701 in that
transistor Q5 is inserted into incorrect noles.
Title
All

\ Tech Tip VCaI-TT-2
Number
Cross Reference
Rev 0

VCSI INSTALLATION NOTES

I sJ

Processor Applicability

I I I I

Author
Approval

W. Cummins

Date 7-31-72

There are errors concerning the VeSI in the small computer handbook.
a) The inteneify signals are variations in voltage level,
not duration.
b) The AG07 has an output of ~ to +2V, not ~ to -lOVe

The VeSI print (-0-1) indicates a reference voltage of -2 which
1s an error, reference voltage is -eva

ADD MODULES

INTO 81 SLOT
The configuration diagram print SI-0-24 (1-2-3-4) should be
referenced. to determine placement of the RM503 scope.

AG07
HJ24

M70l
HJ23

5) -veSI less 370 Light
vcecr with 370 Light
a) Connect wiring
b) To supply -15V
c) ~3V2 must not

AG07
HJ25

Pen - cable is part #70-5772.
Pen - cable is part *70-5771.
harness as shoWn in the wiring diagram below.
to Light Pen logic, connect H~3B2 to ~3B2.
be grounded for Light Pen operation.

If the Light Pen option is field installed on the veSI, a new bracket
with the logie, pen, and 10K control will be supplied. Th1s w1l1
replace the or1g1na1 bracket wh1ch 1s mounted beneath the RMS03.

PAGEl

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE Ju1

Title

\ Tech Tip
Number VCS I -TT-2

VCSI INSTALLATION NOTES (Continued)

All

Processor Applicability

lSI

I I I I I I

Cunnins '

Date

7-31-72

370 LIGHT PEN
~E---i

COAX--HORIZ.INPUT

COAX -

COAX

O.AY

BLACK----------------l

Approval

Cross Reference

SCOPE - RM503 or Iquh,.

W020B
003

81 CP

Rev

Author

~: F~ :

VERT. INPUT
CRT GRID (llIt_lIty)

C--'''.----A.f\/\r---1
IO:~':""" ,8

YELLOW------------------------~----J

-1-

Checkout
a)

The VeSl provides intensify voltages suitable for the
RM503 which may be inadequate for use with other scopes.
A service scope and the following programs will allow
verification of correct operation.

BEG 6074
6054
6075
6054
6076
6054
6077
6054

_,round

D03F2(Z)

yolts/em.
5u.-c:/em.

-10
-20

-SO

JMP BEG

BBO

7200
7040
6052
6062
JMP BEG +1

IIIIII II II

D03D2(X)

D03E2(Y)

+2 I volt/em.
u
lee/em.

1 11..-_" _orOUfl:

Page -2-

mamaoma
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

18 Bit

36Bit

I I I I I I

Au~or

Chaisson/Nunley

Approval N. Cummins

Date

VCSI

DISPLAYS VC81
Processor Applicability

All lSI

16 Bit

Option or Designator

Rev

\ Tech Tip VC8l-TT-3
Number
Cross Reference
0

7-31-72

Recently the VC8l intensity control module f.170l, Revision C,
has been found to have been improperly produced.
The problem
is that a DEC 664 diode was installed for D9 instead of the
proper DEC 670 diode.
This problem exists on M70l etch
revision C modules and can be corrected in the field by replacin g
D9 with the correct DEC 670 diode.
All spares modules should be checked for this problem and corrected
before attempting to use them. Hodules with this problem that are
installed and used \'lill be permanently damaged and no display will
exis t.
HODULES INSTALLED AND IN USE DO NOT HAVE THIS PROBLE11.

IpAGE 3

\I PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

momDoma
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

12 Bit

16Bit

0 I

VP8I
18Bit

36Bit

MODIFICATION OF CALCOMP PLOTTER CONTROL (M704)
Proceuor Applieability

Author

I I I I I I

All lSI

l~~!~~

Rev

Approval

Option or Designator

Cummins

Date

VPBI-TT-1
Cross Reference

7-31-72

Recently, difficulties have been experienced when attempting to
set up the M704 delays associated with slow-motion instructions.
The total duration of these delays should be approximately 70 ms
to allow sufficient time for the drum to settle into position.
The delay is set by a l.2K potentiometer (R53), in series with a
220 ohm resistor (R52) on the M704. To allow R53 to adjust through
a range of 60 to 80 ms, R52 must be changed to 680 ohms. The
following illustrations are in reference to Engineering Drawings
D-BS-VP8I-0-l and D-CS-M704-0-1.

70ms
SS
35

ms - Ol--d"-.....

PLTR lOT

JK2

IOP4

, INITlALlZE--..&...-_

(1)
D - - D 35
MB08 (-0) ~-....m_s_ _

o....

0- BS-VP81-0-1

TO 012
R53

015
R52

CW
R52= 680n t/4W 5% CC

220
680n

TO PIN10F E7
o-CS - M704-0-1

PAGE1 -

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

momDDma
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

GJI

[]) I

18 Bit

36Bit

I I I I I

Author

Rev

Approval

H. Long

VR20

HIGH VOLTAGE ARC-OVER
Processor Applicability

All

16 Bit

Option or Designator

Tech Tip
Number VR20-TT-l
Cross Reference
0

Date 8 - 1 7 - 7 2

High voltage ARC-OVER, usually occuring inside the high voltage
regulator may be caused by contamination of the porcelan standoff
insulators.
SOme insulators were assemblied with metal screwdrivers, and the inside of the insulator may have been scrtached
If ARC-OVER does occur, disassemble the regulator assembly and
visually inspect the interior of the standoffs for scratches
metal deposits, etc.
If they are damaged, simple cleaning
of the insulator with soap and water may cure the problem.
Otherwise, they must be replaced.
The correct part number is 12-10594
Needless to say, they should be disassemblied and reassembled
with only non-metallic screwdrivers. These are available from
the field service stockroom on special order, or preferrably local
purchase.
Title

VR20 INSTALLATION AND P.M. CHECK
Processor Applicability

All

1 8s 1114

1121

I I

Author Jeff Blundell
Approval

Rev

Tech Tip
Number VR20-TT-2
Cross Reference
~

Date 7/9/73

Shipping hazards and customer site environmental conditions may cause
internal damage to the high voltage switch (H.V.S.) circuit (700847l)
of the VR20 color point plot display.
Conditions have arisen, in the field, which dramatize the need for a
thorough examination of the H.V.S. circuit for possible component defects
and/or dirt build up. Component breakage or excessive dust can cause
arcing within the H.V.S. circuit resulting in even greater damage effective
over an extended period of time. What follows is a description of the
most common H.V.S. problems:
A.

COMPONENT BREAKAGE
There are four (4) long 20 Megohm resistors in the H.V.S. circuit
used as the series leg of a voltage divider/regulator network.
Due to extreme vibrational shock, one or more of these resistors
may crack resulting in a potential drop of between 5 and 10 KV.
across the crack of the broken resistorCs).
This difference of potential across the crack can cause arcing to
occur. There arcs tend to enlarge the crack causing an even greater

IPAGE lOF

II PAGE REVISION

II PUBLICATION DATE

Title

Tech Tip
Number

VR20 INSTALLATION AND P.M. CRECK

VR20-TT-Z
,.

Processor Applicability

All

BsP- ls 1 12 1 l-

I I

Author
Approval

Jeff Blundell
Date

Rev

Cross Reference
1

danger to the scope. This situation, depending upon the
position of the break on the r es i s tor, may extend to the
resistor bracket ultimately causing damage to the H.V.S.
cabling.
B.

EXCESSIVE DIRT
Dirt under certain instances, can act as a path of conductance.
It can be seen; therefore, that arcing may occur across a path
of dust particles which may cause indeterminate damage to the
scope.

Keeping the above problems in mind, it has become necessary to initiate
a special check which should be performed at every installation and
preventive maintenance:
1.

Remove the high voltage switch box per the procedure listed
in the VR20 User's Manual (DEC-12-HRSA-D) section 4.4.3.

Remove the bottom cover of the H.V.S. box.

Insure the H.V.S. circuit has discharged completely by
clipping a ground lead first to the R.V.S. box chassis and
then to all exposed areas of the H.V.S. circuit.
CAUTION:
step.

Use only one hand when performing the above

Clean the entire H.V.S. box of all dirt build up.

Observe the contents to check for broken or hairline cracked
components.

If any breaks are observed, replace the entire R.V.S.
assembly (7008471).

Install the good R.V.S. assembly per the reverse order of
the above procedure steps 1 and 2.

- ,

CPL
r-m-.-D-m-D-D-m-D---r-F-IEi."""'::D~S:-=E=R-:-:V:-:-:IC=-=E=--=T=E~C~H~N~IC-::-A~L-M-A-N-U-A-L---r-O-Pt-i:-nT-:r-sD-eS-i9n-a-to':":r:.........,
12 Bit

Title
All
8's

f[l

16 Bit ~

0 I

18 Bit

36 Bit

\ Tech Tip
Number VTOS-TT- 1
Cross Reference
Rev 0

VTOS - 8 FAMILY INTERCONNECTIONS
Processor Applicability
Author B. Nunley

I I I I i I

Approval

Current mode, local TTY:
length.

Cummins

Date

(Cable may be up to 1800 feet in

Pin Assignment
W076D

MATE-N-LOCK 8 PIN
3
7
2
5

4
7
6

Data Out
Return
Data In
Return

EIA:
Interface

Cable

(Total Length must be
less than 50 feet)

PT08F, PT08FX
DC02
PT08B, PT08C

70S7l7
BCOlA
BCOlC or BCOlJ

25 feet standard
2S feet standard
25 feet standard

Cables
707517 - W023 to 25 pin arnphenol
BCOlA & BCOlC - must go through H308 or H3l2 null modern
or swap pin 2 and 3 for correct transmitreceive wiring.
BCOlJ - M8S0 to 25 pin arnphenol connect directly between
VTOS and PT08B or PT08C.
Title

HIGH

S~F.ED/50Hz

OFERATION

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

Author

Cummins
Approval W. Cummi.ns

Rev

Tech TiPVTO S-'I'I - 2
Number
Cross Reference
0

Date 07/06/72

Prior to ECC ~7001-0a005. the M700l was not compati~le with
the high speed option ~:7004. Also, when adapting a VT05 to
50 Hz use, a '!ert ical synch problem developed after jumpers
W4 and W6 were changed.
ECO M700l-0001 ;5 makes the

~700l

and X7004 compatible and adds

a 300 pf cap ~:rom E6 pin f. to ground to el iminate the synch

problem.
PAGE 1

i PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Title

All
X

\ Tech Tip
Number VT05-TT-3
Cross Reference
Rev 0

VTOS MAINTENANCE MANUAL ERROR
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

Author
Approval

H. Long

There is an error in the VTOS manual
and in ' the enlJineering specification
with respect to the current mode (20
assignments. The table should be as
PIN NUMBER
1
2
3
4

5
6
7
B

Date 08/02/72

page 1-8 (DEC-OO-H4AB-D)
sheet 7 of 36 (A~SP-VT05-29)
rna) mate-n-lock plug pin
shown below:

DESCRIPTION

OTHER NOTATIONS

unassigned
Received Data*
Transmotted Data*
Reserved
Received Data
Reserved
Transmitted Data
Reserved

unassigned
Display Keyboard Reserved
Display +
Reserved
Keyboard +
Reserved

* Pins 2 and 3 are more negative referenced to pins 5 and 7.

Page -2-

mamDamD
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

[;21

18 Bit

0 I

VT06
36Bit

0
Tech Tip
Number VT06-TT- ' 1

VT06 - MODEM COMPATIBILITY PROBLEM
Processor Applicability

All,

16 Bit ~

J I I I I I I

Author
Approval

Freeman

CUmmins

Option or Designator

Rev

Cross Reference

Date

Care must be taken when installing a VT06 to a modem other than a
Bell I03A.
In particular, terminals 11 and 12 of the VT06 are used for
Reverse Channel Transmitted Data and Reverse Channel Receive Data
respectively.
In a I03F these terminals are used for Originate
Mode and Local Mode respectively.
Therefore, the VT06 will not
ope:ate on a I03F without removing the wires attached to pins 11 and
12 ln the cable.
Other problems may exist with different modems.
It would be wise to check the terminal connections of the modem
with that of VT06 (in users manual, page 31) to assure no mating
connections will cause a problem .
. .
Title
All

Tech Tip
Number VT06-TT-2

VT06-Cablinq
Processor Applicability

xl I I I I I I

Rev 0

Author
Approval

Loncr

Cross Reference

Date 08/02/72

There have been some cabling problems encountered during installation of VT06's to DC02's and DP12's. Hopefully, the information
given below will help iron out the difficulties.
1.

A BCOIA is the cable intended for use with a modem or null
modem.
It should come wired with the TRANSMIT and REC lines
c~ossed over.
These lines will be c~ossed again internally
in the modem so that they end up correctly at the VT06.

A BCOlJ should not have the TRANSMIT and REC lines crossed.
It is intended for use without a modem or null modem. Apparently, some have gotten into the field wired like a BCOIA.
Make this correction by switching the wires on pins 2 and .3
at either the paddle board or the cinch connector, so that the
lines run straight through.

H3l2 null modems may still be on the drawing board and therefore
not available immediately. The idea of a null modern is to
facilitate switching from the VT06 to a data phone hookup with
out having to change cables. If a data phone hookup is not
likely to be used, then a BCOlJ should be connected directly to
the terminals extender cable.

Some of the extender cables for the VT06 have been found to lack
the run from J9 pin 20 to pin 1 of the cinch (Data Terminal Ready).
If it is necessary, the connection can be made with one of the
unused wires in the cable.

PAGE 1

PAGE REVISION

~BLlCATION

DATE

Au ust 1972

Title

V,T06 Cabling
Processor Applicability

:" I I I I I I I
5.

Tech Tip
. Number VT06-TT-2
Cross Reference
Rev
0

(continued)
Author
Approval H. Long

Date

8/2/72

For checking any hookup, continuity should be established between
the points listed in the following chart.
VT'6
Data terminal ready
Xmitted Data
Received Data
GRD

SPLIT Pins on M8S,

J9
20
2
3

to
to
to

1&7

1
2
3
4
5

(+5 )
(REC)
(Transmit)
(N. C. )
GRD

Page -2-

mamaoma

12 Bit

lliJ

16Bit

18Bit

36Bit

I
8'5

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

Rev

Au~orROBERT JOHNSON

Approval AL SHIMER

Date

Option or Designator
VW02

GRAPH TRAN TRACING DEVICE REPAIR

Title
All

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

Tech Tip
Number VW02-TT-l
Cross Reference
f1

8/31/73

This is a description of the repair and disassembly of
the device. These are purchased with a one year warranty
from MFE, Salem, N.H. The warranty status can be checked
by serial number with Jim Hunt, Westminster X583. Simple
repairs can be done without voiding warranty.
Tools needed:

#1 Phillips

needle nose pliers

Soldering iron
Solder

#2 Phillips
small screwdriver

hex key wrench set

Cement (Duco 29-15195)

spring hook teletype tools
control/contact cleaner
(29-20631 )

Common problems are:
1. Bent clips or loose screws on theta pot. (Accessable
by removing bottom cover). These clips support the weight
of the linear pot assembly and are easily bent by a vertical
jolt. If theta pot has turned, steps 16 to 20 must usually
be performed.
2. Screw on end of slide arm loose.
(Complete disassembly
necessary). This is usually caused by twisting of this rod,
particularly during stylus mounting. The rod should not rotate
at all.
If it does, serious bending of the wiper contacts can
result.
3. Sticking or uneasy sliding of the slide arm. Silicone
contact cleaner is often sufficient. Adjustment of bearing
can be done without disassembly by prying off front wood
bezel (the one with the hole) and loosening (do not remove)
the three screws underneath. (see step 12)
No replacement subparts other than stylus and cable are
available.

PAGE 1 OF

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Title

GRAPH TRAN TRACING DEVICE REPAIR
Processor Applicability

All ;\

8's

I I I I

Author ROBERT JOHNSON

Approval AL SHIMER

Rev

Date

Tech Tip VW02-TT-l
Number
Cross Reference
~

8/31/73

DISASSEMBLY OF VW02 GRAPH TRAN DEVICE
1. Turn device upside down,
pull back felt pad to reveal
screws holding bracket.
Remove two screws (A)
releasing one side and top
of bracket. Leave other side.
2. Remove four screws (B) and
take off bottom cover.
~--------~~3.

Remove two screws (C) and
pullout the connector and
it's two spacers.

4. Slide back sleeves and
unsolder the red, yellow and
black wires (rho pot). Pull
the wires out of hole in base
block.

c.o I\) ft.SliCo10 ~
~

__ clt ", (\.0

®@

~[ "~'I AJ 00

]

5. You should have as spare
parts now 8 screws, two spacers,
bottom cover, bracket side ~
and top.
6. Turn device right side up
and loosen two hex set screws
(D) in round plate. Lift
linear pot assembly free of
base.
7. Turn assembly over and
remove four hex screws (E)
holding on circular plate.
8. Remove screws at each end
of pot assembly. (F)
IMPORTANT
9. Before attempting to slide
out the guts, pull the rod (G)
to it's fully extended
position. Take the three wires
and push the ends back into
the assembly so that nothing
sticks out the hole. The hook
tools furnished with the DEC
tool kit are useful for thf'~

PAGE 2 OF

PAGE REVISION

10. Carefully slide the insides
out of the tube. Do not force.
If it does not come out with
reasonable pulling, give up.
PUBLICATION DATE

mamDDmo
Title

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL
12 Bit

16 Bit

0 I

18 Bit

0 I

I I I
8's
I I I I
All

Author ROBERT JOHNSON
ApprovalAL SHIMER

-----~------,...~

=..=. =.. =
..=
..=
..~.t':=.~..=.=..~..=,.=,.=.=.=..=.~..:,---.. ~

...!
.•

VW02

Tech Tip VW02-TT-1
Number
Cross Reference
Rev (l

GRAPH TRAN TRACING DEVICE REPAIR
Processor Applicability

~,~L..

36Bit

Option or Designator

Date 8/31/73

~:J ~
o

11. Remove the remaining screw (H) from the bushing bracket (note when
reassembling that this goes on the side opposite the wire cutout). Carefully
pull the whole slide arm assembly out the end of the channel.
12. If bushing assembly is not loose and has not been binding, it should
not be necessary to tamper with it. If binding is a problem then pry off
the wood trim and by trial and error positioning of the bushing using
the clamping screws (J) try to achieve smooth operation. The use of
silicone or volume control cleaner is sometimes helpful.
13. On slide arm assembly make sure screw (K) is tight, flat side of
stop (L) is facing carbon track, wipers are in good shape and properly
contact the carbon and brass strips, sheaves should be spring loaded to
fit firmly in the track rods.

14. Rods (M) should be firmly cemented in place, back plate should be
tight (N).
15. Reassemble by stepping backwards 12 thru 3 and 1. leave off bottom
cover. In step 10 position wires over rod as shown. Slidearm should be
extended.
16. Turn assembly upside down, loosen screw and rembve clamp ring from
theta pot. (p)
Remove pot cover.
17. Make sure theta pot clips (Q) are tight and that pot housing will
not rotate.
It may be necessary to remove and bend these clips to make
them tight.

PAGE 3 OF

PAGE REVISION

PUBLICATION DATE

Title
All
~'s

Tech Tip
Number

GRAPH TRAN TRACING DEVICE REPAIR
Processor Applicability

I I I I I I I

Author

Rev

ROBERT JOHNSON

Approval

AL SHIMER

Date

VW02-TT-l
Cross Reference

8/31/73

18. Carefully holding the linear pot assembly
so it does not slip off the shaft, again
loosen the set screws (D). position the
theta pot wiper arm so that it is in the
0
center of the 100 resistor arc. At the
same time, with the linear arm centered
tighten one of the set screws. Swing the
linear back and forth to assure
that the wiper on the theta~~----------------~
pot stops equal distances
from the take off points
on the carbon path.
If not
loosen set screw and try
again.
19. Replace pot cover
and bottom cover.
20. Pots can easily be
checked before or after
assembly.

CAUTION
Do not use a simple ohm meter on the pot. The current from an ohm meter
is capable of burning the pots. Checking for major troubles or noise
problems can be done using an ohm meter or battery as a voltage source
and a scope as shown. Any jumps or noise can easily be seen on the
scope pattern.

Linearity can be checked by using the test program in the RAD 8 acceptance
procedure to display the AID bits in the accumulator lights. By sliding
the linear pot along a ruler and comparing change in bits to change in
length, rho linearity can be checked. To check the theta pot, with the
slide arm extended, trace a curve and then mark off equal graduations
on this curve with dividers.
Compare as before to bit count.

PTT"RT.Tr'h'T'TON

nATE

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

mamaama
Title

12 Bit

16 Bit

18 Bit

36 Bit

Processor Applicability

Author
Date

7-31-72

TERMINAL
CONNECTIONS
INTERNAL TO
TELETYPE

ASR
KSR

rO -15V" }

DEC
LEAD
COLOR

_ T O liTO CP F II

blue
6

8
7

1_ _ _

erminals on TRC
card In TeletYIH\

AV2 _
= __________

,.-----0

A +5V

o---+-------------i~--_.--_+---_o B

yellow

--6

black

20ma into
selector
magnet

-15V

driver

*
06

Driver Circuit"/

Tech Tip W076 TT#1
Number
Cross Reference
0

Rev

Approval W. Cummins

W076

TELETYPE CONNECTOR W076

All

Option or Designator

I.-----<-.------0
C4

fC7

C GND

- - 7 o-~------~---~~--_4---_+---__oH

orange

RELAY

+Jo-----------------------+------------*------~M READER RUN
-15 and ground levels

'----/
05

,.-----<.-------------0 A
4

red

CONTACTOR

o-------o-------4~----""'f\r__.--__.--__o E

Reoder /Keyboard
contacts and

Qtay

+5 8

'---~-------O

GN 0 LEVELS

~ Reader /Keyboard
data In

P distri butor

+ 5V

C GN 0

' - - _ ' i - - - - t - - - - - - - - Q B -15 V
R

not used

-30V~~---~-~~-~~-~----~~-----__oV-30V

seven split lu gs
on W076
changed to 820 ohm 1/2watt 20 0/0

* R3
R4
R2
RI
04
0102030506
C2-C7
CI
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
TRANSISTOR & 0I0D£ CONVERSION CHART
DEC
EIA
EIA
DEC
0664
IN3606
0671
IN3653

TITLE

II PAGE REV~~ION

TELETYPE

W076
~~rn~~~~ I CONNECTOR
I
IRlV
B

EOUIPMENT SIZE
CORPORATION
....... VN ..... D,t,.tASSACHU . . . , . " .

IPAGE 1

1302187
1300354
1301984
1301499
1100114
1103309
1001610
1000063
A- PL-W076-0-0
PART NO.

RES. IK
112W 10% CC
RES. 750 112W 5% CC
CC
RES. 750 2W 5%
RES. IK
IW
10% CC
DIODE 0664
-----,
DIODE 0671
CAP••0IMFD 100V 20% DISC
CAP. IMFO 150V 10% FOIL
PARTS LIST
DESCRIPTION
PARTS LIST

CODE

NUMBER
W076-0-1

PRIN rED CIRCUIT REV.

/B/ / / / I I /

Title

Tech Tip

NEW TELETYPE CONNECTOR MODULE FOR COMPATABILITY Number
Processor Applicability

All

Author

I I I I I I I

Steve Lamotte

Approval H .

LonQ

Rev
Date

W076-TT-3
Cross Reference

09/14/72

A W076, Revision "D", connector module has been designed to
accomodate both positive and negative logic, and Teletypes
equipped with this new module will be interchangeable
throughout the PDP-8, 9 and 12 families.
Formerly, W070 was required for operating a Teletype with a
PDP-8, 8S, Linc-8, or PDP-9; PDP-8I or 8L have utilized
earlier revisions of the W076.
If a chain of grounds is present in the PDP-8 memory wing, the
W076 D will be shot circuited and damaged when power is applied.
The following list of deletes will correct this situation.
Incorporate this change only if a W076D is to be used.
Deletes:
MF30C
MF30F
MF30J
MF30L
MF30N
MF30R

MF30F
MF30J
MF30L
MF30N
MF30P
-- MF30U

/mt

DIGITAL

EQUIPMENT

CORPORATION

Title New Teletype Connector Module for compatability

All

Processor Applicability

I I I I I I

\ Tech Tip
Number

Rev 0
B. Harrigan
Date 7-31-72
Approval W. Cummins

W076-TT-2
Cross Reference

Author

LT33 & LT35

A W076, rev~s~on ltD", connector module, has been designed to
accomodate both positive and negative logic and Teletypes
equipped with this new module will be interchangab1e throughout the pop-a, 9 and 12 families.
Formerly, a W070 was required for operating a Teletype with a
PDP-B, BS, or FDP-9; PDP-BI and BL have utilized earlier revisions of the W076.
A TELETYPE KITH THE W076 D SHOULD NOT BE CONNECTED TO A
PDP-8 UNTIL THE IMPLEr-~ENTATION OF ECO SM-00004 IS ASSURED.
IF A CHAIN OF GROUNDS IS PRESENT IN THE PDP-8 MKMORY WING,
THE W076 D lHLL BE SHORT CIRCUITED AND DAMAGED WHEN POWER
IS APPLIED.
The "ADD/DELETE" list for ECO BM-00004 is as follows:
Delete MF30C to MF30F
Delete MF30F to MF30J
Delete M,F30J to MF30L

Delete MF30L to MF30N
Delete MF30N to MF30R
Delete MF30R to MF30U

The removal of these grounds, if they are present, will eliminate
the problem and proper operation may be expected.

Page 2

FIELD SERVICE TECHNICAL MANUAL

momooma
Title

G: I

12 Bit

0 1 18 Bit 0 I

16 Bit

36Bit

W076

Tech Tip W076 TTI1
Number
0
Cross Reference

TELETYPE CONNECTOR W076

Processor Applicability

All

Rev

Author

Option or Designator

Date 7-31-72

Approval W. Cummins

111707

I
TERMINAL
CONN ECTIONS
INTERNAL TO
TELETYPE
ASR
KSR
33

...... al. Oft TRe

AY2

=: - - - - - r-----OA +~V
-

blue IfRELAY -""\'lo--+-----'-------~._--___.>----_4---__O B
6

yena.

black

--s

orange

RELAY

GNO

0 M READER RUN
-15 and ground lenl'

o-----o-----~>------'V'IJ'\r-_+--__.-----
Z

C
r

»
t::I
t>:!

()

1-3

::.
'\1
t>:!

~...,-

r:" _.

"mr-

..1.

en
m

<
EJll

rn (J

-1.
O~'OE S 11>£ ~

ol.ID~ Sl/)~ j)oV'/1'f
~~"() ~i.l"'l'tl7 flBot4T 10 V f/P.

6,,00 OUTPt.(T

ASOI.(T

:tV pip

--1'iJl
m

Om
I

""ll

l-oi
1:'1
0.::

:to
~

These pictures are for referelH::e onl g,. .'}owever can be used to
illuatrate a point.
Given:

't1~

i\ .""
~

<
,..

:::-.....

Tape:

Moving Forward
Channel 2 leads channel 1 as shown.

If tape is reversed, channel 2 should lag channell, as shown with
dotted lines, the same amount as i t leads going forward.
If this
condition is not met, either amount is different or does not swap
from lead to lag~
It indicates faulty guides ~hich must be cleaned
or replaced.

t:l

tlj
C)

1-3

"'<.

~
~

tlj

.. " --"'"""1" .-.." ..

. ..

f!'"4'-~--'-·

-n
-

m
r-"

TU55/56

Reverse Tape

ITl

<
Olj
m b~

-4.il
m~

(1 i:b
,'JOR-MAL

NORM "'l_

F'IAL'-

EMPT"

~E'E

REr=L

.!l'~

.r::

"'..,
~

I-t

t-<
~

C
l>
r

'i1
;0

Link Tape:

Put normal full reel on left hub, empty on right
hub.
Thread from bottom of left to top of right.
In local. wind all tape onto right reel •

t>l

'"':l
!l>o

~~j
..
~

J
I

p(O~-e

/FAI1ILY

DECTAPE

FIELD SERVICE TECH MANUAL

11\
IU

.,,

o '1
~\U

~~
:r.

O.L ;)?'" 1\1 (J ;;J
i#7t1 W3.:J

tf7J-1 wo~::l

QI>lDtlll.L

.'-"'J
",-'"

IPAGE 150F 16 II

PAGE REVISION

"PUBLICATION DATE

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION

February 15, 1972

MAYNARD, MASSACHUSETTS

PD~...

/FAMILY

DECTAPE

FIELD SERVICE TECH MANUAL

~______________~____~m___________________~____~__________________~~__________~__~

r
~

('l
I'l

\II

::s

'"'::s

.....

1/\

-S

">-

0
t"

01\

::s

...

""n.

~ .

()

.....

...

\u'1:

~ ~~
II A -0-'1

I'n
('t')

...

('I

VI':Z~III

en >

0
~

-v

•

('I "

G 500

SKEW -rEST£ R

.,,'- ,,, ~e sto;Jred. the e~) ntrol te.::tl-

li:I~I;=~':~~!\~?~J~~~~~¥~~P0j
fl

• •>

REPR!~iE[) rRO~t1

NOVEMBER 1964

I·

rnG~n~mSm5

rJ8VJ

niqllc must provide for babnced fN':~S
to be applicd to the t,vo hues, kc~p

GriU S'Dme

~rGL3-[ri'ls

1 •

C3H'JCGrt

e13dTonit emf] medumjn]; ((mSiTiJhr~'s if) muuneik

ing the t:lPC from s1Jckcni n ~ or
wlildering. Complicating this requirement is the fact that the amount of
tape on each reel, hence the diameter
and rt'~ulting force, can be qu ite diffe fl~ nt. The Jccision was m a de to have
reels made of a pIa, tic composition
and III keep the reel di:lmetcr ratio
small. This would lighten the ma~s
that had to be controlkd and rcduce
tbe diameter variation betwcen full
and empty reels to from 1.3 to 1.
With 10" reels this variation is from
2 to I.

i(jr9 rG[ordh~D t8dm~~ve5
Are you an engin:?c{ing or scientific
lIser of a computer'? \Vot!ld you like
to take your program (O the computer,
read it more conveniently and rapidly
than VOli could with card~ or paper
tape, •per hap;; edit 0r revise it at a
console teleprinter, insert some data
to be processed hy it and rec'.!!ve your
rest.:!ts quickly on a typewriter printout with your fI::\'i~ed program recorded on a new milznetie tLlpC'? Using
conventiol1r!1 tape or perforated par-i.'T
tape or canl" you'll find your proalem-solving use of a comput'~r far less
convenient than what we've just out-

The overriding goals, simplicity
and reliabilitv, WCie consid~red to
have Jllany ckments i!'! common. To
achieve these goaL. Stockeb~and said
that the designers wanted a system
that woulJ function consistently with
the fewest possihle parts. The minimum system seemet.! to require places
to store the tape, a means of moving
it, a guidc to position it and a head
witlt- which to write on the tape and
read from it.

li .. cd.
Thomas Stockebrand, of Digital
Equipment Corporation, ~!aynad ,
~\iass., pointed out that :n G~vc!op!ng
its new tap': tr;msI'0rts. Digital haJ
to question som~ basic principles of
desi gn emboJicJ in conventional systems. lnsteatl of fun,;tioning as a step
in the progression of d:lt a from computer memory to output device, they
\~antcd th.: :r new !ape to function in
interim st~ps in processing: for reading a program in, for reading in
subroutines while asscmbiing a program. for dcbllggin~ ;~ pro gram on
lin'~, amI for rccoiL!!i1g :Jssemblcd anJ
p~·~ ~::-3m$.

revised

'.Vhcreas , c0n',;c:1ticn:d uuits often
feed a line printer, sto pp ing and
re~ding out a ch ar3cter 2.t a time
cr a line d print:n~ at a time,
opcration of the new Enit would
:J(! con tinuolls while reading in O~
readiilg out ~ sizeahle block of
Jata. 1 his suggests a d:f ferent tape
system codigu;·ation. ! il,;tead of ot:ly
o~e or to,vo co~!vC'n!:n~: :1 1 tr~:lSn('i"t;,
the c()n~f'utC'r irL'\ta1!~~ti( ; n \·,·ou ld' ~ 1~;)
b ~:~.:.~

n: ::ny of

~; cfi~ ::l rS
C:. ("; -;

~h~

eno~!gh

U.:;'.: r.

Sue!"!

::~. \'-/
~tl!ot

to
a

ti' ~~ :'l:;pUr~';,

one

configu: ..lti0D

\\'0 :.:1.-.1. _~d sC' offer a ~ n ~Ilrl-:, i:1'- solti~g
c'_~P:'~ ll!i!y h~' C!.! t tile OUIl1>'.:r of t ~lf~~

p~ ~':, cs i:) sC' ~ r~: ,: JI~t.! 01cr;;c l:} r'~r~itiot;'i.

Bins and rc'!ls were considered for
storing the tape. Ree:s were selected
f~lr three reasons : denser p:1;:!.;ing,
hence more efficient use of Sp1CC:
cleaner reel ,tora:;e and an extremely
simple mechanis::1 for pulling tape
past the head. For the rccls to apply
the driving force, the dcsigners COilsidered a tapt' mecha '1ism ·as a COllnector which IS . clastic betwecn two
masses whic;l arc in motion, approximating a spi'in~ w ith a wei3ht h~ng
ing frC':n each end. B,:eausc of the
tape's elasticity, it is necessary to limit
the amount of force applied to it a!1d
to regulate the rate at which this for;:e
changes. This ge .. eral coupling p;ob!em was comitL:!rcd to h:lVe two parts.
dyni.unic \\'hen the tape is changing
speed and static when it is coas ting or
at re'ir. The dymmic part of tbe probh~ !l1 '~n':C'in~:.1';c' :~ t!J:-Ce 5t~1L~~~ ~ f ii10ti:.:~n:

~~nd slopping.
~;.;.p~ ~~"iG~;V~)
5 ~ack lc\.) ps that

starring. rlinri!1g

r~:;~:ln~~:

C0il!I\11
.

o ~.. ~:.-

To propel the tape, ac induction
motors wcre chosen hecause they are
reliable, inexpensive, require little
maintenance. have favorable torquespeed characteristi c s and, lacking
bru~ht's, run spark-free. To eliminate
another prime source of sparking --a
significant contributor of error in t:lre
systems-the d~cision was m ade to
const:wtly torque h,ltn motors in th e ir
drive directions thus eli;-ninati::~~: the
need for torque rC\,Nsa!~: the consequent collapse of motor fields and
the resulting rich spar:.:s at switeh contacts. The driving motor would run on
full line voltage, the trailing r:Jotor on
partial pow~r to pract'ce th~ proper
torque for maintainin 6 t;lpe tension,
and the traiiing motor would be
switeh;!J to fill! power for bra~ing as
the driving motor's puwer was Cllt.
With both on p:lftb.l power. the tape
would he kept tense while s!oppr~d.
greatly simpl ifying the motion contwl
subsystem. Since the ac induct:Jn n~o
tor does not make a good gcn~!'ator.
the net. result of running the . trailing
motor backward would be only a small
cffeel on the power factor. Littl.: heat
dissipation was in fact expcric,:c,'d.
The actual· field volta~c med ' to
achieve the proper torque in the trailin ~ motor is 35 v pwJuccJ hy c;')ol1c:cting a r~,istor in series will: the
ficJJ. This torque results in u ta pe
ten sion, over the [ull length of the
("pe, that remains within 20'?c of ihe
nominal value. In :lddition to the filII
line voltage applied to the i'ic1Js for
dr iving or bra~ing, a thir~ vallIe, 15
v, is applied to each field. tl! :-oug h :t
second damping resi stor, when the
Ltrc i~ t·) rem ;d n stoppeu. The resi. \tiny D,O~,h
J,e .) I
,2CO '.J 3at!c fee t of :; :J", LC-rnil ifi~ii a l ta iJ? I'
'IQn3!.'::."rceL

... ·1"

) 1 .1

' .• ::[)'I

\ ::.,,~-~.

I
li i:1 !·,..' s

r:~:'lr"' -~ '::. r \'!

'.","

Ov," '"

"c.r ;,
......

II
f

:;]'1'

~ I.

·n··
'~'>P "'T~t.
' H/t '·i.Jl' :..\
C",[,-J cr r .... ~ :' ~.'" c·-·~~- . . l. r· f'
lou J ...
au..: ,

• ··r:
JJ .-,.....
;:;': 0~5 ~r

; [ 83 1S

3'hi'"
. ,

i\'~

L';

•

lrZl n~fc r

C!12::g2 c;~n~;:t"r.

c · ...;: ~

H~ :·~ .... ~.:.t .:;.

fBt\;$ ··/JI·j·

~D~l !1r:SS!!i~
ir'll~ik 3r.~ t!n~1ng rnCK allow

2G:~,

I G2 1r!CU I." U;0 1~ ~' cr:d wo:d.

i
I
.~ I
,.5 .. .

c~r t~i.~ ~ .\ :':':~. eli.: ·'d:-!.:~~;·.:~ [~~ ~ S !d ·~·)-.';:. :tl-~

c· ·';~·~·~r:. ~ ns r"H~~';.\:' ,.:--." . . .~l:l\·.:i',Itil.)~;al trjnsp ;' ' : :.:. n ·) ;":li:L':",: : .. ' .... ... ~.. ·:·r, ~:- :~~l is
l~c ltL: v ( . ~ ::1 a tJ!. .~,: 1:,.:\ _>1 ! ;_ ~ ·;~:;i.;. 1 L[ rr u~~~

1 ,,, , ' " ;,5

it ~ rn~~~:-...
I) EC L:~,,;;: (\'; ~2 r":: Oi'·I~~~ .;i~· S I ~'·~\,-f~'l..:.~:"~

; i,.~~~J:.:~:.i.'" th r;.:: ugi1 ~,':H;::.l.h."~:'; I110ti(F!

O !:~ :!.1 t\·: 'J t;~n:.:: ~~ ~ 11'2 t~cjJe d :s~ancL' ~
W1:...:..·1~ n '.1\it ~·'q ~~1

fk1 \V is

r-;~ :\:.:h cd . r~,:1,""

t t~~'S ~~'ff := ~ :', :;:~, : ': l~ ''; h :,··:!r\)\.~ ~-l t~:11;;G l ~j~) ri·

<,1

1r; ~ S2C, turn :: rv.!~:d time is <3(j:~1 ;psec.
t Stc.rt nr.a s ;.'j:~ U :S l~lV~t:S ?i' ~ ar· ?i~;.(~. <~ (\n" .
\": !.: 80

a conrrn:!d tu

i \·; .; :s~t 65

;'.s.

[f;Vt'/ :~e w:e~ llon !S 1

..: ,' ;:,',:;',',

O~ tL . .·

1n ::-~·, ov~r th e e:"tti ;;: :(0' k~;'irtil cf

i ~~,~F~:;:.~,t~~~~~·:;:,:;~\,;,~,'::;2:, ~.:~,~:
!

sC·:.u:;h for

10~~..·.~ _~~~.~~.
?:'~: s;.~~ ·:';';:·_ o3~~C.:;:~;, '~ ..'~I ;c. d .. ~ !~ "'-,_,.D "'"'''' $,0" (I""..

g n)\V--;

driv~ng hub. ~. hc rpnl \vntdd 1:1·:':L;.,: t:
unJcf '~;crl.)ti.l n: t C'.fi..pJC, bu~ ih . :· \o r q ·-! ·::spee d Gurve ch ;) ract,,:' ri;;ti(' :~ 0t t ilt!
h:-adini.! rnot~)r ~~r;.! l;t!~i7\~:..l to pr(ld u. c\··
CtJ fl st8.""nt tap e. l!:J1.;.;ion. Th e C Q~-:··. ~ (~.;·l
•
1"1
t
··
f' . J Y'\ - i -- .. i l", c~ h'\
tcn ~!O;·l . ln11 :5o \~! ;C sr - ";'u
,~\~ d l . .• ;
",

G:.: i

I
I
!~~~·~~1',?~f;~2~~~;E·,~ti~~~ 'E:t:l·~~~C.!~!~ir~~~ I

\ i.)

I!.

~au:.B lilC' 5.pc·z!d '..\'!rh 1,. ·:Li·'::·t the lH:~\d

CAl'M~nY

~ . ~-t

~;~i);,J ~ it

GiYc:n this s!IIl;)lified transport, thc<
d.::s:gn,;rs then had to f!;~;':;S it ~ adap t~baity to c011\'cnti on:li rL,;:o~'l1;; ;g kchniques. Speed cOiltru!, n~v ~'r a prim"ry
d~sign go~l:t Stockcbr3nd e:1·,~) L. :'"\3 i z~J ,
derfl ands carefuJ consider a:.loD. The
ernph::-ts!s~ he said, the dc.sl,: ·\~::·. r of f~,~
conventional tra:T;p0rt nn!st ph~ -:~ on
~.pecd control is au..'! to thi! requirements posed by th;;: amplitu de·seE:;in:,;
recortHng technique. 1.\ o~rE ie,:ord:~d
at RO 'I /5, fur ex~uupl..!, "~\'0lild n':lt r~1,J
out as Ct. Of"'L~ at <;lo 'v ~r 3p0'.' d::.. To
e1in;In~lt(~ this spej~d-accur~.cy depend ..
en cv. JJECt\'lne d ·:,si ~!,!C'rs s~1ected a
pol;~rily-se:'"lsir;g technl~t!e. In rcl:tr~ty·
~cn , in~, the direc-tio(1 d the f!u:~ reversal-indic3tes \'. hetl'~,~r tk: rccard·:' J
hit is ~ ZERO or a o~...;r: . Since the
amnlitll~k: of the r~cor;,;cl1 si;nal j,
not' in~i>ortlnL {()tv signat-tlJ- r~oi~e r:~
ttOS v:hi:;lt \\'ou1d rC[J f'er Dth'-'f tL~1··. ·
niques u5~ie~:; c~!n easily be t.1s,';..i . \\·:.\~'l
this technique, tar)C spc~J{; fro r~\ 3:,) to
~-lHr'/ ~ ~i\';: ict~~nl; c n l r~ad~""Jt:; of u
:!ivcn 'b(;~t)'· l")f ,·hd J . For '\.vritin~. hl>-

the head is It';e radius of curvature of

>·Co

r ·~riQdic8Hy

~ir c u~; hi(!r) .

P~tS~J!11,~ th~ !H~ ~ld~

.
i...__.

r ,·~n~~1:,i li . y

in G r~a=,:,:

d(::)irc-u

of the

n ~~~·

.~.,,-

\V :·oS

of curv:lture of

pr o\' i·J~ s th~

th e suidc

L~~~~ r1

~jn1i)Ec~t'y_

I t ·;'\'4.1. t: \ 11:J.Y·;_' t">:n
P(\:.:.~i:' l~ to ?0~ition the t.:::"'2 ('(':'.:;c,:'t 1 .;
\·,' ith . pressure r~~(L . ~~ ~~.. '~O~·;1:1:\..H:~::
d~):1;~ hlH. th8 pads col!2ct di~"~ eei;.

~!. ij"i1_

Jn~r~asi:... g l~ 1C r~di tis

t h,,~ n ,,: (f:t ;?t cx~:'\;r!~ :1,: .:-.-" :.,

~lP=' r,)a:~h

thr .. :ug:1

re··

to achi;:ve the corrCSp()Ihlin f"; res:st-

el1g ii~ ':: {'rs

;~. n;

\,.,

sjst:-i n<.:c to b~.Il~!'::!llg '.-\·o~.l1d p:!silii, :; \)
the nn10unt o~ gl.li,J;: fOrL\~ nCt>...I ,-~ ;J
and ·; t!C ain()jJn~ of ,:!)r\'~.d l!rc n ~~~d '."t!

\~··ltfl;1~"O' (,
t···'t.. ... ~l.,.)·~ f"·n:·· ·Y" \.-; .:. "t
,
" • .• \, l_'l
~ 1\. .... '." L_.l..l .. . ... . ~ .(,.tl!.l. f-... ~ l,!..l

C~-l.t:l)n

I
I

t~;;~·~~~:~_~;~~_~'.~~~. ~.5_~.~~~~_C_·.'~_..._... j

r~quircd to n;lHif/ :h~ ch a n::;i;';~~ ,1~1.~ ·. :
dC ~", 5iiy '.\,;'(':1 re:!uing in th ~ O;pC. .H ~~

direction from th,! virit;n~ di l'(;·~tion.
\Vh cn re:tding ~tnd re cord;r.~! ;a rL~
. S:lilV~ ~! i r ;:!cti,)n . th" lJs.:: r fin],
;')
di;'\parin:'. l)~lta is Jctur:liy 'S 6~1>:il ;jt;j
r (:;id OJ:' in fL rlll ati(\(l C;,'d·''';·.l f:'Of:1 3
sj~:n a l ~ i\j2n \\· !l r_·[! tb~ pr,~rc :..:I.'jri..:!:,j fiJi :'

i~:. :t i:~~~'i~ ~l:lr;'-::~ ~\\;~~ t;,l ;'~ d~l ~i ;;:~ ~';if~'~ :1;
~~;,.·i:~~};: \;:\ll ~:;;~:~:':~\,: ':i";~;:'('~~~;: ;'i [~::;~; :!' ,~

f~CO;~~~~;;~~l:~~:\ i(:!;'~::',~\:'t\~;'g (:.~, c0 :'::~~;'l~)l ~~; :,~:
i

;

act ~: s .

.r ·" ,_ ·

~.•·,;.::r· "'·__'· _F_.IE_L_D__ SERVICE
~.

'1' '--;

I ,'". ,,.. "

~~m ~~/ tln

[f:'l ) II>
if'z., {b.

~~;hen

a 'fUSS

. ..

•, . ,

4.:

..J

ir; set to un1.t 8 U:f) t ·u.P2 c r.:.:;ep i~, e'"ident'.
i!1 the :-::VStE':2"1 C"lre bei D0 usee!. ':aoc
hour runninq .:)E;CT;·:;'.X oil cne (1) or TUSS,.
Thts problt':'.r.1 has been

.."hen other transnorts
creeps about. 3/4" p{~r
other transp()rt~ TU56'
observed only on 'IC0'8
Causes

TECi-i__M_iA_N_'_Lj_i~~--!r---;.~~~
.
}_f·,_j'_JM'·!__'_l______~
•

. ~-.- - - - - - - - - - . , - " " - '1'U55 INFORIviATION

Problems

I,'

cant.roller.

vJhen Status A or the 'rev.i8 changes val U'2, under r-=og !'ar:!
control, u..r1i t Y5 is selected momentarily causing the sel.ect
.
f or UJ1~l.)O
'... ri (P) t a .. g 1'....
"
'",
1 . t _c"
'h appears at.
..
1.l..C.h II •
1,11S
g.l
1 :tne
t.he t\vO And crates. at location B0'6 :i.n ~he T'L:S5, .2nd is
,j

i\nded with the FOr'-"rard (flfll) ar.d .!.-(~verse (i~E~/) ~; ienal s
,
l
-)(io
~,- "",(':."
~""l'/,
. ;.""
causlng
t' h e D'lrec t '1.on F/F a.::.
L
.. JUO i-,.
'- ,) tr"~-le
'_"-"~:'
I...L.::: _
, -'LI .'"."
bit in the Status A register is changing.
Q_'}

Because directir:m 1:-, t o qql ing
u!l d E~a:'~e Enable i ~~ trtjC~
and delay ([6) is true, the t"'JO solenoid d!:'ivcr-s at i31 :,~ t~.
3ecau~.;{;
and S cause the left and right brakes to toogle.
there is uneven tape tension, the tape creeps as the

brakes are turned on and off.

", .'

a D664 diode as follows:

Fix'

(''!,._~"'.f.. _ _--.<)

r~,

"i~ ~,'~l"'.) ,J

'I'his diode prevent.s the Direction F/F from chan'Jin,], ~.;tc.:te~:;
t·/hen I-:otion - «(l) i. s true.

This fix in no way hampers operation of the manual
that wind or rCi.vind tape.

swi~ch~c

'I'his can be incorporated in t.he PDP-S/8I/SL Tech Tip :'joteboOK

Hareh 71

OIGITAL EQUIPMENT

CORPOR~,\.-nCJN

rv1 ..'\Yr,jAF:-~[J.

1\,11\~ , ~

·;/\(":1 Ii i: :t

. , ..

' U

• •_

•

.' ,;~~
. ti~
p~
>

.. - - - . _ , . . . ,

~T;'''~/f:~H'

f,1 0..::
~ m'l:>''' ,mi,'
' '

,=_". _'_

=.. _____.___.,. .....

" nr: r.;'Ai'
E
.

6
R

COMPATABILITY TUS~IS

Write enable

~ompatabillty

with TUSSIs.

There are approximately one hundred and fifty TUS6's in the
field cont.aining the "13" revision "Switch Control Panel"
(assembly 70-062 2 21. Tr a nsports cont a ining thCS0 control
pan'els will have dlfficultX- enabling tIl t} " lV ri.tc" fun..:tion if
connected in any of ~he following system configurations.
con t r b 1, a T U 5 6 1'1/ b Rev . S \'J i t c h Con t r
panels, and more than two TUSS's.

ATe 0 l o r T C02

A TCOl or TC02 contro l , a TU56 w/b R~· v. Switch Control
pan e 1 san d m0 r e t 11 a n 0 Iii.' U d d i t. ion a 1 T U5 6 \'I!:~ He v. S ,d t c h

0 1

panels.
3.

An add i t ion alp r ob 1 C In ~vi 11 h e g e 1l era ted i f t he R 1 0 7
modules in slot Bll of the TUSS's have he<::n ('c pL'~ced h y
S107 modules in which case a T1JS6 w/b rev. Sw i tch Control

panels will not operate
any TUSS'S.
If ~ any

~eli & bly

in conjunct i on with

of these circunstances occur the p rohlem rn a y
Y ~~luclng Rev. B panels by Rev. C panels.

be resolved by

C revision
B r evision
B.

Problem:
•A~

i~ (j ~:; ~.l·:.i:.e:

p~ ni ls
pan~]s.

are direct re placem e nts for

Po 0 'r d a t a r eli a b :t 1 i ty; It sua 11 yon t r Ll n s per tin
front of ~he power supply .

p Tob 1 (:!n :hU, b~.::: i Tn pI" O p ~!T l5l"()und
conn ect ions i n t h e TUS6 or 7~S power supply (usually in the
PO\'HH' ~; upply) . . The TUS6 has two separa. teground systems.
One for th~~ exte Tnal suppl.lcS (+5 or +10 and -IS) and one
f or th e :~ e el l:j 0 tor po IV e r s u 1:1 P 1. y ( '7 ;'~ 5 ).
T11 ,~ s e g r 0 u n cj s y s t e In S
are d E~ ;:ig H Cd so that motor curr e nt does not retu-rTI on the
eX '> : r n ;, l supplies ground line.
The two groU1Hi ;,ystems are
eommoned at e gen e r a t e d to c a use data c 'r rors.
J

c a:.'I ~111

~~01l"

'cl1 1 ,:)

~"-

;" ~:.

. ...

,.; .

" ;" J

B•

Problem:

continued

To check for this problem perform the following steps:
( :.,)

G8 <+ 8 mod u 1 e s

k e rno v e all

fro In , the T US 6 .

Measure the resistance between the two ground connectors
The resistance
on the front of the 725 power supply.
should be infinite.

r.l ('.1 sur e t 11 (~ res i s tan ..: C 0 e t i ~t G z.ero level
to be a 1, while a negative transition below zero level is tHt s n t o be a ¢ •

uses a .record-E1s-you-write clock trClck..
.. \

.....-~

· .... . . ; ~;,~~t· . "

~ ,--,.---,.-.............

-,.,,'.

"."...".-"'.:- -

...

: .S

t"ken~

,- -.- -.....------

.....".~

. '.'.

;.........

....

:-.~

pI:P-e/r

DECTAPE

FIELD SERVICE TECH MANUAL

*TU 55 TAPE G~IDE ~EPI.ACE!l1E~T

In Lectape installations which require above average usage, there may be
a problem of aluminull from the guides adhering to the tape o The correct
procedure for repla.cing the aluminun guides with an optional, heavy duty,
type is as follows:
1)

Remove all power from the transport.

2) Place a protective covering over the head to eliminate any possibility
of its being damaged.

Remove the two hex head screws from the front of each guide and remove
the front cover plate assen~)ly.

4} ReLlove the four hex head screws which hold the transport mounting plate
in posi tion o l\Iove the transport assembly forward about two inches so that
the two hex hec\d screws which secure the guides to the mounting plate can be
removed o These screws are accessible from above o
5) Each guide is now held to the mounting plate by two roll pins which can
be seen from tbe rear; with a pin punch, drive the pins and guide evenly
forward to dismount the 9uideo

6} Check the
through to be
the holes has
distortion of
7)

front surface of tbe mounting plate where the pins were driven
certain that no burring or protrusion of the surface around
occurred o A stone should be used to eliminate any protruding
the surface o

With pliers, pull the pins from the original guide o

8)
The pins should then be inserted into the new guide, the mating
surfaces cleaned, and tl:e guide positioned against the mounting plate with
tte pins aligned witt the holes o \vi th a non-metalic hammer and/or a protective block of wood or plastic, gently tape the guide evenly so as to
begin insertion of the pins evenly into their holes o The screw which is to
secure tte 9uide to the plate should be engaged and tightened alternately as
the guide is tapped to maintain alignment with the plate as tbe guide is seated o

9) As the screw is finally tightened, there should be no gap between the
plate and the guide o

10) Replacement of the front cover plate assembly will conplete tbe excbangeo
11) It is advisable that skew be checked if equipment is available, otherwise
a formatting/exercise exchange of tapes between transports will be indicativc o

*TUSS ",SET

SPECIFICATIONS AND PROCEDURES

1) Set brake disk .. brake
of ASR-33 paper makes an
ever, the 1004 ino is to
minor disk distortion is

coil gap at 0004 ino clearance; a single thickness
adequate "gauge"o Surfaces should be parallel, howbe measured where the surfaces are closest when
presento

Torque settings (Equally valid for 50 and 60HZ)
a)

Initial conditions
1) Line voltage at AC receptacle on TU55
2) Tape on both reels
3) Brake gap set as described above

Stop Torque set
1) Connect VON to tabs of G850 in slot A12 (right motor)
(expect + 60 VAC)
2} Svd tch u;i t to "LOCAL"
3} Push R'lD,
swi teh and release
4) Adjust pot nearer the G850 handle for meter reading of 60 VAC
5} Connec t vcr·! to tabs of G850 in slot All (left motor)
6) Pt,sh REV,
swi teh and release
7)
Adjust as in step 4 above

Trailing Torque set up
1) Connect VOM to tabs of G850 in slot A12 (right motor)
(expect.:!: 85 VAC)
2) Rewind tape so that right reel is nearly full of tape o
3) Push and hold the REV,
Switch so tape is winding
onto the left reel as this adjustment is made.
4) Adjust pot farther from the G850 handle for meter reading
of 85 VAC o
5) Connect VOM to tabs of G850 in slot All (left motor)o
6) Rewind tape so that left reel is nearl)., full of tape ..
7) Push and hold the HID,
swi tch so tape is winding onto the
right reel as this adjustment is made o
8) Adjust pot farther from the G850 handle for meter reading of
85 VAC o

Stop Delay set up
I} Switch unit to "LOCAL"
2) Scope voltage at pin A04D
3) Press and release FVm,
swi tch
4) Adjust pot on R303 delay for 80 1':1S. which is the

= 115 VAC

spec o

TU56 DECtape Transport
Maintenance Supplement

tTse only recommended cleaning flu~ d as supplied by DEC. Tape
~uides ruld head must be clean.
Alcohol base cleaning fluids
(such as carbon tet.) could remove finish from anodized parts.
Possible areas of trouble: Indication may be excessive mark track
or timing track errors. Refer to drawing #E-AD-7006320-0-0.
1. Dirt or burr jn spring hole of cover plate causes
excesstve ske'N.
2. Dirt between tape guide and wear plate seen as
uneven or incomplete arc on wear plate.

3. Wear plate has beveled edge and flat edge-beveled edge toward tape.

4. Tape oxide deposits on tape guide and rear check
plate may cause skew problems.

5. Glue depOSits between rear check plate and casting
machine surface.
The tape head can be replaced in the field; no skew alignment
needed. The book says NO to protect the field engineer from the
customer if for some reason the field engineer does not want to
change it in front of the customer.
When replaCing the tape head~ keep the protect~ve cover on the
head unt:tl the cable is inserted through the casting hole. Bllt,
do not attach the tape head to the casting machine surface with
the:protective tape still on the head. The possibility of getting
a piece of tape ( adhesive) caught beti'leen the t\'10 increases the
possibility of a skew problem.
Hhen replacing a tape head, with the cable insefrted
thx'ough the casting hole and the protective tape removed, eyeball" the bottom edge of the tape head to be parallel with the
opening in the casting. Hold the tape head so that any slack is
removed in an upi'lard direction ,\,lhile tightening the screws. The
tape head screV1S are accessible thr'ough two holes in the control
panel cards.

AllJ~!l.rn.~:mt:

Tne control panel cards have a solder strip along the top and
bottom edge. The top strip is +5v. and the bottom is -15v.

-2-

The TU56 tape reel hubs should be removed by backing off the
motor mounting SCrei'lS and inserting a double loop of #18
gauge insula~lied \'lire bet\'ieen the hub and the face olate: NOT
a SCREHDRIVER. A quick pull should then remove eVEm a tight
hub.
Removing the hub gives access to a spring loaded bushing which
reduces hub "creep". The tape hub may creep in the direc'tion
of the reel l'lhich has the least amount of tape. If the tape is
evenly distributed on both reels" no more than one inch of
creep should be seen after the hubs co::'.e to a rest. The one
inch is due to the un'Ninding of the torque in the spring.
When replacing a hub for any reason" replace the scre't'lS. The
knurl on the end of the scre"1 becomes damaged after one tightening. There \'lill be a "torque 'drench" available to the field
offices to tighten these screi'lS without stripping the threads
in the hub.
When replacing a hub" insert the 0.018" plastic gauge bet\'Jeen
the hub w1d the faceplate to ensure proper clearance and reduce
ske\-l problems. Tap the end of the hub to seat the shaft (it f S
spring loaded) before tightening the screlvs.
Electrical adjustments on the TU56 consist of the oscillator
adjustment and the left and right brake adjustments. These are
gi ven in the Naintenance Na.'1.ual" Chapter 6.
2."'he G859 Clock Regulator adjustment should be done \,lith the
horizontal sVleep 011 5ms/di v. This allm'ls t"10 complete cycles to
be displayed on the screen and the adjustment set for 50ms/2
cycles.
The G888 Rd/Vlrt Amp. (located in the TCll logiC) adjustment should
be such that the output (square wave) transitions occur as the input (sine ''lave) crosses zero.

OUT

TOO NARRO\'!
TOO HIDE

11 .J \\---tJ L 1
U

Ot1AINDEC 83i - 5/8 D~CTt\~f. t·\,4INi::rlANCE PAC~E

The Timing Routine in Maindec 831 will not run with a 183 extra me~ory control. Vhen
Mac Ext 2 in the Mac Register is set) the pr o gr2rn fafls bt wiping out the program. This
is a program fault, not a hardware problem.

()552 DECTAPE

I NSTRUCTI ON /·lANUAL

There are several errors in the timing set-up procedure in the 552 DEC tape Instruction
Manual: (Errors 1 through 4 will be found only in the Instruction Manual, the prints
are correct.)

On page 5-6, step b, the negative duration . of the sIgnal should be shown to be
140 Msec, not 35 Msec.

Page 5-6, step c, the point to scope is 2U14T, not 2L14P; also the negative
duration of the signal should be shmvn to be 140 t1sec, not 35 :·isec.

Page 5-6, siep d, the negative duration of the signal should be shown to be 90
Msec, not 35 Msec.

Page 5-7, step i, the point to scope is 2L08T, not 2L08p.

Both the manual (step k, page 5-7) and print 85-D-552-D-7 indicate incor re ct sign21
duration: a duration of 3 Usee should have been specified. (2L08Z)
November 1968

Bill Freema:1

()TU55

CONFIGG{U\TION \oJITH TC01/550/55Z

The following chart indicates differences which must be resolved when a TUSS is re moved

from a 550 or 552 and

inst~11ed

on a TeOI or vice versa •

..---~- .------.---------

~55 S~~-;::tains

ITU5S

- A6!( to A9S

1-----.-___ .

_~_

*Jumpers on W990 connect the following pairs of terminals:
\.

. --.,---~,.- ---.------,---,---

NP
LM
._---_._-------,--

November 1969
. . ......

i ····')

BRROR IN TeOI BASIC E:mRCISER

./ Hr~IND:cC-08-D3BB-D
- .
..

. -.-,- ------ -----..•- - ...
...

~~.-

The error condition affects the write/read test starting at location
0204 with test patter ri 6 selected.
Test pattern 6 is a 7070 pattern that is 'tvritten ori the DECtape, then
read back to the processor and verified. The error causes the program
to execute test pattern 6 only once, then the program selects test
pattern 5 (0707) erroneously.
Error printouts could then occ~r for both test patterns.
testing of test pattern 6 can be made.

No significant

To correct error change location 4642 from 5630 JHP I GNPAl'5
to 5636 J~lP I GNPAT6.

(
I

'Section 6 Page

'-,

NOTE
Before any mechanical adjustments are performed I user maintenancepersonnel are directed to check the model tope transport provided with their system. Some PDP-12A systems are
equipped with the TU55 tope transports (instructions for which
are provided in this manual). Other PDP-12A systems employ
the TU56 transport. The users of these systems are directed to
the TU56 Maintenance Manual for the appropriate mechani cal
adjustment procedures.

4.5.1
4.5.1 .1

Brake Adjustment
Set-up Procedure
Procedure

Step

Turn off the power to the transport that is to be adjusted. Tapes should not be
mounted on the transport.

4.5.1.2

Slide the transport fully forward.

Remove the 115- Vac line cord from the transport.

Adjustment Procedure - The broke shoes ore located on the motor shafts as shown in Figure 4-13.

The brake shoes follow the rotation of the motor shaft (hubs).
ALLEN SET
SCREWS

BRAKE SHOE

. -.-....-~~. -.,~~-~-""- .-...-...-.~~-- -~-!-.~..

;

. L .004
-INCH
FEELE R GAUGE

Figure 4-13

TU5S Brake Adjustment

4-18

Procedure
Insert a .004-inch feeler gauge between the brake shoe and brake surface.

4.5.2

Adjust the brake for proper clearance by loosening the two allen setscrews on
the brake shoe and moving the brake in and out along the shaft.

After the adjustment is made and the allen setscrews are secured, rotate the hub
several revolutions by hand to be certain that there is not binding and that the
motor turns freely.

Set the FUNCTION control to LOCAL and pulse the DIRECTION switch. A
properly adjusted brake should produce a minimum of "clicking."

Repeat this procedure for each hub on all the TU55 transports.

Reinstall 115-Vac line cord.

ru55 Torque Adjustments

4.5.2.1

Set-up Procedure - The following equipment is required:

YOM or VTVM with a set of insulated clip leads.

Small long-shaft (6-inch) screwdriver.

c•

Osci II oscope •

4.5.2.2

Stop-Torque Adjustment
Procedure
Line voltage (ac) to TU55 on.

Scratch tape installed on both hubs.

Brake gap set as described in Paragraph 4.5.1 •

Switch the unit to LOCAL.

Connect the YOM to the tab terminals of module G850 at location A 12 {right
motor} as shown in Figure 4-14. Expect a reading of approximately 60 Vac.

Depress f\lVD - switch and release.

Adjust trimpot nearer the G850 handle for meter reading of 50 Vac.

Connect the YOM to the terminals of modul e G850 in location All (left
motor) as shown in Figure 4-14.

Depress the REV ..· switch and release.

Adjust the trimpot nearer the G850 handle for a meter reading of 60 Vac.

4-19

COMMON (GND) TERMINAL

.,' .v'

. ,'
"'r~''''' '
. ..7

v, '
i'

,:1 -

--. '

/ '" i

LOCATION A12
RIGHT MOTOR
I

LOCATION All ___
LEFT MOTOR
t

" -1'

----

.. .

.. --"

.-,

.---- .-:..

RIGHT MOTOR TERM I NAL

Figure 4-14

4.5.2.3

LEFT MOTOR TERMINAL

TU55 Torque Adjustment Tabs

Trailing Torque Adjustments
Step

Procedure
Connect the VOM to tab terminals of the G850 module in location A12 (right
motor). Expect 85 Vec.

Rewind the scratch tape so that the right reel is nearly full.

Depress and hold the REV +- switch so that the tape is winding onto the left reel
as the following adjustment is made.

Adjust the potentiometer farthest from the G850 module handle. Make certain
that the tape is still in motion while the adjustment is made. Adjust for 85 Vac.

Connect the VOM to the tabs of the G850 module in location All (left motor).

Wind the scratch tape so that the I eft reel is nearly full of tape.

Depress and hold the FWD ... switch so that the tape is winding onto the right
reel as this adjustment is made.

)
4-20

Step

Procedure
Adjust the potentiometer farthest from the G850 module handle for a meter
reading of 85 Vac (Figure 4-15). Make certain that the tape is still in motion
durlng the adjustment.

FRONT OF TAPE TRANSPORT

~".;:h."._-~'-"'''''~'-'>'''''':

:*-'~

~"'-' .;-~:.::---:.=7.;;~~

85 VAC
ADJUST .~

....

II' . .-' .. .- "
J I<-::'-~-:~"
< I,
.' ,'; ,
j

"'\

l i...
n

.. ~.;

,I
\

\ ...
60 VA C --=':"c::::>-ADJUST

I
1

\'
r

.~\-.---~

;

R303 MODULE TRIMPOT R9
DELAY ADJUST

Figure 4-15

4.5.2.4

TU55 Stop Del ay Adj ustment

Stop Delay Adjustment
Procedure
Switch the tape unit to LOCAL.

Set the oscilloscope as follows:
a.

Trigger: Channell.

Mode: Channell.

Channell: 2V/cm.

Sweep: lOms.

4-21

Step

Procedure

Connect the scope probe to A04D as shown in Figure 4-16.

Depress and release FWD

Adjust potentiometer R303 for approximately 80 ms delay, as shown in Figure 4-15, or
until tape snapping is minimal.

switch.

t ,-

'.
i

' }

I '

i,
"--..-

,
1

-::-." .

SCOPE PROBE
TO A04D

'1
~

I).

.i \

,, "

PROBE GROUND
Figure 4-16

4.5.3

Stop Torque Scope Connection

TU55 Transport Head Replacement and Adjustment Procedures

These procedures outline the steps necessary to effect a field (on-site) replacement and/or alignment of the
read/write tape head on the TU55 Tape Transport. The need for adjustment is indicated when the following
specifications are exceeded:
a.

The tape head is to be vertically aligned between the tape guides, projecting 1/8 inch above the
guide edges.

The maximum amount of tape skew should not exceed ± 3 j-Is.

4-22

4.5.3.1

Head Removal
Step

Procedure
At the tape transport control panel, set the REMOTE/OFF/LOCAL switch to
the OFF position and remove ac power to the computer.

4.5.3.2

Disconnect the ribbon connector from the G851 relay board.

Remove one of the two head clamps; loosen the other clamp.

Remove the tape head from the transport.

Head Installation
Step

Procedure
Replace the tape head with a new assembly, reversing steps 3 and 4 above.

4.5.3.3

Secure the mounting clamps.

While tightening the clamps, make certain that the tape head is vertically
aligned between the tape guides and that it is proiecting 1/8 inch above the
tape guides.

Head Skew Adiustment
Procedure

Step

Mount a DEC-certified master skew tape on the transport.

Connect the skew checker to the tape head ribbon connector and the tape
transport de supply terminals.
a.

Pin A of the checker connector should mate with the pin closest
to the larger end of the tape head connector.

In most installations, the power wiring is color-coded to correspond
with the russ wiring. In some transports, however, the +10V lead
may be red; in this case, this will be a green wire connection to the
checker.

Connect the oscilloscope probe to the point marked SKEW. Connect
the scope ground to the point marked GND (black). Adjust the
scope for a l-flS/cm horizontal sweep and a l-V/cm vertical sensitivity.

Determine the type of tape head in use; it may be a brush head or
another type. If the head on the skew checker is a brush type, set
the switch to BRUS H. If the head is a di fferent type, set the switch
to GJM. (Refer to Figure 4-17).

4-23

SKEW
B

BLK

SHIELD

' - - - ' " H,J

RED
--0----

BRUSH

F,P
0

WHT

BLU
--0- -- - ---

Rll1

WHT

BLU

--~

GJM

BRUSH

GJM
C

RED
12 -0127

Figure 4-17

Skew Checker Schematic Diagram

Step
2 (Cont)

Procedure
e.

Restore ac power to the computer and place the tape transport
REMOTE/OFF/LOCAL switch to the LOCAL position. While observing the oscilloscope, move the master skew tape back and
forth across the tape head. Note that the output of the skew
checker (as presented on the scope) does not exceed ±3 \-.IS.
(Refer to Figure 4-18.)

If the skew appears to be on the edge of the tape guides or
slightly out of specification, some skew adjustment can be made
by moving the tape head slightly to one side or the other and/or
alternately loosening and retightening the mounting screws of
the tape head clamps. In most cases, this action changes the
skew ± 1 \-.IS. If a large amount of skew is present, shimming of
the tape head becomes necessary.

4-24

.+1111111 III

I
-f-

-f-

- f-

NOTE : A RAGGED TRAILING EDGE
IS CAUSED BY TAPE BOUNCE
12- 0126

Figure 4-18

Skew Checker Output

Step

«>:;> 4.6

Procedure
Shim the Tape Head
o.

To determine the direction in which to shim, lightly press against
the moving tape on either side of the head. If skew is reduced
when pressing at the left side of the head, shim the right rail of the
head block. If the skew is reduced when pressing at the right side
of the head { remove the shim stock from the right rail. Use l/2-mi I
shim stock (available as "Scotch Tape Marker") { and shim only the
right rail of the head.

After shimming the head, realign the tape head (as directed in
steps 2 and 3 of Paragraph 4.4.8.2., Head Installation) and
recheck tho skew. The skew must be less than 3 ~ in both
directions.

ANALOG SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES

Paragraphs 4.6.1.1 through

4.6.~~e checks and adius.t~o be performed in the field.

are the A-D circuits (preamps and optional

Included

mu~ex.er-....,ch?lJ4nd
the VR12 display and control adjustment
..,....
" .

p,ocedu,e,. The InfonnaHan con,olned In ,hI, adiu.".4~t:n"~IY ,ha'e adiu"men~

4-25

.n Ich o,e

Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.5 Linearized : No Create Date : 2017:06:18 08:46:33-07:00 Modify Date : 2017:06:18 09:26:49-07:00 XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19 Metadata Date : 2017:06:18 09:26:49-07:00 Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:cd43482b-5e36-314a-82bb-d63d922f4e9e Instance ID : uuid:4e623258-ec0b-494c-b22c-68d8bbc34b1f Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in Page Layout : SinglePage Page Count : 493
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

DEC_Field_Service_Technical_Manual_1972 DEC Field Service Technical Manual 1972

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation